
Glass 'C 

Boak_J2_L3. 



W. & R. CHAMBERS'S WORKS. 



CHAMBER'S CYCLOPEDIA OF ENGLISH LITERATURE; 

A selection of the choicest productions of English Authors, 
from the earliest to the present time ; Connected hy a Criti- 
cal and Biographical History. Edited by Robert Chambers. 
In two vols, octavo, with upwards of 300 elegant illustrations. 
Price, in cloth, $5.00. 

*** The Publishers of the AMERICAN Edition of this valuable work desire 
to state, that, besides the numerous pictorial illustrations in the English Edition, 
they have greatly enriched the work by the addition of fine steel and mezzotint 
engravings of the heads of Shakspeare, Addison, Byron ; a full length portrait 
of Dr. Johnson, and a beautiful scenic representation of Oliver Goldsmith and 
Dr. Johnson. These elegant additions together with superior paper and bind- 
ing must give this a decided preference over all other editions. 

" We hail with peculiar pleasure the appearance of this work, and more espec- 
ially its republication in this country at a price which places it within the 
reach of a great number of readers, and for which they can expect to be remu- 
nerated only by a very extensive sale." 

" The selections given by Mr. Chambers from the works of the early English 
writers are copious, and judiciously made. ***** We shall conclude as we 
commenced, with expressing a hope that the publication which has called 
forth our remarks will exert an influence in directing the attention of the 
public to the literature of our forefathers." — North American Review. 

CHAMBERS'S MISCELLANY of Useful and Entertaining 
Knowledge, with elegant illustrative engravings. Edited bv 
William Chambers. Ten volumes, cloth. Price $10.00 

%* The design of the Miscellany is to supply the increasing demand for 
useful, instructive, and entertaining reading, and to bring all the aids of litera- 
ture to bear on the cultivation of the feelings and understanding of the people- 
to impress correct views on important moral and social questions — suppress 
every species of strife and savagery — cheer the lagging and desponding by the 
relation of tales drawn from the imagination of popular writers — rouse the 
fancy by descriptions of interesting foreign scenes — give a zest to every-day 
occupations by ballad and lyrical poetry— in short, to furnish an unobtrusive 
friend and guide, a lively fireside companion, as far as that object can be 
attained through the instrumentality of books. 

CHAMBERS'S LIBRARY FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. A series of 
small books, elegantly illuminated. Edited by William 
Chambers. Each volume forms a complete work, embel- 
lished with a fine steel engraving, and is sold separately. 
18mo. Price 37X cents. 

ORLA.NDINO: A Story of Self-Denial. By Maria Edgeworxii. 

THE LITTLE ROBINSON : And other Tales. 

UNCLE SAM'S MONEY BOX. By Mrs. S. C. Hall. 

JACOPO : Tales by Miss Edgeworth and others. 

TRUTH AND TRUST. Jervis Ryland — Victor and Lisette. 

ALFRED IN INDIA. CLEVER BOYS. 

MCRAL COURAGE. TALES OF OLD ENGLAND- 

[£F~ Other volumes are in preparation. 



REV. HARVEY NEWCOMB'S WORKS. 



ROW TO BE A LADY; A Book for Girls, containing useful 
hints on the formation of character. Fifth thousand. l£mo M 
gilt cloth. Price 50 cents. 

"Having daughters of his own, and having been many years employed in 
•writing for the voung, he hopes to be able to offer some good advice, in an 
entertaining way, for girls oi*lnisses, between the ages of eight and fifteen 
His object is, to assist them in forming their characters upon the best model 
that they may become well-bred, intelligent, refined, and good ; and then they 
will be real ladies, in the highest sense." — Preface. 

" They are full of wholesome and judicious counsels, which are well fitted to 
preserve the young from the numberless evils to which they are exposed, and 
to mould them to virtue and usefulness. There is a directness and earnestnesa 
pervading the whole, which must secure for it a ready access to the youthful 
mind and heart." — Albany Argus. 

HOW TO BE A MAN; A Book for Boys, containing usefu] 
hints on the formation of character. Fifth thousand. 18mo.. 
gilt cloth. Price 50 cents. 

"My design in writing has been to contribute something towards forming 
the character of those who are to be our future electors, legislators, governors, 
judges, ministers, lawyers, and physicians, — after the best model. It is 
intended for boys— or, if you please, for young gentlemen, in early youth, 
from eight or ten to fifteen or sixteen years of age." — Preface. 

" They contain wise ind important counsels and cautions, adapted to the 
young, and made entertaining by the interesting style and illustrations of the 
author. They are fine mirror?, in which are reflected the prominent linea- 
ments of the Christian young gentleman and ffOtmg lady. The execution of 
the works is of the first order, and the books will afford elegant and most prof- 
itable presents for the young." — American Pulpit. 

ANECDOTES FOR BOYS ; Entertaining Anecdotes and Narra- 
tives, illustrative of principles and character. 18rno., gilt cloth. 
Price 42 cents. 

" Nothing has a greater interest for a youthful mind than a well-told story, 
and no medium of conveying moral instructions so attractive or so successful. 
The influence of all such stories is far more powerful when the child is assured 
that they are true. The book before us is conducted upon these ideas. It is 
made up of a series of anecdotes, ever}' one of which inculcates some excel- 
lent moral lesson. We cannot too highly approve of the book, or too 6troDgly 
recommend it to parents." — Western Continent, Baltimore. 

ANECDOTES FOR GIRLS; Entertaining Anecdotes and Narra- 
tives, illustrative of principles and character. ISmo., gilt cloth. 
Price 42 cents. 

" There is a charm about these two beautiful volumes not to be mistaken. 
They are deeply interesting mid instructive, without being fictitious. The 
anecdotes are many, short, and spirited, with a mcral drawn from each, some* 
what after the manner of Tl^uj and no youth can read them without finding 
something therein adapted to every age, condition, and duty of life. Y.'e 
commend it to families and schools." — Albany Spectator. 

" lie desires to instruct rather than to dazzle; to infuse correct principles 
into the minds and the heart of the young, than cater to a depraved appetite 
for romantic excitement. "We cordially commend these volumes to all 
parents and children." — Christian Alliance. 

CHRISTIANITY DEMONSTRATED in four distinct and inde- 
pendent series of proofs ; with an explanation of the Types and 
Prophecies concerning the Messiah. 12mo. Price 75 cents. 

%* Tb? object of the writer has been to classify and condense the evidence, 
that the win V force of each particular kind might be seen at one view. He 
has also air.c'. to render the work practiced, so as to have it a book to be read 
as well ae it ../<',</. The Types and Prophesies furnish an important specie* 
»>f evide jo<, ».rtd are rich iu instruction upon the way of Salvation. 




1>k Soto and his Company offering Pbayeb 



i H 



■K 



m 



' * OF THE 

h 



A I 




NOVELTIES 



THE NEW WORLD 



OR, THE 



ADVENTURES AND DISCOVERIES OF THE FIRST 
EXPLORERS OF NORTH AMERICA. 



JOSEPH BANVARD, 

AUTHOR OF "PLYMOUTH AND THE P I L G E I M S," £ T C, E T C. 



5I2H ttfj Illustrations. 

BOSTON: 
GOULD AND LINCOLN, 

59 WASHINGTON STREET. 
18 5 2. 



iris? 

.(3*3 



45562 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1851, by 
GOULD AND LINCOLN, 
the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 



toys 




.,,*<# 



STEREOTYPED AT THE 

BOSTON STEREOTYPE FOUNDRT. 

•EOKUE C. RAND, PRINTER, CORNHILL. 



NOTICE. 



The Publishers, on issuing the second volume of Rev. 
Mr. Banvard's Series of American Histories, are happy 
to state that the commendatory notices of the press, and 
the rapid sale of the first volume, give flattering encour- 
agement for the series. Other volumes are in course of 
preparation. 

This series will embrace the most interesting and impor- 
tant events which have occurred in the United States since 
the first settlement of the country ; illustrating the trials 
and adventures of the early colonists both at the North and 
the South, their intercourse and conflicts with the natives, 
their peculiarities of character and manners, the -gradual 
development of their institutions, sketches of their promi- 
nent men in both the Church and the State, incidents in the 
Revolution, with various other subjects of interest of more 
recent date. They will be adapted to the popular mind, and 
especially to the youth of our country, and will contain 
numerous fine engravings. There will be twelve or more 
lGmo. volumes, consisting of about three hundred pages 
each, each volume to be complete in itself; and yet, when 
all are published, they will, together, form a regular Series 
of American Histories. 

The next volume will contain a particular account of the 
incidents which occurred in the first settlement of Virginia 
— the colonies of Sir Walter Raleigh ; the history of Cap- 
tain John Smith; and the romantic adventures of Poca- 
hontas. 



PREFACE. 



After the discovery of America, a number 
of years elapsed before any permanent settle- 
ments were formed, especially on the northern 
portion of the continent. During this interval, 
and also after colonies began to be planted, 
courageous and enterprising men made various 
explorations along its almost interminable 
coasts, and into its vast, unknown interior. In 
these excursions they had numerous interviews 
with the natives, to whom they were as strange, 
in their appearance, language, and manners, 
as the wild natives were to them. Sometimes 
this intercourse was friendly, at other times bel- 
ligerent. It resulted in many adventures, both 
romantic and tragic, and also in many geo- 
graphical discoveries. 

To give an account of the more important of 
these adventures and discoveries is the object 
of the present volume. Chronological order 
has been observed, so far as it would not inter- 
fere with the continuous narrative respecting 
particular individuals. 



8 PREFACE. 

Beginning with a brief account of Christo- 
pher Columbus, we have given the adventures 
of John and Sebastian Cabot, the discoverers 
of North America ; Cortereal, the kidnapper 
of the Labrador Indians ; Ponce de Leon, the 
romantic wanderer after the fountain of perpet- 
ual youth; Verazzano, the Florentine adven- 
turer ; Narvaez, the Floridian gold-seeker ; Car- 
tier, the discoverer of the St. Lawrence ; De 
Soto, the proud cavalier, who discovered the 
Mississippi only to be buried beneath its waters ; 
Frobisher, who carried home cargoes of worth- 
less stone, under the impression that it was 
gold ore ; John Davis, the bold navigator among 
the icebergs of the north ; Hore, with his man- 
eating crew ; Weymouth, and his conspirators ; 
Hudson, who first discovered the great artery 
of New York; Champlain, the Canadian pi- 
oneer ; Marquette, the gentle missionary ; La 
Salle, the indomitable explorer of the Father 
of Waters ; and Father Hennepin, the discov- 
erer of the Falls of St. Anthony. 

From these accounts a correct opinion may 
be formed of the kind of experience which those 
underwent who first traversed the coast and 
explored the interior of this great continent. 



LIST 

OF 

ILLUSTRATIONS 



V I. FRONTISPIECE. 

J II. ILLUSTRATED TITLE PAGE. 

III. NOVEL MODE OF BARTERING, ... 43 

IV. MAN-RIDING KING, 47 

V. DE SOTO'S LANDING IN FLORIDA, . . 83 

VI. FIRING OF DE SOTO'S CANNON, . . .121 

Vil. DE SOTO OFFERING PRAYER FOR RAIN, 135 

VIII. FROBISHER SEIZING AN INDIAN, . . 149 

IX. THE STERN THIEF, 223 

X. LA SALLE'S VOYAGE DOWN LAKE MICHIGAN, 265 

XL SHOOTING A BEAR AFTER GRAPES, . 268 

XII. LA SALLE HUNTING OPOSSUMS, . . .273 

XIII. RAISING THE THREE CALUMETS, . . 278 

XIV. INDIAN MODE OF KINDLING A FIRE, . . 302 



CONTENTS 



CHAPTER I. 

America unknown. — Columbus. — His Difficulties. — Discovers Cat 
Island. — Erroneous Conjecture. — Columbus's Second Voyage. — 
Third Voyage. — Discovers the Main Land. — John Cabot's Patent. — 
He discovers Labrador. — The Natives. — Productions. — He kidnaps 
Indians. — Sebastian Cabot. — Discovers a great River. — Extent of 
his Coasting. — Gaspar Cortereal. — Old Way to India. — New Way 
desired. — Cortereal's Object. — Reaches the Coast. — His Observa- 
tions. — Turns Kidnapper. — Enthusiasm on his Return Home. — His 
Second Voyage. — Discovers Greenland. — His End. — Miguel Cor- 
tereal. — His Voyage. — Results. — Spanish Conquests. — Ponce de 
Leon. — Seeks for Geld. — Imprudent Chief. — Ponce's Promotion. — 
Effect of Imagination. — Welcome News. — Ponce enthusiastic. — 
Chimerical Voyage. — Mysterious Fountain. — Accidental Discov- 
eries.— One by Ponce. — Origin of "Florida." — Spanish Assump- 
tions. — Ponce a Governor. — Loses Reputation. — Attempts a Land- 
ing. — His Reception by the Indians. — Defeat and Death 



CHAPTER II. 

Traffic in human Beings. — John de Verazzano. — Coasts North Amer- 
ica. — A narrow Escape. — Fears and Friends. — Two Squaws dis- 
covered. — A Child stolen. — Verazzano's Discoveries. — Enters 



12 CONTENTS. 

Newport. — Block Island. — Suspicious Indians. — Fears overcome. — 
Two Kings. — Their Attire. — Effects of Prejudice against Yellow. — 
Mirrors rejected. — A novel Mode of Bartering. — Contemptuous Con- 
duct. — Verazzano returns. — First Description of North America. — 
Claims of France. — Verazzano's Death 34 



CHAPTER III. 

Attempts at colonizing. — Failures. — Pamphilo de Narvaez. — Terrific 
Hurricane. — Sacrilegious Proceeding. — Narvaez seeks for Gold. — 
A Man-riding Chief. — An Accident. — A Town taken. — Ambush. — 
The Party diminished — The Sea found. — Original Boat-building. — 
Perilous Coasting. — Boats scattered. — End of the Expedition. — Al- 
varo Nunez escapes. — Juan de Ortiz remains behind 45 



CHAPTER IV. 

James Cartier. — Island of Birds. — Effect of Musketry. — Effect of 
Presents Timid Damsels. — Miserable Livers. — Great Gulf dis- 
covered and explored. — Donnaconna. — Gives away two of his 
Children. — Frightful Stories. — Strange Mode of Warning. — The 
River. — Hochelega. — Native Hospitality. — Venerated Chief. — 
Meaning of " Montreal." — Dreadful Disease. — A deceptive Device. — 
Ceremonies and Vows. — Indian Remedy. — King stealing. — The 
Trap laid, and sprung. — Grief turned to Joy. — Kidnapped King 
introduced to Court. — Lord of Roberval. — Expedition of Hore. — 
Fat Birds. — Following the Natives. — Primitive Cooking. — Intense 
Sufferings. — Cannibalism. — The fatal Lot. — Starvation in the Midst 
of Plenty. — Welcome Arrival. — Piracy. — The two Kings 54 



CHAPTER V. 

Hernando de Soto. — His Bravery and Skill. — His Horsemanship be- 
fore the Inca. — The Inca's Cruelty. — De Soto's Wealth. — His 
Appearance at Court. — Isabella de Bobadilla a Bride. — Return of 



CONTENTS. 13 

Nunez. — His exciting Reports. — Mode of conducting Expeditions 
of Discovery. — De Soto assumes all Expense Portuguese Volun- 
teers. — Their Enthusiasm. — Andrew de Vasconselos and Follow- 
ers. — Grand Review. — Appearance of the Spaniards. — Armor of 
the Portuguese. — Second Review. — Humiliating Contrast. — The 
Number of Adventurers. — Conversion of the Indians desired. — 
Priests and Monks .68 



CHAPTER VI. 

The Departure. — Canary Islands — Merriment. — The beautiful Leo- 
nora. — Arrival at Cuba. — Spanish Amusements. — An Officer cash- 
iered. — An important Volunteer. — Juan de Anasco. — Goes in 
search of a Harbor. — His Adventures. — The Land. — First Bat- 
tle. — Porcallo's Exploit. — An imposing Scene. — Inconveniences. — 
Guides desert. — Native Houses. — Revenge. — Exploring Parties.— 
Hear of a Spaniard.— Juan Ortiz. — A happy Meeting. — The cleft 
Stick. — Spanish Captives. — Their Tortures. — Female Kindness. — 
Juan's Sufferings. — A hot Bed. — Midnight Encounter in a Grave- 
yard. — Juan doomed a Sacrifice. — Female Informer. — A Wife lost 
for Kindness' Sake 78 



CHAPTER VII. 
The Vessels return. — Urribarracaxi. — Treacherous Guides. — Treat- 
ment of the Dead. — An Indian Freak. — A sagacious Hound. — Its 
End. — A villanous Plot. — The Counterplot. — Deceitful Review. — 
Dreadful Conflict. — Warriors in the Water. — A second Plot. — A 
fearful Struggle. — A desperate Captive. — A narrow Escape. — In- 
dians compelled to massacre. — Its Object. — A difficult March. — 
Power of the Bow. — Towns abandoned. — The Reason 93 



CHAPTER VIII. 

Exploring Parties. — Guide murdered. — Ocean found. — Traces of 
Narvaez. — Signals. — Anasco's Expedition. — Avoids the Natives. — 

2 



14 CONTENTS. 

His Dangers. — Sufferings from Cold. — Suspense. — Acute Smell- 
ing. — A Breakfast Party. — Attacked and taken. — Plans for an 
Emergency. — Joyful Discovery. — Happy Meeting. — Captives liber- 
ated. — Different Routes. — Calderon's Courage. — Signals discov- 
ered. — A fat Chief. — His Concealment. — Capture. — Stratagem. — 
Escape. — Declarations of the Guard.— Superstition and Necroman- 
cy.— De Soto's Policy. 106 



CHAPTER IX. 

Winter Experience. — Golden Reports. — Effects of Cruelty. — Tree 
shot down. — Cannon left. — Cofaqui. — Peter's Alarm. — His Bap- 
tism. — Large Escort. — The Course lost. — The Army bewildered. — 
The Swine useful. — Anasco's Success. — Beautiful Squaw-Sachem.— . 
Her Courtesy. — A Suicide. — The Princess captured. — Gold proves 
to be Copper. — Pearls. — Spanish Mail. — The Princess escapes. — 
Her Cruelty. — Gigantic Chief. — Battle of Mauvila. — Engagement 
of the Rearguard. — Results of the Battle. — A Night of Agony 118 



CHAPTER X. 

Ecclesiastical Losses. — Dry Mass. — Rumor of Ships. — De Soto's 
Change. — Battle at Night. — Moscoso cashiered. — Novel Bedding. — 
Fortified Town. — The Mississippi discovered. — Great Change. — 
Indian's Request. — Imposing Service. — Boats destroyed. — Death of 
De Soto. — His double Burial. — Moscoso his Successor. — Arrival in 
Mexico. — The Route. — The Time occupied. — The Termination. — 
Diminished Numbers. — The Policy and Influence of the Spaniards.— 
Bloodhounds. — Sunday the sailing Day 130 



CHAPTER XI. 

Our Plan. — Sir Martin Frobisher. — Queen. — Pinnacled Coast. — Dan- 
gers.— Men lost. — Discouragements resisted.— Beautiful Sight.— 



CONTENTS. 15 

Straits discovered. — Jlighty Deer. — Escape from Indians. — Vis- 
itors. — Boat's Crew captured. — Frobisher badly off. — Decoy 
Bell. — Man caught. — Tongue bitten. — Reports of Gold. — The 
black Stone. — Second Voyage. — Gold seeking. — Conflicts. — Sus- 
picions of a cloven Foot. — Woman licks Wounds. — Lameness 
feigned. — Talking to a Picture. — Vessels loaded. — Meta incogni- 
to.— Third Voyage. — Dogs. — Whales. — A Whale run down. — 
Fresh Water from Icebergs. — The Dennis destroyed. — Sudden 
Changes. — Refining the Ore. — False Stories. — The Truth dis- 
covered .- 143 



CHAPTER XII. 

Sir Francis Drake. — Visits California.— San Francisco. — Singular 
Conduct. — Imposing Visit. — Supposed Coronation. — Professing Al- 
legiance. — The Californians. — Drake takes Possession. — Visits 
Florida. — St. Augustine. — A French Captive. — Spaniards flee. — 
Death of Powell. — The Town destroyed. — Drake visits Virginia. — 
Raleigh's Colony. — New Calamity. — The Colony disheartened.— 
Their Interpretation of Providence. — They are taken Home. — Gov- 
ernor Lane. — Tobacco introduced into England 163 



CHAPTER XIII. 

Captain John Davis. — Great Roaring. — Its Cause. — Land of Desola- 
tion.— Band of Music — Its Effect.— Friendly Alliance. — Bear 
Hunting. — Mistake about Dogs. — Davis's Discoveries. — Amuse- 
ments. — Change in the Natives. — Ringleader taken. — Interesting 
Phenomenon. — Game. — Secret Attack. — Sun shines twenty-four 
Hours. — Fat Dogs. — Stag Hunt. — The Marquis de la Roche.— 
Sable Island Sufferers. — Captain George Weymouth. — Fresh Water 
from Icebergs. — Effect of Ice upon the Vessel. — Sailors appalled. — 
They mutiny. — Weymouth yields. — He sails South. — Finds an 
Inlet. — Nain. — Great Storm. — His Return. — Bartholomew Gos- 



16 CONTENTS. 

noli — Indians with a European Shallop. — Cape Cod discovered 

A perpetual Name. — Elizabeth Island. — A Colony. — Its End. — Its 
Ruins 174 



CHAPTER XIV. 

Dutch Enterprise. — Henry Hudson. — Arrives at Sandy Hook. — 
Horseshoe Harbor. — Soundings. — Coney Island. — Productions. — 
Visitors. — Indian Alliance. — Mr. Heckewelder. — Interesting Tra- 
dition. — The long House. — How it was shortened. — The Conduct 
of the Natives. — The Crew land. — What they saw. — Hudson sus- 
picious. — Unfortunate Adventure. — A gloomy Night. — A sad 
Spectacle. — The Burial. — Coleman's Point — Precautionary Meas- 
ures. — More Visitors. — Indian Stratagem. — Indians captured. — 
One escapes. — Red Coats. — Discovers a great River. — Its Names. — 
Show of Love. — Want of Confidence 194 



CHAPTER XV. 

Suspicious Visitors. — Hudson's Progress. — The Highlands. — Thick 
Fog. — Effect of its Disappearance. — The two Captives again.— 
Catskill Mountains. — Loving People. — Cause of bad Luck. — 
Trade. — Hudson. — Shoals. — Adventures of the Mate.— Proof of 
Friendship. — Feeling the Way. — Hudson intoxicates the Indians. — 
Modest Wife. — Drunken Chief. — Effect upon the People. — Wam- 
pum. — The Chief recovers. — Thank Offering 205 



CHAPTER XVI. 

Effect of Ardent Spirits. — Heckewelder. — Singular Tradition. — 
Great Surprise. — Opinions concerning the Arrival of the first Ship. — 
Effect upon the Indians. — Preparation for its Reception. — Grand 
Dance. — Exciting Reports of the Runners. — Salutations ex- 
changed.— A Man In Red. — How he is received. — He drinks, and 



CONTENTS. 17 

offers the Glass to the Indians. — Their Conduct. — One of them, 
after a Speech, drinks. — Its Effect. — His Assertions. — His Exam- 
ple followed. — General Intoxication. — Presents. — Their ridiculous 
Use of them. — The Whites considered Gods. — Story of the Bul- 
lock's Hide. — Indians outwitted. — Locality of this Scene. — Differ- 
ent Names of Manhattan Island 213 



CHAPTER XVII. 

Hudson's highest Point. — He descends. — Lands. — Trees. — The old 
Man again. — Disappointed Chief. — Fishing. — Newburgh. — Hard 
Metal. — A Boat Thief. — An Affray. — Effect of a Gun. — The two 
Captives again. — An Attack. — The Repulse. — Attack renewed.— 
Falcon. — Its Execution. — Both Parties retreat. — Appearance of 
Ore. — Sail along Manhattan. — The Half Moon at Sea. — Magic 
Change. — Different Rates of Travel. — The Time Hudson occupied 
in exploring the River. — Extent of the Country. — Population.— 
English Prohibition. — Crew mutinies. — Hudson returns 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

Rum and Gunpowder. — Samuel Champlain. — His Discovery. — 
French and Indian Allies. — A War Party. —The Five Nations.— 
Champlain passes up the St. Lawrence. — Lake St. Peter. — Sorelle 
River. — Indian Deception. — Dangerous Rapids. — Vessel sent 
back. — Vigilance. — Beautiful Country. — Superstitious Incanta- 
tions. — Champlain's pretended Dream. — Its happy Effect. — Pas- 
sage through Lake Champlain. — Transparent Water. — Unexpected 
Meeting. — Singular Message. — Morning Battle. — Novel Expedi- 
ent—Effect of Fire-arms. — Victorious Rejoicings. — Indian Prac- 
tice after a Battle. — Tortures. — Champlain returns to France 232 



CHAPTER XIX. 
Rumors of a great River. — Opinions concerning it. — Reasons for visit- 
ing it. — The exploring Party. —Wild Rice Indians. — Their Ad- 

2* 



18 CONTENTS. 

vice. — Alarming Stories. — Salt Bay. — No Salt. — Beautiful Land- 
scape. — A Cross discovered. — Village in Commotion. — The 
Portage. — Pleasant Sail. — Iron Mines. — The Mississippi Mode of 
Travelling. — Welcome Paths. — Romantic Cluster of Villages. — 
Their judicious Approach. — Friendly Reception. — Courteous Enter- 
tainment. — The Calumet. — Council. — Feast. — Escort. — Meaning 
of "Illinois." — Departure. — Looking out for a River. — Discover 
huge painted Monsters 241 



CHAPTER XX. 

Marquette discovers the Missouri. — Effect of its Waters upon the 'Mis- 
sissippi. — Marquette's Opinions. — The Platte and Colorado. — The 
Ohio passed. — Spirit's Residence. — Ochres. — Reeds. — Interview 
with Indians. — Possess European Articles. — Warlike Movements 
allayed by the Calumet. — Interpreter discovered. — Arkansas In- 
dians. — Escort of ten Canoes. — Distance of the Sea. — The Party 
in Danger. — The Peril escaped. — Reasons for returning. — Enter 
the Illinois. — A Chief invites Marquette to return. — Reach Chica- 
go. — Time of Absence. — Marquette settles as a Missionary. — His 
Presentiment. — His rural Worship. — His Retirement. — His singu- 
lar Decease 253 



CHAPTER XXI. 

La Salle. — His Opinions about China. — His Desire for Adventure. — 

His Patents His Company. — Builds a Vessel. — First Voyage. — 

Great Storm. — A Vow to St. Anthony. — False Rumors. — The 
Griffin lost. — Noise forbidden. — A Bear shot. — Effect of the Re- 
port. — Robbery. — False Friendship. — Case of Perplexity. — A Bat- 
tle at Hand. — Effect of a Parley. — The Difficulty adjusted. — Want 
of Food. — Arrival of De Tonty. — La Salle lost. — Kills Opos- 
sums. — Finds the Company. — Disagreeablo Voyage. — The wel- 
come Buffalo. — Forsaken Village. — The Reason. — La Salle seizes 



CONTENTS. 19 

Corn. — New Year's Day. — Mass. — Hennepin exhorts the Men. — 
The Effect. — Lake Peoria. — Meaning of the Name 261 



CHAPTER XXII. 

A Village. — Bold Approach. — La Salle's Policy. — Three Calumets. — 
Friendly Understanding. — Ceremonious Hospitality. — La Salle'3 
Explanation. — Pay for Corn. — Sudden Change. — Effect of Slan- 
der. — More terrible Stories. — Deserters. — A Proposition. — Fort of 
the Broken Heart. — Ship-building. — Bold Resolution. — Troubles 
accumulate. — A constant Friend. — Change of Plan. — Tonty with 
the Illinois. — Alarming Report. — Tonty 's Danger. — Sudden Re- 
treat. — Father de la Ribourde walks in the Wood. — Never re- 
turns. — His Death. — Painful Travelling. — Sieur de Boisrondet 
lost. — His Adventures. — Three great Captains 276 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

The Party. — Women and Children with them. — Employments of the 
Women. — Ice. — A Man lost. — Unnecessary Alarm. -? Means of 
Defence. — Friendly Relations. — La Salle takes Possession. — In- 
dian King. — Native Royalty. — Permanent Dwellings. — A Canoe 
chased. — Numerous Natives. — Respect for the Calumet. — Natch- 
ez. — Escort. — Abandoned Village. — Horrid Spectacle. — Three 
Channels. — A Party explores each. — The Gulf of Mexico reached. — 
La Salle takes Possession of Louisiana. — Evidence of Possession. — 
He returns. — Ascent of the River difficult 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

Father Hennepin. — A Fleet of Canoes. — Hennepin interrupts it. — Is 
captured. — Crying Indians. — Prisoners doomed to die. — Hennepin's 
Course. — Captivity instead of Death. — Strength of the Natives. — 



20 CONTENTS. 

Dance of the Reed. — Chief Aquipaguetin. — Makes a Feast. — Sin- 
gular Conduct. — Indian Cunning. — Lake of Tears. — Captives in 
Suspense. — Mode of kindling a Fire. — Falls of St. Anthony. — 
Separation of the Captives. — Pace quickened by Fire. — The Chalice 
a supposed Spirit. — A comic Musician. — Hennepin adopted. — His 
Treatment. — Ridiculous Scene. — Indian Sweat. — The Compass. — 
The Pot and Lion. — Mode of learning the Language. — Putting 
Black to White. — Infant Baptism. — Infant dies. — Hennepin's con- 
soling Reflections 296 



CHAPTER XXV. 

Pierced Pine. — An Offering and Prayer to the Falls. — The Vow ful- 
filled. — Picard forgets his Powder. — A great Serpent. — Disturbance 
in Camp. — The Law of Hunting. — Hennepin goes to the Wiscon- 
sin. — His Disappointment. — Is reduced to great Straits. — Indiau 
and Thorn. — Effect of Excitement. — Great Alarm. — A Drove of 
Stags. — Fire Spirits. — Sieur du Luth. — His Equipage. — Henne- 
pin's pretended Relationship. — Digs up his Property. — His Discov- 
eries. — The Party leave the Indians. — They fire a parting Salute. — 
Its Effect. — They steal a votive Offering. — Arrive at Mackinaw. — 
Hennepin's Description of Niagara Falls. — Columbus and the 
Birds. — Small Vessels. — Watchful Providence 313 



CHAPTER I. 

America unknown. — Columbus. — His Difficulties. — Discovers 
Cat Island. — Erroneous Conjecture. — Columbus's Second 
Voyage. — Third Voyage. — Discovers the Main Land. — John 
Cabot's Patent. — He discovers Labrador. — The Natives. — 
Productions. — He kidnaps Indians. — Sebastian Cabot. — 
Discovers a great River. — Extent of his Coasting. — Gaspar 
Cortereal. — Old Way to India. — New Way desired. — Corte- 
real's Object. — Reaches the Coast. — His Observations. — 
Turns Kidnapper. — Enthusiasm on his Return Home. — His 
Second Voyage. — Discovers Greenland. — His End. — Miguel 
Cortereal. — His Voyage. — Results. — Spanish Conquests. — 
Ponce de Leon. — Seeks for Gold. — Imprudent Chief. — Ponce's 
Promotion. — Effect of Imagination. — Welcome News. — 
Ponce enthusiastic. — Chimerical Voyage. — Mysterious Foun- 
tain. — Accidental Discoveries. — One by Ponce. — Origin of 
u Florida." — Spanish Assumptions. — Ponce a Governor. — 
Loses Reputation. — Attempts a Landing. — His Reception by 
the Indians. — Defeat and Death. 

Previous to the voyages of Christopher Colum- 
bus, the existence of the immense continent of 
America was unknown to the nations of the eastern 
hemisphere. Here was a territory of many thou- 
sands of miles in extent, containing the largest riv- 
ers, lakes, and mountains in the world, with numer- 
ous towns and villages, some of whose inhabitants, 
especially in the southern part of the continent, had 
made considerable progress towards civilization \ 



22 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA. 

and yet a knowledge of these facts was concealed 
from all the rest of the world. The ocean, which, 
by the art of navigation, is now converted into a 
highway of communication between the two conti- 
nents, was then an impassable barrier. It is no easy 
task, at the present time, to conceive the difficulties 
which must have beset those who were the pioneers 
in the discovery of the different parts of this western 
world. 

Columbus, a native of Genoa, in Italy, from the 
time he first projected a voyage for the purpose of 
discovering either a new continent, or a western pas- 
sage to the East Indies, until he landed upon the 
new world, was surrounded by embarrassments suffi- 
ciently numerous and great to have totally dis- 
couraged any other than a man of indomitable per- 
severance. But he was not doomed to a disappoint- 
ment. His unfaltering hope, his ceaseless industry, 
his patient self-denial, and his inflexibility of pur- 
pose, were all rewarded when, at midnight, on the 
12th of October, old style, 1492, the cheering cry of 
" Land ! land ! " was heard from on board his vessel, 
which, for two months, had been tossed about upon 
the restless billows of an apparently shoreless ocean. 
The land proved to be Cat Island, sometimes called 
San Salvador, one of the Bahamas. 

As Columbus had sailed under the auspices of 
Ferdinand and Isabella, of Spain, he took posses- 



JOHN CABOT. 23 

sion of the newly-discovered country in their name. 
After visiting various other islands, he returned to 
communicate the results of his voyage. The im- 
portant intelligence was soon diffused, and every 
where elicited the spirit of inquiry and adventure. 
It was generally supposed that the lands which he 
had discovered were the western extremity of India. 
For this reason they were generally spoken of as 
the Indies. After this opinion was known to be er- 
roneous, they were still designated the West Indies, 
which name they have always retained. 

On the 25th of September, 1493, Columbus set 
sail from Cadiz on his second voyage, and on the 
2d of November he discovered one of the Caribbee 
Islands, to winch he gave the name of Dominico. 
After cruising several weeks among these islands, 
and establishing a colony, he returned without see- 
ing the main land. This was reserved for his third 
voyage, when he had the honor to land on the coast 
of Paria, in South America. Columbus made one 
voyage more, but without effecting any addition- 
al important discoveries. He never saw North 
America ! 

Previous to his third voyage, Henry VII., King 
of England, was aroused to the importance of en- 
gaging in maritime adventure. He gave to John 
Cabot, a Venetian merchant, whose residence was in 
Bristol, a patent, authorizing him and his three sons, 



24 cabot's discovery. 

or either of them, their heirs, or their deputies, to 
explore the eastern, western, or northern sea, at 
their own expense. They were to raise the royal 
banners of England over any castles, towns, cities, 
islands, or continents which they might discover, and 
rule over them as governors, subject to the crown 
of England. They also had guarantied to them 
the monopoly of the trade of the countries which 
they should discover, on condition that all their pro- 
ductions should be brought into the port of Bristol, 
where they were to be received free of duties, and 
also, that, when sold, one fifth of their net profits 
should be paid into the royal treasury. 

Under this patent, Cabot set sail from England in 
May, 1497, in a vessel called the Matthew, and on 
June 24th, came in sight of land near the fifty-sixth 
degree of north latitude — probably the coast of 
Labrador, which afterwards was sometimes called 
Newfoundland. Thus the North American conti- 
nent was discovered by a private commercial com- 
pany, under the protection of the King of England, 
more than a year before the main land of South 
America was seen by Columbus. This original dis- 
covery established the right of England, above other 
European nations, to take possession of the newly- 
discovered lands on the North American continent. 
But justice demanded that previous to their occupancy 
by colonies, they should be purchased of the natives 



KIDNAPPING OF INDIANS. 25 

for a fair equivalent. These natives were rude 
Indians. In an old document, which is said to be 
an extract taken out of the map of Sebastian Cabot, 
cut by Clement Adams, they are said to " wear 
beasts' skins, and have them in as great estimation 
as we have our finest garments. In their warres, 
they use bowes, arrowes, pikes, darts, wooden clubs, 
and slings. The soil is barren in some places, and 
yeeldeth little fruit, but it is full of white bears and 
stagges far greater than ours. It yeeldeth plenty 
of fish, and those very great as seales, and those 
which we commonly call salmons ; there are soles, 
also, above a yard in length, but especially there is 
great abundance of that kind of fish which the sav- 
ages call baccalaos." Hawks were seen as black as 
ravens, and partridges and eagles of a similar color. 
The fish called baccalaos were the cod, whose fish- 
ery at the present time furnishes employment to a 
large number of men. 

Cabot induced some of the natives to come on 
board his vessel, three of whom he took to England. 
At first, they wore their own costume, and are said 
to have eaten raw flesh. They afterwards adopted 
English garments, and in the course of two years 
were so far Anglicized in appearance that they 
ceased to attract special attention. 

After the decease of John Cabot, Sebastian, his 
son, went to Spain. By the Spanish king he was 
3 



26 



ROUTES TO INDIA. 



sent to the coast of Brazil, where he had the honor 
of discovering the magnificent Rio de la Plata, or 
River of Plate. He subsequently returned to Eng- 
land, obtained another patent, and revisited Labra- 
dor, with a company of three hundred persons. He 
coasted as far south as Maryland, and as far north 
as the sixty-second degree of latitude, entering the 
straits and bay which have since been named after 
Hudson. He is said by some historians to have 
made a third voyage to America ; but as no im- 
portant particulars are given of his voyages to this 
country,, except his discovery of the continent, we 
shall here part company with him. 

The next adventurer who claims our attention is 
Gaspar Cortereal, a Portuguese, who, in the year 
1500, visited Newfoundland. 

The usual course to the rich, spice-producing 
countries of the East Indies, at that period, was by a 
tedious, dangerous, and expensive voyage round the 
Cape of Good Hope and through the Indian Ocean. 
It was a great desideratum to find some other pas- 
sage which would be less tedious and costly. It had 
been by some conjectured that possibly a new route 
might be found by sailing in an opposite direction 
from the Cape of Good Hope, to the north-west. 
If the earth was round, why could they not reach 
the Indies by sailing to the north-west as well as the 
south-east X One object of Gaspar Cortereal was, 



APPEARANCE OF LABRADOR. 27 

to discover this north-west passage to China and the 
Spice Islands. Having arrived at Newfoundland, 
he directed his course northward along the bleak 
and rocky coast, to which he gave the name of Lab- 
rador, which it still retains. He observed that por- 
tions of the country along which he sailed were 
covered with forests, the timber of which was well 
adapted for masts and spars of ships. The waters 
were full of fish. The inhabitants were robust and 
hardy, though poor. They were skilful in the use 
of the bow, were clothed in skins, and lived in 
caves. Cortereal managed to get fifty or more of 
them on board his vessel, whom he kidnapped, and 
afterwards sold as slaves ! He sailed as far north 
as the fiftieth degree of latitude, when, in conse- 
quence of the severity of the cold, and the dangers 
arising from the icebergs which were floating around 
him, he concluded to postpone further operations 
till next year. He returned, and gave such a favor- 
able account of his voyage, and expressed such san- 
guine hopes of discovering the long-looked-for north- 
west passage, that the court caught his enthusiasm, 
and authorized him to make another voyage, with 
two vessels under his command. He did so. The 
voyage proceeded favorably till they reached a coast 
to which they gave the name of Terra Verde, 
(Greenland ;) not the country which is now called 
Greenland, but some part of the coast which they 



28 THE CORTEREALS. 

had visited before, but which probably appeared to 
them more verdant than on their former voyage. 
Here a violent storm arose, which separated the two 
vessels. The one which contained Cortereal was 
never seen again. It is said by some that he was 
slain in a conflict with the natives, whom he was en- 
deavoring to kidnap. If so, he received no more 
than was his due. The practice of the early voy- 
agers to this country of kidnapping the free sons 
of the forest, and reducing them to slavery in a 
foreign land, cannot be too strongly denounced. 

Gaspar Cortereal had a younger brother, whose 
name was Miguel. Being deeply afflicted at the long 
absence of his brother, he went, with the permission 
of the king, in search of him. He had three ves- 
sels. When they arrived near the coast of North 
America, they each took a separate course, with 
orders to meet at a designated place of rendezvous 
by the 20th of August. Two of them kept the 
appointment, but Miguel did not. He was never 
heard from after parting with his companions. A 
third brother still remained, who would have gone 
in pursuit of the other two if he had not received a 
prohibition from the king. Since these unfortunate 
voyages, the Portuguese have made no attempt to 
form a settlement on any part of the coast, though 
they were among the first who engaged in the 
Newfoundland fishery, and carried it on upon an 
extensive scale. 



A GOLD SEEKER. 29 

After this, the attention of adventurers was 
drawn to the southerly part of the coast. The 
Spaniards had already commenced their successful 
career of conquest in the gold-producing countries 
of South America. This not only whetted the ap- 
petite of the nation for similar conquests elsewhere, 
but also trained up a band of hardy, adventurous 
soldiery, to whom nothing was more attractive than 
a field for new discoveries, where, with their Toledo 
blades and noble steeds, they might carve out a for- 
tune for themselves. Among these was Juan Ponce 
de Leon, a renowned cavalier, who had served with 
much distinction under Columbus. Having been 
informed by the natives of one of the West India 
Islands that Porto Rico, an island lying east of 
Hayti, abounded in gold, he could not resist the 
temptation to make it a visit. After successfully 
effecting a landing, and being well received by its 
inhabitants, he made inquiries for the precious metal. 
The cacique, or chief, led him all over the island, 
and pointed out to him the different localities where 
the treasure could be found. After subjugating the 
natives, Ponce de Leon established a colony, and, as 
a reward for his discovery and services, was appoint- 
ed governor of the island. Although he obtained 
some gold, his expectations of great wealth were 
not destined here to be realized. He found it diffi- 
cult to compel the natives to work as slaves. Insur- 
3* 



30 A ROMANTIC ENTERPRISE. 

reetions broke out among them, and many Spaniards 
were slain. 

Individuals who possess a vivid imagination and a 
spirit of romantic adventure can be easily excited 
by the most visionary projects. Sometimes, the 
more unreal and improbable these objects are. the 
higher will be the enthusiasm they awaken. So in- 
fatuated do their votaries become, that repeated dis- 
appointments fail of effecting a cure. No sooner had 
the golden bubble of Porto Rico burst before the 
enraptured eye of Ponce de Leon, than he became 
almost wild with excitement at the extremely grati- 
fying intelligence, that on one of the Bahama 
Islands was a remarkable fountain, which possessed 
the marvellous property of renewing the youth of 
all those who bathed in its magic waters. However 
aged, wrinkled, and infirm they might be, let them 
but plunge into this mysterious laver of nature, and 
by its wonderful influence they would be restored to 
all the vigor and beauty of youth. To discover 
this fountain, and enjoy the benefit of its renovating 
power, was henceforth the great object of Ponce de 
Leon's pursuit. He embarked on tliis chimerical 
voyage with three vessels, and spent many months 
in sailing along the coasts, and winding, ofttimes in 
great peril, among the rocks and shoals of the Ba- 
hamas. He made frequent landings, and escry 
stream, lake," or pool, whether clear or muddy, 



ponce's folly. 31 

whether having a surface like a polished mirror, or 
carpeted with a rich green scum, he plunged into, 
with the hope of rising a renovated, young man. 
But instead of finding, by these ablutions, that his 
gray hairs resumed their former color, that his 
wrinkles were reduced in number or in depth, and 
that the infirmities of years were giving place to 
the elasticity of his earlier days, his experience was 
directly the opposite. Indeed, it is said of him, 
that, instead of a second youth, he arrived at a 
second childhood, and never developed either the 
same intellectual or bodily vigor after, as he did 
before he entered upon this delusive search. Still, 
this voyage was not altogether useless. As the 
alchemists, in their efforts to find out the philoso- 
pher's stone, which would convert whatever it 
touched into gold, and the elixir of life, whose po- 
tent virtues would render all who drank it invulner- 
able to death, actually, though undesignedly, stum- 
bled upon important discoveries, so Ponce de Leon, 
though he failed to find the fabled fountain of 
Bimini, reached another valuable result. Whilst 
beating about among the islands for the object of 
his search, he came in sight of land, which stretched 
away to a greater distance than any he had hitherto 
seen. As he approached it, he found it covered 
with immense forests, gayly decorated with a profu- 
sion of the most showy flowers, on which account, 



32 ponce's discovery. 

or because the day of this discovery was March 
27th, (Easter Sunday,) called by the Spaniards 
Pascua Florida, or Flowery Easter, he named this 
new territory Florida. He found great difficulty in 
coasting along its shores, in consequence of the 
strong currents produced by the Gulf Stream, and 
also on account of the dangerous coral reefs which 
stretched away at different points, many parts of 
which were the more perilous by being concealed 
beneath the surface of the ocean. For a number 
of years, it was supposed that Florida was an 
island. But when the Spaniards were convinced 
that it was a part of the main land, they based upon 
this discovery of Ponce de Leon their claim to the 
whole North American continent. For a long time, 
the name Florida was given not merely to the 
southern peninsula, but to a vast territory whose 
limits to the north and west were unknown. Ponce 
returned to Spain, where he received the appoint- 
ment of governor and commander-in-chief of Flor- 
ida. Before he could enter upon the duties of his 
new office, he was obliged to take the field in order 
to suppress an insurrection of the Caribbee Indians 
in Porto Rico. In this campaign he was unfortu- 
nate, and lost much of his former military reputa- 
tion. He therefore gladly availed himself of an 
opportunity to regain, in another field, what he had 
lost here. His appointment to the government of 



AN ATTACK AND DEFEAT. 33 

Florida was accompanied with the condition that he 
should colonize it. After his disasters in Porto 
Rico, he fitted out two vessels, and departed to 
Florida with his colony. In his attempt to land, he 
was met by bands of incensed Indians. They were 
determined to prevent the invaders from establishing 
themselves upon their soil. They attacked them 
with great fury. The Spaniards were defeated, and 
were driven precipitately to their boats, leaving be- 
hind them many slain. The governor himself 
received a wound which entirely disqualified him 
for the further prosecution of the enterprise. He 
reluctantly abandoned the object, and returned to 
Cuba to die. 



34 



CHAPTER II. 

Traffic in human Beings. — John de Verazzanb. — Coasts North 
America. — A narrow Escape. — Fears and Friends. — Two 
Squaws discovered. — A Child stolen. — Verazzano's Discov- 
eries. — Enters Newport. — Block Island. — Suspicious In- 
dians. — Fears overcome. — Two Kings. — Their Attire. — 
Effects of Prejudice against Yellow. — Mirrors rejected. — A 
novel Mode of Bartering. — Contemptuous Conduct. — Veraz- 
zano returns. — First Description of North America. — Claims 
of France. — Verazzano's Death. 

After the disastrous termination of Ponce de 
Leon's expedition, several other voyages were made 
by Spaniards to Florida, and along the northern 
boundaries of the Gulf of Mexico. The object of 
some of these visits was to kidnap Indians and re- 
duce them to slavery in the West Indies. Human 
beings had already begun to be a very marketable 
commodity. It is a humiliating fact that the first 
trade established on our coast was a traffic in men. 
If they could not be bought, they were stolen and 
borne away to foreign markets. 

Before the Spaniards had succeeded in establish- 
ing a colony upon the southern part of our conti- 
nent, the French had become engaged in maritime 
adventures along the coast. 

John de Verazzano, of Florence, under the pat- 



JOHN DE VERAZZANO. 35 

ronage of Francis I., King of France, set sail from 
a rocky island, near Madeira, January 17th, 1524, 
on a voyage of discovery. He took with him fifty 
men, provisions for eight months, arms, munitions 
of war, and articles with which to traffic with the 
natives. On the 24th of February, they encoun- 
tered a severe gale, but without receiving any ma- 
terial damage. In about fifty days from the time 
they started, having sailed west, they came within 
sight of the continent, which Verazzano says was a 
new country, which had never before been seen 
by any one either in ancient or modern times. Fol- 
lowing the southerly direction of the coast, he sailed 
fifty leagues without finding a harbor. He then 
changed his course towards the north. Some por- 
tions of the coast were low and sandy ; others were 
covered with forests of palm, laurel, cypress, and 
other species of trees, which rendered the air fra- 
grant to a great distance. The arrival of this mys- 
terious stranger attracted the attention of the na- 
tives, who flocked to the shores, and expressed by 
cries and gestures their astonishment and delight. 
Numerous fires were seen burning on land. Veraz- 
zano anchored on the coast, and sent the boat, with 
twenty-five men, to open a trade with the natives, 
and ascertain their disposition. As the surf was 
rolling strongly to the shore, the men found it im- 
possible to land with safety. A courageous young 



OD A PERILOUS ADVENTURE. 

I 

sailor, who was a good swimmer, seized some little 
bells, looking-glasses, and other cheap articles, and 
leaped into the water for the purpose of swimming 
ashore. The natives watched him with deep inter- 
est. When he came near, he threw to them the 
articles which he had brought as a gift of friend- 
ship, and then attempted to regain the boat ; but 
the waves rolled in so powerfully as to dash him 
upon the sand with such force that he fainted and 
lay as if dead. The Indians, seeing his condition, 
ran to him, seized him by the head, legs, and arms, 
and carried liim off from the water. When the 
young man opened his eyes and found himself in 
the hands of these savages, who were believed to be 
cannibals, he shrieked loudly for help. He sup- 
posed that his doom was sealed, and that he would 
soon be roasting over one of their fires, which were 
burning near. They endeavored to pacify him, as 
well as they were able, by the assurance that no 
harm was intended. They took him to the foot of 
a small hill, and then removing from him his wet 
clothes, expressed the greatest admiration at the 
whiteness of his skin. His companions in the boat, 
seeing him naked, near a fire, concluded that the 
natives were about to make a meal of him. Yet 
they saw no way to effect his deliverance. When 
the half-drowned Frenchman had recovered his 
strength, he exhibited, by signs, his desire to return 



TWO SQUAWS FOUND. 37 

to the boat. The suspected cannibals, instead of 
objecting, embraced him with much apparent affec- 
tion, and then accompanied him to the shore. In 
order to convince him of their entire friendliness, 
they withdrew at a considerable distance from him, 
leaving him to enter the water without fear of 
molestation. Taking their position upon a little 
elevation of land, they watched him till he regained 
his waiting companions, who received him almost as 
one risen from the dead. 

After sailing about fifty leagues farther north, 
Verazzano says he came to " another land, which 
appeared very beautiful and full of the largest for- 
ests." The boat was again sent on shore with 
twenty men. They penetrated into the country 
about six miles. The people fled from them in 
fear. By a careful search, they discovered, con- 
cealed in the high grass, an old woman, heavily 
laden. She bore upon her shoulders two infants, 
and behind her neck a little boy eight years old. 
In her company was a young squaw about eighteen 
years of age. When the Frenchmen approached 
them, they shrieked aloud, and made significant 
gestures to the men who had retreated to the woods. 
To allay their fears, the visitors offered them pro- 
visions, which the old woman gratefully received, 
but the younger one spurned it from her. Every 
thing which they offered this young and beautiful 
4 



38 A CHILD STOLEN. 

damsel of the forest she disdainfully threw upon the 
ground. She was too high spirited to allow herself 
to be placed under any obligations to these pale-faced 
strangers. They ought to have treated these two 
unprotected, helpless females with kindness, and 
then suffered them to depart. But instead of this, 
these chivalrous Frenchmen cruelly stole from the old 
woman the boy that was under her care, and then 
tried to carry off the girl. But she screamed so 
loud, and resisted so violently, that they saw it 
would be impossible to get her through the woods 
to the boat. They had to content themselves with 
the little child, whom they carried off, with the in- 
tention of taking to France. 

Verazzano continued to follow the coast in a 
northerly direction. Being, of course, entirely ig- 
norant of the character of the coast, or the locality 
of danger, as a prudential arrangement he sailed 
only by day, anchoring, as best he could, at night. 
It is said by several authors that Verazzano discov- 
ered Hudson River prior to Hudson himself. This 
opinion is based upon a passage in Verazzano's let- 
ter to Francis, the French king. That our readers 
may have the means of judging for themselves, we 
will quote this important statement from Verazzano's 
letter, as given in the New York Historical Collec- 
tion, New Series, vol. i. 

" After proceeding one hundred leagues, we found 



VERAZZANO'S LETTER. 39 

a very pleasant situation among some steep hills, 
through which a very large river, deep at its mouth, 
forced its way to the sea. From the sea to the 
estuary of the river any ship heavily laden might 
pass, with the help of the tide, which rises eight 
feet. But as we were riding at anchor in a good 
berth, we would not venture up in our vessel with- 
out a knowledge of the mouth; therefore we took 
the boat, and entering the river, we found the coun- 
try on its banks well peopled, the inhabitants not 
differing much from the others, being dressed out 
with the feathers of birds of various colors. They 
came towards us with evident delight, raising loud 
shouts of admiration, and showing us where we 
could most securely land with our boat. We passed 
up this river about half a league, when we found 
it formed a most beautiful lake, three leagues in cir- 
cuit, upon which there were rowing thirty or more 
of their small boats, from one shore to the other, 
filled with multitudes who came to see us. . . . 
The hills showed many indications of minerals. 
Weighing anchor, we sailed fifty leagues towards 
the east, as the coast stretched in that direction, and 
always in sight of it ; at length, we discovered ■ an 
island of triangular form, about ten leagues from 
the main land, in size about equal to the island of 
Rhodes, having many hills covered with trees, and 
well peopled, judging from the great number of fires 



40 WHO DISCOVERED THE HUDSON RIVER 1 

which we saw all around its shores. . . . We 
did not land there, as the weather was unfavorable, 
but proceeded to another place fifteen leagues dis- 
tant from the island, where we found an excellent 
harbor. . . . This region is situated in the par- 
allel of Rome, being 41° 40' of north latitude, but 
much colder from accidental circumstances, and not 
from nature, as I shall hereafter explain to your 
majesty, and confine myself at present to the de- 
scription of its local situation. It looks towards 
the south, on which side the harbor is half a league 
broad ; afterwards, upon entering it, the extent be- 
tween the coast and north is twelve leagues, and 
then enlarging itself, it forms a very large bay, 
twenty leagues in circumference, in which are five 
small islands of great fertility and beauty, covered 
with large and lofty trees. Among these islands 
any fleet, however large, might ride safely, without 
fear of tempests or dangers. Turning towards the 
south, at the entrance of the harbor, on both sides, 
there are very pleasant hills, and many streams of 
clear water, which flow down to the sea." 

It is upon this indefinite and unsatisfactory de- 
scription of Verazzano, unaccompanied by any chart 
from him, that some authors have asserted that he 
refers to Hudson River and the Bay of New York. 
Others deny this, and maintain that his description 
will not apply there. After a careful examination 



INDIANS ASTONISHED. 41 

of the subject, Yates and Moulton, in their History 
of New York, say, " We believe that, although 
Verazzano may have touched at Sandy Hook, 
coasted Long Island, and visited one of our former 
islands in its north-eastern vicinity, and in the lati- 
tude mentioned by him, yet he never entered our 
bay or river, (Hudson.) It appears to us that this 
description may apply with tolerable precision to 
Newport, in Rhode Island. There are the small 
islands, the gulf, the safe mooring for a navy, the 
outlets to the sea of many rivers, whether we in- 
clude those of Taunton, Lees, Coles, Palmers, and 
Seakonk or Pawtucket, emptying into the gulf or 
sea, or the east passage and other outlets to the 
ocean." The island of triangular form, resembling 
the Island of Rhodes, is believed to be Block Island, 
situated near the eastern extremity of Long Island, 
and south of Rhode Island. 

At the place which Verazzano mentions as being 
fifteen leagues distant from the island, he was met 
by twenty canoes, full of people, who rowed around 
the ship, uttering exclamations of astonishment. 
Being fearful of these strange visitors, the Indians 
kept at a safe distance. They seem to have been sus- 
picious of the Frenchmen's kidnapping propensities. 
At first they would not come nearer than within fifty 
paces ; but afterwards, by the show of presents and 
signs of friendship from the vessel, they approached 
4 



42 GOLD NOT VALUED. 

sufficiently close to catch the articles, such as bells, 
mirrors, and other toys, which were thrown to them, 
with which they were greatly pleased. They after- 
wards came on board without fear. Among them 
were " two kings, more beautiful in form and stature 
than can possibly be described." They were clothed 
with deer skins, handsomely embroidered with dam- 
ask figures. Their heads were uncovered. Their 
long, straight, dark hair was tied back with various 
knots. Their necks were ornamented with a large 
chain, containing many different colored stones. 
These were the best looking tribe that Verazzano 
saw on the coast. Their faces were narrow, their 
eyes black and piercing, and yet the general expres- 
sion of their features was mild and pleasant. The 
women, though but partially dressed, were more or- 
namented than the men. Copper was more highly 
esteemed among them than gold. As yellow is a 
color which they especially dislike, they set but little 
value on gold. They are particularly pleased with 
red and azure. Of the presents which they received 
from the French, they were the most gratified with 
bells, azure crystals, and jewels to suspend in their 
ears or hang around their necks. It is somewhat 
singular that they had no desire for looking-glasses. 
They did not even keep them when given to them. 
They looked into them, smiled, and then returned 
them. They were hospitable and generous, giving 
away any articles they possessed. 



A STRANGE METHOD OF BARTERING. 



43 



On the 5th of May, 1524, Verazzano bade these 
friendly natives adieu, and, directing his course by 
the coast, he sailed a hundred and fifty leagues. 
He observed that the land rose higher, and appar- 
ently contained minerals. The people whom he 
met were far more rude and savage than those he 
last left. He went ashore and examined their 



-3iP 

'.-"Civs'; 



mm 



<*m. 



A 




Novel Mode of Bartering. 

dwellings, and found that they lived upon fish, fruits, 
and roots. He could hold no satisfactory commu- 
nication with them. When the French wished to 
trade with them, so timid were these Indians that 
they came to the cliffs, near the ocean, and then 
lowered down by a cord whatever articles they had 
to barter. The Frenchmen below would untie 



44 VERAZZANO'S DEATH. 

them, and in their place fasten the articles which 
they exchanged in their stead ; the Indians at the 
same time crying out for them to come no nearer, 
and demanding that the exchanges should be in- 
stantly made. They would receive nothing but 
knives, fishhooks, and sharpened steel. No atten- 
tion was paid to signs of friendship or courtesy ; 
and when the French departed from the shore, the 
savages, by certain significant gestures, exhibited 
towards them the greatest contempt. They at- 
tempted to prevent their landing; but when they 
found this impossible, after pouring into them a 
shower of arrows, they fled to the woods, uttering 
loud and horrible cries. After sailing along these 
shores for the distance of seven hundred leagues, 
and collecting all the information he could, Veraz- 
zano returned to France and made his report to the 
king. This report is the earliest description of the 
coast of North America now known to be in ex- 
istence. His discoveries gave France a claim to 
large portions of the new world. He had actually 
sailed along the whole coast of the United States, 
and a considerable portion of British America. 

It is generally supposed that Verazzano made a 
second voyage, when he came to an untimely end. 
He is said to have been seized by the savages, killed, 
and eaten. Tins, however, is not certain. 



45 



CHAPTER III. 

Attempts at colonizing - . — Failures. — Pamphilo de Narvaez. — 
Terrific Hurricane. : — Sacrilegious Proceeding. — Narvaez seeks 
for Gold. — A Man-riding Chief. — An Accident. — A Town 
taken. — Ambush. — The Party diminished. — The Sea found. — 
Original Boat-building. — Perilous Coasting. — Boats scat- 
tered. — End of the Expedition. — Alvaro Nunez escapes. — 
Juan de Ortiz remains behind. 

After the discovery of Florida by Ponce de 
Leon, in addition to the French, various Spanish 
adventurers made it a visit, and coasted many miles 
along its shores, obtaining some idea of the size of 
the immense continent to which it belonged. There 
were those, also, who desired to make explorations 
in the interior, with the hope of finding it as pro- 
ductive in gold and precious stones as they had dis- 
covered South America to be. Among these was 
Pamphilo de Narvaez, who, in June, 1527, em- 
barked at St. Lucas, with five vessels and six hun- 
dred men. Whilst stopping at Dominica, one of 
the West India Islands, he experienced one of those 
terrific hurricanes common in that climate. The 
walls and houses of the city were blown down ; 
trees were torn up by the roots ; the sea was in 
violent commotion ; the lives of men were de- 
stroyed ; the vessels were tossed about like chips 



46 SEARCH FOR GOLD. 

upon the water ; and when the storm abated it was 
found that the vessel of Alvaro Nunez, the secretary 
and treasurer of the expedition, was entirely de- 
stroyed. Some of the men here abandoned the 
enterprise, so that the six hundred followers of 
Pamphilo were reduced to four hundred. They 
remained here till spring, when they set sail for 
Florida, the land of promise, which they reached on 
the 12th of April. They soon landed, and pushed 
into the interior. They discovered a number of 
chests, containing the bodies of the dead, which 
Narvaez conjectured were in some way connected 
with idolatry. He therefore ordered these cases 
and their contents to be consumed to ashes — a pro- 
ceeding which was directly adapted to excite the 
abhorrence of the natives, and induce them to treat 
with hostility those who could in this manner abuse, 
without any just cause, the remains of the dead, 
The eyes of the Spaniards were especially attracted 
by certain golden ornaments worn by the Indians ; 
they earnestly inquired where this metal could be 
found. The wily savages, to get rid of their un- 
welcome invaders, told them that the precious metal 
abounded in the interior of the country, at a place 
called Apalachee. Narvaez, though opposed by 
some of his officers, determined to set out at once 
in pursuit of the gold region. Taking with him 
three hundred men, of whom forty were mounted 



MAN-RIDING KING. 



47 



upon horses, each having two pounds of biscuit and 
half a pound of pork, he commenced his march. 
After a dreary journey, accompanied with heat, hun- 
ger, and fatigue, of fifteen days, without seeing any 
habitation or any human being, they finally met a 
cacique, being carried in state upon an Indian's back, 
and clothed in an ornamented deer's skin. He was 




Man-riding King. 

attended by many of his tribe, some of whom 
seemed to be a band of musicians, for they marched 
before him playing upon pipes, made of reeds. 
They inquired of this man-riding chief concerning 
Apalachee, and learnt that it was a territory with 
which he was at war. Having obtained guides, 
Pamphilo de Narvaez proceeded on his way, and 



48 A CITY TAKEN. 

came to a river whose current was so rapid that, in 
attempting to cross it on horseback, John Velasquez, a 
fearless rider, was lost, with his noble charger. They 
obtained the body of the drowned animal, which fur- 
nished them with the most acceptable meal they 
had eaten for many days. The rest of the company 
passed over in boats and rafts. After a tedious march 
through a low, flat country of sand, marshes, and 
forests, encumbered with prostrate trees, they, on the 
25th of June, reached the much-desired town of Apa- 
lachee, supposed to have been near the Bay of Pen- 
sacola. Here they expected to find not only an 
abundance of good living, but also plenty of gold. 
The town consisted of forty low wigwams, well 
protected by woods and morasses. Some of the 
horsemen rode into it, but found no one at home 
but the women and children. They discovered 
quantities of grain, deer skins, mantles, female 
head-dresses, and stones for grinding corn. When 
the Indians returned, they were amazed to see 
white men on huge animals riding around among 
their quiet dwellings. Not liking their appearance, 
they sent some arrows among them, which killed 
one of the Spanish horse. They were charged 
upon by the Spaniards, and retreated to the woods. 
They appealed to the invaders to deliver up their 
wives and children. Their request was granted. 
But the Spaniards, having obtained possession of 



INVISIBLE FOES. 49 

their chief, refused to surrender him. This so en- 
raged them that they made several attempts to set 
the town on fire and burn the enemy out. They 
also concealed themselves in the neighboring morass 
and woods, and galled the Spaniards with 'their ar- 
rows at every opportunity. As Narvaez found the 
land poor and destitute of the expected gold, and 
being told by the captive chief that the province of 
Aute, now known as the Bay of St. Mark, possessed 
an abundance of provisions, for which his company 
were suffering, he directed his course thither. On 
his way, whilst passing, with difficulty, through a 
lagoon, or morass, with the water breast high, they 
were suddenly beset by an invisible foe. Arrows 
were poured upon them like a storm of hail. The 
attack could not be returned until the swamp was 
crossed, and even then the cavalry could not be 
brought to act. They were obliged to dismount 
and pursue the enemy on foot. In this manner 
they were incessantly annoyed for eight days. 
Every morass or piece of woods they passed seemed 
to be instinct with life — an 'ever-vigilant enemy was 
hovering around their path, and sending the shafts 
of death among their ranks. At Aute they found 
plenty of maize. When they reached there, they 
were in a bad condition. All their sanguine hopes 
were blasted. Nearly one third of their number 
bad died, whilst more than a third were on the sick 
5 



50 DESPERATE SHIP-BUILDERS. 

list. The prospect was, that if they continued their 
march much longer, they would all perish through 
disease or from the attacks of the Indians. They 
were now anxious to find the sea. A party sent 
out for discoveries found a small river, which ap- 
peared to open into a broad bay. It was now a 
painful question, What shall be done 1 They were 
a helpless band of disheartened adventurers, with 
disease, hostile Indians, and death behind them, and 
the broad sea before them. No vessels were at 
hand, and none were expected. The only recourse 
left them was the construction of boats on the spot 
to carry them away. Here almost insurmountable 
difficulties met them. They were not acquainted 
with ship-building, neither had they any appropriate 
tools or materials with which to work. But as this 
course furnished them their only gleam of hope, 
they went to work with the energy of despair. Ne- 
cessity, the author of many ingenious contrivances, 
came to their aid. A large bellows was constructed 
out of wooden pipes (probably the joints of some 
bamboo canes) and the skins of beasts. Their 
stirrups, spurs, cross-bars, and any other iron imple- 
ments which they might no longer want, were 
wrought into hatchets, nails, and saws. The fibrous 
part of the palm-tree furnished oakum, and when 
mixed with hair, made ropes for rigging. The sap 
or turpentine of the pine-tree answered very well 



MIDNIGHT ATTACK. 51 

for tar. To construct sails, they robbed themselves 
of their shirts, cut them open, and then sewed them 
together. With such hearty good will did they 
work, that between the 4th of August and the 22d 
of December they completed five boats, each suffi- 
ciently large to accommodate, though very incon-, 
veniently, forty or fifty persons. When they were 
all embarked, only a few inches of the boats were 
above water. None but men on the verge of despair 
would have ventured to sea in this hazardous man- 
ner. After sailing in this crowded condition some 
six or seven days, they came to an island where they 
found several canoes, which they attached to their 
boats, and in which they towed some of their party. 
They sailed on for a whole month without finding a 
harbor. Their water gave out, their victuals were 
scarce, and death stared them in the face. Some 
of them, impelled by extreme thirst, drank the 
water of the ocean, and soon after died. They at 
last reached a harbor, where was an Indian town. 
Here they were hospitably received. Finding water 
by the door of each hut, they drank as they never 
did before. The Indians provided them with baked 
fish, which furnished a very acceptable meal. So 
kindly were they treated, that they resolved to tarry 
with them till the morning, and have a good night's 
rest on terra firma. They were again disappointed. 
At midnight, these Indians were attacked by a hos- 



52 ADVENTURES OF ALVARO. 

tile tribe, and fled, leaving the Spaniards to defend 
themselves alone. Narvaez and almost all his men 
were wounded before the enemy were repulsed. 
They were glad to hasten from such belligerent 
neighbors. They soon after discovered another 
# populous harbor, and managed to create a quarrel 
which obliged them to make a hasty retreat. They 
were again reduced to a forlorn condition. Their 
provisions were almost gone, and the boats found it 
difficult to sail in company. Alvaro Nunez asked 
of Narvaez what should be done. "Every man 
must look out for himself," was the answer ; and 
soon after he was out of sight, never to be seen 
again. Thus fatally terminated the expedition of 
Pamphilo de Narvaez after Floridian gold. 

Some of the Spaniards, after they were abandoned 
by Narvaez, their leader, were seized by the In- 
dians and reduced to servitude. Among these were 
Juan de Ortiz and Alvaro Nunez. They were also 
compelled to practise as physicians. In vain did 
they plead ignorance of the art. Their captors 
would not believe them. To satisfy them, the Span- 
iards breathed upon their patients and pronounced 
over them some Spanish words, which the ignorant 
and superstitious savages believed were of great effi- 
cacy ; for from that moment the patients declared 
that they experienced very great relief. 

Alvaro managed to escape and penetrate into the 



JUAN DE ORTIZ LEFT. 53 

interior. He carried with him marine plants and 
shells, which he exchanged with the inland tribes. 
With his exchanges he returned to the coast, and 
traded them off to the natives there. In this man- 
ner he spent several years as a pedler between the 
tribes on the coast and those who were inland. As 
these tribes were at war, they would not trade direct- 
ly with each other, but they were very glad to have 
a neutral communication opened between them. 
During this time Alvaro was gathering information 
so as to know what course to pursue in order to 
reach Mexico. After obtaining sufficient knowledge 
to start, he slipped away and directed his course to 
the west. He crossed the Mississippi ; reached the 
confines of Texas ; pressed on towards Mexico ; 
struggled through swamps ; wandered, faint and 
weary, through deserts and over mountains ; fled 
from some tribes, was captured by others ; now 
working as a slave, and then practising as a physi- 
cian, he finally, after incredible hardships and ad- 
ventures, some tragic and others romantic, arrived 
at Compostella, a Spanish settlement in Mexico, 
about fifty miles from the Pacific Ocean, where he 
was received with kind hospitality. He was accom- 
panied in these long and tedious rambles, across an 
uncivilized continent, from the Atlantic to the Pa- 
cific, by two or three Spanish comrades. Juan de 
Ortiz was left behind. 
5* 



54 



CHAPTER IV. 

James Cartier. — Island of Birds. — Effect of Musketry. — Effect 
of Presents. — Timid Damsels. — Miserable Livers. — Great 
Gulf discovered. — And Explored. — Donnaconna. — Gives 
away two of his Children. — Frightful Stories. — Strange Mode 
of Warning. — The River. — Hochelega. — Native Hospital- 
ity. — Venerated Chief. — Meaning of Montreal. — Dreadful 
Disease. — A deceptive Device. — Ceremonies and Vows. — 
Indian Remedy. — King stealing. — The Trap laid, and 
sprung. — Grief turned to Joy. — Kidnapped King introduced 
to* Court. — Lord of Roberval. — Expedition of Hore. — Fat 
Birds. — Following the Natives. — Primitive Cooking. — Intense 
Sufferings. — Cannibalism. — The fatal Lot. — Starvation in 
the Midst of Plenty. — Welcome Arrival. — Piracy. — The 
two Kings. 

In the year 1506, one Jean Denys sailed from Hon- 
fleur, a seaport at the mouth of the Seine in France, 
to Newfoundland. He explored and drew a map of 
the Gulf of St. Lawrence and the adjacent coasts. 
In 1508, Thomas Aubert sailed from Dieppe, in 
France, to Newfoundland, passed up the St. Law- 
rence, kidnapped some of the natives, and took 
them to Paris. 

In the course of a few years, he was followed by 
James Cartier, a bold mariner of St. Malo. He set 
sail from France, April 20th, 1534, and came in sight 
of Cape Bona vista on the 10th of May. Though it 



ISLAND OF BIRDS. 55 

was thus late in the season, the large masses of ice 
which were floating around him rendered his condi- 
tion somewhat dangerous. He put into a harbor, 
winch he named St. Catherine, and remained ten 
days. Then pushing to the north, his attention was 
arrested by an island which was covered by a pro- 
digious number of birds. As seen from the sea, so 
numerous were they, and standing so close together, 
they appeared like crops of grain. He says there 
were enough there to have loaded the whole navy 
of France, without any perceptible diminution of 
their number. It was appropriately called the Island 
of Birds. He describes Newfoundland as entirely 
destitute of land, saying there was not enough to 
have loaded a cart. It was nothing but rock and 
sand. The natives were tall, strong, and fierce. 
Five canoes of them surrounded a French boat 
which had been sent on shore, and with dancings 
and loud shouts gave it a savage welcome. The 
Frenchmen were not particularly pleased with these 
uncouth demonstrations, nor with the large numbers 
that began to assemble ; they therefore discharged 
some of their guns, when immediately the savages 
all started off upon a run, as if the report of the 
guns had been the signal for a general stampede. 
The next day they appeared again in nine canoes, 
and timidly showed skins, with which they appeared 
desirous to open a trade. The French exhibited 



56 INDIAN DAMSELS. 

signs of friendship, and soon secured their confi- 
dence. When the knives and trinkets of the French 
were shown them, they began to dance with great 
energy, accompanying their motions with loud shouts 
of joy, which might have been heard far out upon 
the water. So anxious were they to possess these 
coveted objects, that they not only gave all the skins 
which they had brought for purposes of traffic, but 
even took off those which they wore as garments, 
and exchanged them with their visitors, and then 
returned to the shore naked to obtain more. 

At another place on the coast they were visited 
by forty boats, containing about two hundred men, 
women, and children. The Indian damsels were at 
first concealed in a grove on shore ; but when the 
French began to distribute their toys, and gave 
some to two or three of these girls, the others were 
quickly enticed from their hiding-places to receive 
their share. Cartier describes them as the most 
miserable mortals he ever beheld. They were scan- 
tily clothed with worthless skins, lived on berries 
and fish, and slept under their boats, which at night 
they drew to the shore and turned upside down. 
After sailing along the irregular northern coast of 
Newfoundland, he doubled the northern cape, steered 
south, and was the first to pass through the Straits 
of Belleisle, which, until that time, had been taken 
for a bay. 



A GREAT GULF DISCOVERED. 57 

He returned to France, and was soon fitted for 
another voyage to the same coast. On this second 
voyage he saw a large gulf, which, as he passed it 
on the day of St. Lawrence, he called the Gulf of 
St. Lawrence. Having been informed by the In- 
dians that it was the outlet of a large river, he 
sailed into it, and found it gradually diminishing in 
width until it was indeed only a river. He passed 
up it, till he reached the Island which is now called 
Orleans. He was here visited by Donnaconna, the 
ruler of this region, with about five hundred of his 
subjects, of all ages and sexes. Donnaconna made 
a long speech, in a language not one word of which 
the French understood, but which, from his tones 
of voice and general appearance, they interpreted 
as of a friendly nature, at the close of which his 
whole party gave " three tremendous howls, as 
another sign of welcome." Donnaconna then made 
to Cartier a present of a boy and girl, which he 
said were his own son and daughter. 

Cartier desired to ascend the river still higher. 
Donnaconna was opposed. One of the chiefs inti- 
mated that if they had been aware of his intention, 
he would not have been presented with the children. 
Cartier offered to relinquish them rather than not 
sail up. They endeavored to dissuade him from his 
purpose by stories of ice, rocks, rapids, and other 
oerils. Being unsuccessful with these, they resorted 



58 A SINGULAR EXPEDIENT. 

to other methods. Three Indians, painted in a 
most hideous manner, with their heads armed, beast- 
like, with horns, came out in a small canoe, rowed 
round the vessel, and made short speeches and 
strange gesticulations. As interpreted to Cartier, 
these three repulsive looking objects were messen- 
gers from the Indian supreme deity, who had been 
sent to warn the French that if they attempted to % 
ascend the river any farther, they would meet with 
disasters, and all would inevitably die. It is prob- 
able that all this opposition only served to increase 
the desire of the French to see that which the In- 
dians were so anxious to conceal from them. Car- 
tier determined to penetrate to a place called Hoche- 
lega. In doing so, he was obliged to take small 
boats. As he ascended the noble stream of the St. 
Lawrence, he was delighted with the banks, which, 
on either side, were crowned with lofty trees, inter- 
laced with vines bearing grapes, which, though not 
equal to those of France, were quite agreeable to 
the taste. As he proceeded on his way, he fell in 
with a native lord, who presented him with another 
princess, eight years of age, and who also endeav- 
ored to dissuade him from ascending farther. But 
he persevered until he came to Hochelega, an In- 
dian town of a circular form, strongly protected by 
a palisade of stakes. It consisted of about fifty 
houses, each containing a number of different apart- 



A VENERATED CHIEF. 59 

merits, as sleeping* rooms for separate families, with 
a large hall in the centre, which was used as a com- 
mon dining saloon, and gathering place for all the 
tenants. They were well supplied with dried fish 
and grain, with cucumbers, melons, and other fruits. 
The visit of these white strangers soon drew 
together as many as a thousand Indians, who 
extended to them the usual Indian welcome, by 
addresses, dances, and savage howlings. Some even 
wept for joy when they saw the valuable presents 
which their visitors brought them. Cartier was led 
to the largest house in the city, which proved to be 
the palace, such as it was, for in it he was intro- 
duced to the prince, or governor, whom he found to 
be an old decrepit man. In his personal appearance 
he was distinguished from the other Indians only by 
a cap made of furs, which were regarded as pecu- 
liarly rich and beautiful. He was greatly venerated 
by the people, several of whom brought their sick, 
to receive the benefit of his healing touch. 

Behind Hochelega was a high elevation of land, 
which Cartier ascended and named Mont-real, (Mon- 
treal,) i. e., Royal Mount, by which it is called to this 
day. On his return down the river, his crew were 
attacked with what to them was an unknown dis- 
ease, the symptoms of which were discolored blood, 
swollen and putrefied gums, attended with general 
prostration of strength. It was probably that dread- 



60 



FARCE ON SHIPBOARD. 



fill disease, the scurvy. Not three of the whole 
number escaped it. So fatal were its ravages, 
that the survivors had not strength to bury the dead. 
Being unable to dig their graves in the frozen 
ground, they were obliged to leave them with merely 
a covering of snow. Cartier was fearful lest the 
natives should discover the crippled state of his 
crew, and, by taking advantage of it, make them all 
prisoners. He therefore pretended that he was car- 
rying on great repairs within his vessel, and no one 
must come on board. Whenever the Indians came 
around his ship, in order to keep up the deception 
he obliged all the crew who could to come on deck, 
and to walk busily backwards and forwards, as 
though they were hard at work ; and such as had 
strength enough to carry any thing were loaded with 
whatever happened to be at hand, with which they 
were ordered to make as much noise as possible, 
whilst the captain himself was constantly crying out 
to those below to increase their industry, or they 
should be punished — all of which was a mere farce 
to blind the Indians, and might have been appropri- 
ately styled " Much ado about nothing." 

To arrest the dreadful malady, recourse was had 
to superstition and religious vows. Cartier ordered 
an image of the Virgin Mary to be elevated upon a 
tree a short distance from the river, and the service 
of mass to be performed. All of the men who 



THE SCURVY. 61 

were able to walk, were required to attend it in pro- 
cession. He also made a solemn vow, that if he 
should be permitted to return to France, he would 
go on a pilgrimage to the shrine of Madonna de 
Rocquemado. But the mass and the vow were at- 
tended with no healing properties. Yet Cartier ob- 
served that the Indians who were attacked soon 
recovered. He desired to learn their mode of treat- 
ment. After earnest solicitation, they pointed out 
to him a tree, of the leaves and bark of which they 
made a decoction, which proved a sovereign remedy. 
This tree was white pine. Cartier resorted to it, 
and used it according to the directions, and soon 
had the pleasure of seeing all his crew rapidly im- 
proving. 

After this discovery of the St. Lawrence, and its 
exploration to Montreal, Cartier concluded to return 
home. Previous to this, he formed the unrighteous 
design of capturing Donnaconna, and carrying him 
to France. This native Ring of Canada, being 
suspicious of the whites, feigned sickness as an ex- 
cuse for not paying them a parting visit. By vari- 
ous devices and strong protestations, they finally 
succeeded in allaying his fears, and inducing him to 
come on board. The captain gave a splendid en- 
tertainment, set up in a conspicuous place a brilliant 
cross, decorated his vessel with all the colors in his 
possession, and invited the chief to come on board. 
6 



62 NEFARIOUS OUTRAGE. 

The temptation was too strong to be resisted. The 
bait took — Donnaconna believed the lies and came 
on board. He was instantly seized and taken to the 
cabin, where he was imprisoned. When the Indians 
saw the treatment which their chief received, they 
at once fled and concealed themselves in the woods. 
It was to them a sore trial. During the darkness 
of the night their canoes glided out silently from the 
shore to the now hateful prison ship, around which 
they sailed like dim phantoms, " howling and la- 
menting in the most frightful manner over the fate 
of their lost prince." They repeated their visit the 
next day, and accused the French of killing their 
chief. They denied it. The Indians then asked 
permission to see him. Donnaconna was now re- 
leased from his cell, to come on deck. In compli- 
ance with instructions from his captors, he told his 
people that his treatment was kind, that he was volun- 
tarily going on a visit to the Ring of the French, and 
should be absent only ten or twelve moons. When 
his credulous people heard this, their anger abated, 
and they gave three shouts of joy. Donnaconna 
now distributed among them many presents which 
he received from the French, and they in return 
brought to the vessel a good supply of provisions 
for the voyage. The vessel was soon under way, 
and arrived at St. Malo, in France, July 6th, 1536. 
The introduction to the court of France of an 



FRENCH COLONISTS. 63 

Indian king from the new world, and from a terri- 
tory discovered by the French, was both a novel 
and an important event. It produced a great sensa- 
tion among that excitable people. Yet no attempt 
was made to follow up these discoveries for four 
years. At the end of this period, Francis de la 
Roque, lord of Roberval, a nobleman of Picardy, 
undertook to found a colony on the newly-discovered 
river. To encourage him in the enterprise, the 
king conferred upon him the office of viceroy and 
lieutenant-general of Canada, Hochelaga, Norim- 
bega, and all other territories in that vicinity. These 
proved to be empty titles. The expedition was a 
failure. Cartier was sent out first as his pioneer, in 
May, 1541, with the titles of captain-general and 
chief pilot of the enterprise. The commission 
which he received authorized him to ransack the 
prisons of France and take with him, to be founders 
of the new colony, fraudulent bankrupts, robbers, 
murderers, and all other criminals except those 
guilty of counterfeiting and treason. Francis de la 
Roque did not accompany him. They were jealous 
of each other, and did not act in concert. Cartier 
penetrated the St. Lawrence to Hochelaga, and near 
there built a fort, which he named Charlebourg. 
When his vessel came in sight, the Indians, who 
had been waiting impatiently for the return of their 
absent chief, hailed it with joy. # They surrounded 



64 COLONIAL FAILURES. 

it, and inquired for Donnaconna. Alas, he had not 
returned, as was promised ! The kidnapped prince 
had died in France. The disappointment of the In- 
dians was severe. Under the combined influence 
of grief and anger they assumed an attitude of hos- 
tility, and gave the colonists great trouble. Cartier 
made out to keep his company together through the 
long and dreary winter. They proved a sorry set, 
and had to be controlled with an energetic hand. 
They were very unsuitable persons to form the 
foundation of a state, especially in the midst of an 
uncivilized people. During this first and only winter 
of their residence there, such was the wickedness of 
their conduct that a number, both men and women, 
were whipped, several were bound with iron fetters, 
and one was executed for theft. How different 
from the colony afterwards formed by the Puritans 
at Plymouth ! 

Cartier left on his return in June, having heard 
nothing of the main body of the colonists who 
were to have come out with Francis de la Roque ; 
but after sailing through the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 
he met Francis at Newfoundland, on his way to 
Hochelaga with a large reenforcement of colonists, 
and abundantly equipped with every thing necessary 
for the enterprise. 

The whole business had now become so repulsive 
to him, that Cartier managed to give Francis the 



CAPTAIN HORE. 65 

slip, and hastened on to France. Francis, Lord of 
Roberval, remained in the country about a year, 
when he also returned without securing any perma- 
nent results. 

During the period that Cartier was making his 
explorations along the American coast, the English 
were also interested in maritime adventures. The 
same year (1536) that this French navigator returned 
to his own land from his second voyage, taking 
with him the captive Donnaconna, an expedition 
was fitted out in England under the direction of a 
person by the name of Hore. He was furnished 
with two ships — the Trinity and the Minion. He 
crossed the Atlantic without the occurrence of any 
thing unusual, and arrived at Cape Breton. From 
thence he sailed to the north-east, and arrived at an 
island situated at the south of Newfoundland. This 
island they found covered with a species of sea 
fowl, which, on account of their being very fat, 
were called by the Spaniards and Portuguese, pen- 
guins. They dwelt there in such immense numbers, 
that from this circumstance the island was called 
Penguin Island. Hore and his company next visited 
Newfoundland. Here curiosity attracted some of 
the natives to visit the ship. The men pursued 
them, and found that they retreated to a small island. 
In continuing the pursuit, the men landed, and soon 
came to a place where cooking was in progress. A 
6* 



66 CIVILIZED CANNIBALS. 

wooden spit was erected, on which a piece of bear's 
flesh was roasting. After this, the men were accus- 
tomed to amuse themselves by hunting bears for 
their own use. Sometimes they fell in with a black, 
at other times discovered a white one, and in either 
case they gave chase. The flesh furnished them with 
very palatable food. Before long, however, they 
were reduced to great straits. The provisions which 
they carried out with them were all consumed. 
Game could not be obtained. They were obliged 
to feed on roots and herbs. Some fish, which an 
ospray had carried to her nest as food for her 
young, furnished them with an acceptable meal. 
Their condition daily became worse. Famine 
stared them in the face. Their sufferings were 
intense. Humanity revolts at the measures they 
adopted to prolong life. The captain discovered 
that the number of his men decreased. Upon ex- 
amination, he ascertained that they had been mur- 
dered and eaten by the others! One was digging 
for roots ; another came up stealthily behind and 
suddenly attacked him. After he was slain, and the 
murderer was cooking a part of his flesh for a 
meal, the odor of it attracted one of his compan- 
ions, who, not knowing what it was, with threats 
and menaces declared he would have a portion. 
This led to a disclosure of the horrid act. Although 
the captain reprimanded the men for their cruelty 



PIRACY. 67 

and cannibalism, yet to such extremities were they 
reduced, that they cast lots in order to ascertain 
who should die to furnish food for the others. It 
may well awaken astonishment that such revolting 
and inhuman measures should have been resorted to 
in a place which abounded with fish. For thirty 
years the French, Spaniards, and Portuguese had 
been engaged in fishing on the Banks of Newfound- 
land. Yet in the very place where they obtained 
provisions for thousands, these Englishmen were 
starving to death. It seems equally surprising that 
they were ignorant of the fact that fish were abun- 
dant there, or that they could contrive no means to 
take them. 

One day a French vessel made its appearance. 
The English, not satisfied with the supplies received 
from it, seized the ship, took possession, and left 
their own for the use of the French crew. They 
also distributed a quantity of provisions among 
them, which were taken from the French vessel, 
and then set sail for England, where they safely 
arrived. So soon as the King of the French heard 
of the high-handed piracy, he preferred a complaint 
against the offenders for the seizure of the vessel. 
But when the King of England became acquainted 
with the facts, he indemnified the French out of his 
own purse, and prevented the culprits from a crim- 
inal prosecution. 



CHAPTER V. 

Hernando de Soto. — His Bravery and Skill. — His Horsemanship 
before the Inca. — The Inca's Cruelty. — De Soto's Wealth. — 
His Appearance at Court. — Isabella de Bobadilla a Bride. — 
Return of Nunez. — His exciting Reports. Mode of conduct- 
ing Expeditions of Discovery. — De Soto assumes all Ex- 
pense. — Portuguese Volunteers. — Their Enthusiasm. — Andrew 
de Vasconselos and Followers. — Grand Review. ■ — Appearance 
of the Spaniards. — Armor of the Portuguese. — Second Re- 
view. — Humiliating Contrast. — The Number of Adventur- 
ers. — Conversion of the Indians desired. — Priests and Monks. 

After the unsuccessful termination of Hore T s 
voyage, the Spaniards again entered the field and 
projected an expedition for the conquest of Florida 
on an extensive scale. The expectations of the 
court and people of Spain were highly raised by it. 
How those expectations were met will be seen by 
the following account. It was under the direction 
of Hernando de Soto. 

Among the early explorers of the unknown terri- 
tories of the new world, none were more distin- 
guished for personal qualities, exalted rank, and 
splendid outfit and retinue than this renowned cava- 
lier. The history of his brilliant expedition for the 
conquest of Florida is filled with chivalric and ro- 
mantic adventure. As we follow him and his band 



HISTORICAL RECORDS. 69 

of enthusiastic followers in their long and tedious 
march through the untrodden forests of the south 
and the boundless prairies of the west, at some 
times struggling for life amid dangerous swamps 
and deceitful everglades, and at others contending 
with treacherous Indians, as numerous and blood- 
thirsty as the torturing insects which were constantly 
piercing their flesh, we cannot but admire the vigi- 
lance, the lofty bearing, the fearless bravery, and the 
patient, hopeful endurance of the noble Spaniard ; 
whilst, at the same time, we see not a few things in 
his treatment of the aborigines, especially of the 
chiefs and the women, which we cannot fail to 
condemn. 

Fortunately for the historian, records exist of the 
long and fatal wanderings of our hero for the con- 
quest of a kingdom supposed to be the treasury of 
untold amounts of gold, pearls, diamonds, and other 
articles of value. These records embrace a letter of 
De Soto himself to the municipal authorities of St. 
Jago de Cuba ; " A Narrative of the Expedition of 
Hernando de Soto, by Luis Hernandez de Biedma, 
(facteur de sa majeste,} presented to the King and 
Council of the Indies, ^544 ; " "A Narrative of the 
Expedition of Hernando de Soto into Florida, by a 
Gentleman of Elvas. Published at Evora, 1557. 
Translated from the Portuguese by Richard Hack- 
luyt, London, 1609." These three works, translated 



70 DIFFERENT OPINIONS. 

into English, are contained in the Historical Collec- 
tions of Louisiana. To these must be added a 
fourth, which is a more full, minute, and graphic 
account than either or all of the above combined. 
It is in Spanish, and is entitled " The Florida of the 
Inca, or the History of the Adelantado, Hernando 
de Soto, Governor and Captain-General of the 
Kingdom of Florida, and of other heroic Cavaliers, 
Spaniards, and Indians. Written by the Inca Gar- 
cilaso de la Vega." Bancroft says that the Inca 
Garcilaso is " very extravagant in his account ; " 
" numbers and distances are magnified, and every 
thing embellished with the greatest boldness. His 
history is not without its value, but must be consult- 
ed with extreme caution." The Portuguese " Nar- 
rative by a Gentleman of Elvas," who was an eye- 
witness, he regards as "by far the best account." 
This he generally follows. On the contrary, Mr. 
Theodore Irving, in his " Conquest of Florida," ex- 
presses the opinion that the work of the Inca has 
not been properly appreciated. It was written from 
"the testimony of three eye-witnesses." It agrees 
with the Portuguese account in the prominent facts, 

and where it differs from it as to the plans and 

I. 

views of De Soto, he gives the preference to the 

Inca, because, being a Spaniard, it is more probable 

that he was admitted to the secret councils of his 

leader than one of another nation, besides being 



HERNANDO DE SOTO. 71 

free from that national jealousy which may have 
tinged the account of the Portuguese. 

In the condensed narrative which we have given 
in the succeeding pages, we have not followed im- 
plicitly either of the above authors. We have com- 
pared their different accounts with each other, and, 
rejecting the extravagant and apocryphal, we have 
recorded those events only which appeared to us 
truthful. Those who desire to trace more minutely 
the incidents of this chivalric expedition will be de- 
lighted with the charming work which we have just 
alluded to, by Mr. T. Irving. It has all the interest 
of a historical romance. 

Hernando de Soto, a descendant of noble blood, 
was born about the year 1500. The place of his 
birth is enveloped in some obscurity. The " Gentle- 
man of Elvas," the author of the Portuguese narra- 
tive of the expedition, says that he was " son of a 
squire of Xeres of Badajoz ; " but the Inca Gar- 
cilaso asserts that he was born in Villa Nueva of Bar- 
carota. He followed the train of Pedro Arias to 
the West Indies, where, by the skilful use of his 
sword and buckler, which were his only reliance, he 
produced so favorable an impression upon his com- 
mander that he received from him the appointment 
of captain of a troop of horse. He was soon after 
commanded to assist Fernando Pizarro in the con- 
quest of the rich province of Peru. In the 



72 SURPRISING HORSEMANSHIP. 

sanguinary contests which were there endured, De 
Soto, by the caution, bravery, and power of his 
attacks, surpassed all his companions in arms. Eye- 
witnesses of his calm, courageous, and successful 
conduct amid the exciting scenes of dreadful conflict 
assert, that so great was his skill in the use of 
weapons, that he was equal to ten ordinary men. 
Pizarro rewarded him for his soldier-like bearing 
with a lieutenancy, and often called upon him for 
the execution of orders which required a rare com- 
bination of patient endurance, cool deliberation, and 
fearless bravery. When sent as an ambassador to 
the far-famed Inca Atahualpa, he exhibited in his 
presence feats of horsemanship of a most surprising 
nature. He made his noble war-horse run, gallop, 
suddenly stop, then caracole obliquely, as if dancing 
to music, then dash off, bounding, rearing, and frisk- 
ing like a wild Arabian steed amid the freedom of 
the desert. Suddenly wheeling him, he pierced him 
with his spurs, and made him spring so near the 
gazing Inca that the foam of his snorting breath 
sprinkled the Inca's tawny face. Not a muscle 
moved upon the marble countenance of the imper- 
turbable chief. He looked as calmly as though from 
his youth he had been accustomed to similar feats, 
when he had never seen a horse before. Many of 
his people, however, being terror-stricken at the ex- 
citing scene, fled to places of concealment. The 



DE SOTO'S STYLE OF LIVING. 73 

Inca was so enraged at their cowardice that he gave 
immediate orders for their execution. Poor man ! 
he soon after learned that there was good reason 
for fearing when the strength of the noble horse 
was under the guidance of the intellect of man* 
He and his warriors were conquered by an army of 
cavalry, a portion of whom was commanded by De 
Soto, whose feats of harmless agility before him 
had so terrified his servants. 

When Hernando de Soto returned to his own 
country, his share of the spoils of the new world 
amounted to a hundred and eighty thousand ducats. 
He now entered upon a style of living in keeping 
with his good fortune and noble descent. Leaving 
Seville, he presented himself at the court of the Em- 
peror of Spain in great magnificence, with his stew- 
ard, chamberlain, gentleman of the horse, usher, 
pages, lackeys, and all other servants essential to the 
fashionable retinue of Spanish nobility. It is not 
surprising that under these propitious circumstances, 
with so much that was desirable in character, blood, 
and fortune, he made a favorable impression upon 
the heart of Isabella de Bobadilla, daughter of his 
old commander, Pedro Arias, of Avila, and Earl 
of Puno en Rostro. To this young lady he was 
shortly after united in marriage. He received from 
the Emperor the appointment of Governor of Cuba 
and Adelantado, or President of Florida. To these 



74 GOLDEN REPORTS FROM FLORIDA. 

offices were added the title of marquis of certain 
lands which he was expected to conquer, extending 
thirty leagues in length by half that in breadth. 

At the time these offices, were conferred upon 
]>e Soto, there was a gentleman arrived at court 
bringing intelligence of the misfortunes of Pamphilo 
de Narvaez. He had been with him in his expedi- 
tion, knew the country, and hence was regarded as 
an oracle upon every thing which related to the 
climate, productions, and inhabitants of Florida. 
He told much, but pretended that he knew more. 
He said that Florida was the " richest country in the 
world," and that he had come to Spain that he might 
be appointed its Governor, when he would return 
and take possession. The glowing accounts which he 
gave inflamed the imagination of Hernando de Soto. 
The brave nobleman was anxious to try his fortunes 
again in the way of conquest. He had frequent 
interviews with this returned messenger, who was 
no other than Alvaro Nunez, whose adventures we 
gave in the last chapter. He entered into a kind 
of partnership with him with reference to the con- 
quest of these new territories, which were supposed 
to abound with all sorts of riches and luxuries. This 
partnership was of short duration. Alvaro desired 
the government for himself, and was unwilling to be 
subordinate to another. As it had been conferred 
upon De Soto, Alvaro was pacified with the 



DE SOTO'S ENTHUSIASM. 75 

appointment of Governor of the River of Plate. 
Although there had heen an attempt to conceal from 
the public the most favorable facts which Nunez 
could state, yet enough had leaked out to create a 
deep excitement among the visitors at court. It was 
not long before all was made public, and then the 
whole nation partook of the excitement. 

It was not unusual, in those periods of early ad- 
venture, for the different governments of Europe to 
assume the expense of the maritime enterprises of 
their respective subjects. Sometimes societies or 
corporations were formed for the express purpose 
of geograplncai discovery or for the settlement of 
new countries. In that case the pecuniary respon- 
sibility of such undertakings devolved upon them. 
But Hernando de Soto asked no favors of that kind. 
Such was his characteristic enthusiasm, and so strong 
was his faith in the existence of countless wealth in 
the new regions, that all the privilege he desired of 
the Emperor was, that he might enter upon the con- 
quest of Florida at his own expense. The Emperor 
cheerfully complied with Ins request. So soon as 
De Soto's intentions were known, officers, soldiers, 
nobles, men of wealth and influence, were not only 
willing, but extremely anxious, to accompany him. 
Gentlemen from Portugal wrote to him to know 
whether they would be received among his followers. 
He sent them an affirmative answer. In order to 
7* 



76 THE SPANIARDS OUTDONE. 

furnish themselves with a becoming outfit, men sold 
their houses, their vineyards, gardens, rents, and 
whatever else they could convert into money. So 
great was the number who desired to enter upon 
this adventurous expedition that the vessels were not 
sufficient to carry them, and many were obliged, 
very reluctantly, to remain behind. A company of 
Portuguese came from Elvas, under the command 
of Andrew de Vasconcelos. They were courteously 
received by De Soto, and admitted among his fol- 
lowers. The Governor ordered a grand military 
parade, on which occasion the Spaniards appeared 
most gaudily attired in showy costume, " with silk 
upon silk and many pinkings and cuts," but the 
Portuguese presented themselves encased in heavy, 
though highly-polished armor, as if prepared for 
battle. De Soto was chagrined at this ill-timed 
vanity of his countrymen. Another parade was 
ordered, when all were commanded to appear in 
armor. When the day arrived, the contrast be- 
tween the soldiers of the two nations was as great 
as on the former occasion, though it was of a differ- 
ent nature. The splendid silks of the Spaniards 
had given place to miserable shirts of rusty mail, 
old helmets, steel caps, and poor lances, which pre- 
sented a humiliating contrast with the brilliant and 
perfect armor of the Portuguese. De Soto reviewed 
the whole, and accepted of those who appeared to 
be suitably fitted for the enterprise. 



ECCLESIASTICS. 77 

The whole company, according to the Portuguese 
account, amounted to six hundred ; according to the 
Inca Garcilaso, who is probably more correct, it 
was nine hundred and fifty. Being Catholics, they 
were desirous that the enterprise should assist in the 
extension of the interests of their Holy Mother 
Church. The conversion of the heathen natives of 
the new countries was to them an important object. 
Besides, it was reasonable to suppose that many of 
them would sicken and die under the oppressively 
warm climate of Florida, when they would need the 
last offices which the church could bestow. They 
therefore took with them twelve priests, eight subor- 
dinate clergymen, and four monks. 
7# 



78 



CHAPTER VI. 

The Departure. — Canary Islands. — Merriment. — The beautiful 
Leonora. — Arrival at Cuba. — Spanish Amusements. — An Of- 
ficer cashiered. — An important Volunteer. — Juan de Anasco. — 
Goes in search of a Harbor. — His Adventures. — The Land.— 
First Battle. — Porcallo's Exploit. — An imposing- Scene. — In- 
conveniences. — Guides desert. — Native Houses. — Revenge. — 
Exploring Parties. — Hear of a Spaniard. — Juan Ortiz. — A 
happy Meeting. — The cleft Stick. — Spanish Captives. — Their 
Tortures. — Female Kindness. — Juan's Sufferings. — A hot 
Bed. — Midnight Encounter in a Graveyard. — Juan doomed 
a Sacrifice. — Female Informer. — A Wife lost for Kindness' 
Sake. 

In the month of April, 1538, on a Sunday, known 
as St. Lazams's Day, this splendid armament set 
sail from St. Lucar, amid the sounding of trum- 
pets and the thunder of artillery. They were dis- 
tributed in ten vessels, the largest of winch, named 
the San Christoval, contained the Governor, Her 
nando de Soto, his wife Isabella de Bobadilla, and 
their suite. After the comparatively long passage 
of fifteen days, owing to dead calms, they arrived at 
one of the Canary Islands. It being Easter Day, 
the Governor of the island was arrayed " all in 
white, — cloak, jerkin, hose, shoes, and cap, — so 
that he seemed a lord of the gypsies." He gave 
De Soto and his companions an honorable reception. 



LANDING OF DE SOTO. 79 

A weefi. was here spent in joyous merriment 
and feastings. Among several natural daughters of 
the Governor of the island was one of extreme 
beauty, about seventeen years of age. De Soto 
became so deeply interested in this fascinating 
Spanish damsel, that he was desirous of securing 
her as a gem to shine in the train of Ins beloved 
wife, Isabella. He asked the Governor's consent to 
adopt her into his own family, holding out as an 
inducement the prospect of an honorable connec- 
tion with some rich and brave cavalier of his 
court. His consent was obtained, and the beauti- 
ful Leonora de Bobadilla became the companion 
of Isabella. 

On the succeeding Sabbath they left the Canaries 
for St. Jago, situated at the eastern end of the 
Island of Cuba, where they arrived about the end 
of May. As De Soto had been appointed Governor 
of this island, his arrival with so brilliant a retinue 
was welcomed with every demonstration of joy. A 
noble horse for himself, and a gentle mule for his 
fair Isabella, were waiting to receive them at the 
landing, when they were escorted by the most dis- 
tinguished inhabitants of the island to their apart- 
ments. Those of the company who went on shore 
were entertained in parties of six and eight among 
the different farmers and planters on the island. 
Their employment whilst here was divided between 



80 AN IMPORTANT VOLUNTEER. 

races, bull fights, contests of skill and strength, and 
feats of various other kinds by day, and balls and 
masquerades by night. In the contests of horse- 
manship no one excelled the gallant Nuno de Tobar, 
the lieutenant-general. He bore away more prizes 
than any other cavalier. This gentleman had 
formed a secret attachment to Leonora de Boba- 
dilla, which continued until it had assumed a crim- 
inal . character. Upon the discovery of this dis- 
graceful affair, De Soto was greatly enraged, and 
immediately deposed the lieutenant-general from 
office. Although the cashiered officer made the 
only reparation in his power by marrying the lady 
whom he had injured, yet he never regained the 
confidence of Ins commander. 

Whilst at St. Jago, De Soto received a visit from 
a cavalier of Trinidad, named Porcallo de Figueroa. 
He had been in various wars, seen much severe 
fighting, and was now living in opulence, enjoying 
the results of his hard-fought victories. Whilst 
mingling with De Soto and his followers, listening 
to the accounts which they gave of the riches of the 
new El Dorado they were about to conquer, the 
spirit of the old soldier was stirred, and he resolved 
to share his fortunes with them. His proposal was 
accepted by De Soto, who appointed him to the 
post of lieutenant-general, from which Nuno de 
Tobar had been rejected. Porcallo entered into 



HARBOR-HUNTING. 81 

the object with great spirit and liberality. He con- 
tributed largely of his wealth, and gave to different 
cavaliers fifty horses, besides taking thirty-six for his 
own use. He was followed by a large band of 
retainers. 

In order that no time might be lost upon their 
arrival in Florida in seeking a suitable place for 
landing, De Soto sent Juan de Anasco with orders 
to find a harbor having a safe anchorage for the 
ships, and a convenient place for disembarking the 
troops. He made two voyages for that purpose. 
The second time he was gone so long that fears of 
his being lost began to be seriously entertained. 
But after the lapse of three months from the time 
of his • departure, his vessel reentered the port of 
Havana. So soon as they reached the shore, the 
captain and all his crew fell upon their knees and 
waddled to the church, in execution of a vow which 
they had made in an hour of extreme danger. 
After devoutly listening to the imposing service Of 
mass, they related the reason of their long absence. 
They had experienced heavy weather, came near 
foundering at sea, and at one time had passed two 
months upon a desolate island, where they kept 
themselves from starving by picking up shells 
along the beach, and occasionally catching a 
wild fowl. 

Juan, however, had accomplished the object of 



82 DE SOTO SAILS FROM HAVANA. 

his expedition in the discovery of a harbor possess- 
ing all the requisite qualities. In addition to this, 
he had also brought with him four of the ab- 
origines, whom he had kidnapped, with the inten- 
tion of using them as guides when he returned, 
and, by teaching them Spanish, to qualify them for 
interpreters. 

Preparatory to his departure, De Soto appointed 
his wife Isabella to the government of the Island of 
Cuba, with Juan de Roxas, the next in command, 
and Francisco de Guzman as lieutenant of St. Jago. 
With Isabella remained the wives of Don Carlos, of 
Baltazar de Gallegos, and the beautiful Leonora, 
wife of Nuno de Tobar. 

All things being finally arranged, on Sunday, 
the 18th of May, 1539, Hernando de Soto,- with 
his company of enthusiastic followers, set sail from 
Havana in nine or ten vessels. After a passage 
of seven days they arrived at a broad, deep bay 
which scollops the western shore of East Florida. 
The day of their arrival being Whit-sunday, com- 
memorative of the descent of the Holy Spirit upon 
the day of Pentecost, De Soto called the place the 
Bay of the Holy Spirit, (Sjririto Santo.) Its pres- 
ent name is Tampa Bay. 

On the 30th of the month, the company landed. 
A party of three hundred soldiers were first sent on 
shore, to take possession of the country in the name 



DE SOTO LANDS IN FLORIDA. 



83 



of the Spanish Emperor, Charles V. As no Indians 
were in sight, the soldiers did not consider it neces- 




Landing of De Soto in Florida. 



sary to keep, during the night, a very strict watch. 
They were punished for their carelessness. Towards 
morning, a large band of savages suddenly dashed 
in among them, rending the air with their horrid 
war-whoops, and pouring upon the unsuspecting 
Spaniards a shower of arrows. Aroused so sud- 
denly from their quiet slumbers, the terrified troops 
sprang to their feet, and finding themselves attacked 
by such a vast number of the enemy, commenced a 
confused retreat to the sea. The sound of the 



84 DEATH OF THE FIRST HORSE. 

drum and trumpet, with the loud shoutings of the 
combatants, attracted the attention of those on ship- 
board. The whole fleet were soon in commotion. 
The men burned to be on shore to take part in this 
first conflict for the treasures of the new world. 
Armor was hastily adjusted, weapons were seized, 
and a reenforcement was soon on its way to the 
shore, under the command of the venerable lieuten- 
ant-general Vasco Porcallo de Figueroa. Porcallo 
took the lead with seven brave cavaliers, and pressed 
after the enemy as though fear was a passion to 
which he was a stranger. The Indians were routed, 
and Porcallo returned highly delighted with this 
first display of military prowess in the new expe- 
dition. Though he escaped unhurt, his noble horse 
received a fatal wound. It was shot through the 
side, the arrow going through the saddle, and bury- 
ing itself nearly out of sight between the ribs of 
the animal. It was just able to reach the camp, 
when it fell dead. Porcallo disengaged himself 
from the prostrate creature, and gloried in the 
honor of having raised the first lance, and having 
lost the first horse in conflict with the natives. 

The remainder of the company soon after landed, 
being about a thousand persons in all, and having 
with them three hundred and fifty horses. It was a 
brilliant army, inspired by the love of adventure, 
the spirit of chivalry, and the desire for renown. 



BRILLIANT PAGEANT. 85 

They presented an imposing appearance as they 
wound their way, in their showy costume and pol- 
ished armor, over the plains and through the long, 
dim forests of the new world. Flushed with the 
desire of conquest, buoyant with hope, and fearless 
)f their enemies, they marched cheerfully onward 
in the track of their leader, who, they had no 
doubt, would conduct them to glory and to wealth. 
We must not suppose, however, that their advance 
into these unknown regions was conducted with the 
precise regularity of military order. This was im- 
possible. In addition to the inconvenience of find- 
ing no roads, it must be remembered that a part of 
the company were on foot and a part mounted. 
Large quantities of luggage had to be carried, a 
piece of ordnance drawn, and, what was worse than 
all the rest, there were three hundred slow-moving, 
stubborn, provoking swine to be driven through the 
forests and swamps which impeded their course. 

De Soto divided^his .little army into six compa- 
nies, four of horsemen and two of footmen, and ap- 
pointed over each a captain. Two of the natives, 
whom Juan de Anasco had kidnapped and taken 
with him to Havana, to qualify them to become in- 
terpreters, returned with the company to their own 
land. De Soto expected to derive from them much 
assistance. He was disappointed. The Indians 
loved their liberty too well to remain voluntarily 
8 



86 DESERTERS. 



subject to those who, in an unfeeling manner, had 
stolen them from their own homes. Upon the first 
favorable opportunity they made their escape ; they 
cautiously stole away under the friendly protection 
of the darkness of night. 

The first Indian village which the army reached 
was called Ucita. It consisted of a few thatched 
houses, one of which occupied a commanding posi- 
tion on the summit of an artificial mound. It had 
the appearance of answering the double purpose 
of a residence and a fort. De Soto made it his 
head-quarters while there. Another building in 
the village resembled a temple. It was ornamented 
on top with the rude representation of a bird, 
carved out of wood, with golden eyes. 

The cacique or chief of this village, with all his 
followers, had fled. Their empty dwellings were 
soon occupied by the troops. Unfortunately for 
De Soto, this chief had been insulted and wronged 
by Pamphilo de Narvaez, in his wanderings here. 
The indignities which he had received called for re- 
venge. The cacique was determined to retaliate. 
He therefore would have no intercourse with De 
Soto. He contemptuously spurned all his proffers 
of friendship. He was angry with his people who 
brought De Soto's messages to him. He declared 
that he would not hear the promises of the Span- 
iards, but would rejoice to receive their heads. 



A SINGULAR MEETING. 87 



De Soto sent out expeditions in different direc- 
tions, to explore the country, and capture the na- 
tives, some of which were successful in taking the 
poor Indians prisoners. The Governor, having 
learned that a Spaniard was living among a tribe of 
Indians, the chief of whom was named Mocoso, he 
became desirous to have an interview with him, 
learn his history, and, if possible, to attach him to 
his cause. He ordered Baltazar de Gallegos to 
take a company of sixty men, go on an embassy to 
Mocoso, bring back, if possible, this captive Span- 
iard, and form a friendly league with the chief. 
Baltazar, with his brave lancers, departed in high 
spirits on this honorable and humane expedition. 

About the same time that De Soto received news 
of this captive Spaniard, Mocoso obtained intelli- 
gence of De Soto's landing to effect the conquest 
of the country. He therefore deputed the captive 
Spaniard, whose name was Juan Ortiz, to visit the 
newly-arrived emigrants. Baltazar, with his sixty 
cavaliers, soon met a band of natives, and charged 
furiously upon them. One of them, in chasing an 
Indian who*seemed somewhat more bold than the 
rest, was surprised to see him make, in a significant 
manner, the sign of the cross, and cry out " Seville ! 
Seville ! " As the soldier approached the fugitive, 
and was about to pin him to the earth with his 
lance, the poor fellow exclaimed, " I am a Chris- 



OO THE CLEFT STICK AND LETTER. 

tian ; spare me, and slay not these Indians, for they 
have saved my life." It was Juan Ortiz himself! 
The two deputations had fortunately met on their 
way to each other's chiefs. As soon as Juan was 
made acquainted with their object, and revealed 
himself to them, he called to his Indian companions, 
who had fled to the woods, to come out and deliver 
themselves up, and no evil would befall them, as these 
strangers were his countrymen. They complied. 
Each Spaniard then took one of them on horseback 
behind him, and returned to the Governor. De Soto 
welcomed Ortiz with great joy. Having been 
among the Indians for ten years, he had become 
acquainted with their language, their customs, and 
their country. He was therefore competent to be 
an interpreter, a guide, and a counsellor. It was 
extremely fortunate for De Soto that he met with 
Ortiz so early in the expedition, especially as his 
other interpreters had fled. 

Juan Ortiz was a native of Seville, a town in the 
southern part of Spain. He visited Florida with 
Pamphilo de Narvaez, and returned to Cuba, where 
the wife of Narvaez remained. From tfiere he was 
ordered back to Florida, with twenty or thirty oth- 
ers. As they approached the shore, they saw a 
cane sticking in the ground, split at the top, and 
a letter in the cleft. Supposing it to have been 
left by Narvaez, they asked the Indians to bring it 



LIVING TARGETS. 89 

to them. They declined, but told the Spaniards to 
come ashore and get it. To assure them of kind 
treatment, several Indians went on board the vessel, 
as hostages for any who might go ashore for the 
letter. Three or four of the bravest Spaniards vol- 
unteered upon the perilous enterprise, of whom 
Juan Ortiz was one. So soon as the Spaniards 
landed, a large number of the natives rushed upon 
them, seized them, and carried them to a place of 
security. At the same time, the hostages on board 
the vessel plunged into the water and swam to the 
shore. The crew, either through cowardice or pru- 
dence, — it is difficult to tell which, — immediately 
sailed away, without making any effort to rescue 
their unfortunate comrades. The captives were led 
to the chief of Ucita, by whose orders several of 
them suffered a cruel death. They were deprived 
of their clothing, and then used as a target by the 
Indians. The savages did not fire at them simulta- 
neously, but one at a time. The poor sufferers ran 
in different directions around the well-guarded 
square, to escape the aim of their tormentors, but 
they every where met a barbed arrow, until from 
pain and exhaustion they fell to rise no more. Ortiz 
was spared through the intercessions of the wife and 
the daughters of the chief. He was treated, how- 
ever, with the greatest severity. He was to the In- 
dians what the Gibeonites were to the Jews, " a 



90 STORY OF JUAN ORTIZ. 

hewer of wood and drawer of water." He was 
kept almost starved, was daily beaten, and on public 
occasions he was given up to the Indians, to be tor- 
tured for their amusement. At one time the savage 
chief placed him over a bed of glowing coals, with 
the intention of roasting him to death. The ter- 
rific screams of the helpless victim drew forth 
the intercessions of the wife and daughter of the 
cacique, through whose entreaties he was again 
spared. He carried the scars of his burns to the 
grave. 

As the bodies of the dead, in consequence of 
being but slightly covered, were sometimes dug 
from their graves by the wild beasts, Ortiz was 
appointed to guard the Indian cemetery. This, 
though a repulsive service, was far preferable to his 
previous condition among them. He was to keep 
watch the whole twenty-four hours, and in case he 
allowed any corpse to be carried off, he was doomed 
to die. One night a grave was opened, and the 
corpse of a child was carried off by a wild beast. 
Ortiz quickly discovered the fact, and went in pur- 
suit. He soon came upon the robber, and fired at 
him. Not knowing whether his arrow had produced 
fatal effects or not, he waited till morning, when, to 
his great joy, he found the animal dead and the 
remains of the child near him. He replaced the 
stolen corpse in the grave, and then drew the dead 



STORY OF JUAN ORTIZ. 91 

body of the victim into the town. The favorable 
impression which was produced by this achievement, 
upon the mind of the cacique, was of short dura- 
tion. He soon after determined to offer Juan in sac- 
rifice to the devil. The daughter of the cacique 
informed Juan of his danger, and advised him to flee 
to Mocoso, a neighboring chief, who would no doubt 
receive him under his protection. She also pro- 
vided him, unknown to her father, with a faithful 
guide to conduct him a considerable distance on his 
way. He followed her friendly advice. After his 
guide had left him, so that, by his return before day 
he might excite no suspicion of having assisted in 
his flight, Juan discovered a couple of Mocoso's In- 
dians. With some difficulty he made them under- 
stand that he was a friend. They then conducted 
him to their chief, who received him with great favor. 
The young squaw who had revealed to Ortiz the 
murderous intention of her father, was betrothed in 
marriage to Mocoso. When Mocoso ascertained 
that it was she who had sent the Spaniard to him 
for protection, he treated Ortiz kindly for her sake. 
But afterwards, when he had become better ac- 
quainted with him, he cherished for him a sincere 
and lasting friendship. Although his former master 
made repeated demands for his surrender, Mocoso 
steadily refused to deliver him, although by his re- 
fusal he greatly offended the cacique, and forfeited 



92 GRATIFYING RESULTS. 

his claims to her, whom he intended to have made 
his bride. 

After the meeting of Juan with the Spaniards, 
he immediately sent a messenger to Mocoso, to 
communicate to him the gratifying results of the 
expedition. 



93 



CHAPTER VII. 

The Vessels return. — Urribarracaxi. — Treacherous Guides. — 
Treatment of the Dead. — An Indian Freak. — A Sagacious 
Hound. — Its End.' — A villanous Plot. — The Counterplot. — 
Deceitful Review. — Dreadful Conflict. — Warriors in the 
Water. — A second Plot. — A fearful Struggle. — A desperate 
Captive. — A narrow Escape. — Indians compelled to mas- 
sacre. — Its Object. — A difficult March. — Power of the Bow. — 
Towns abandoned. — The Reason. 

A few days after Juan Ortiz had been found, 
Mocoso visited the Spaniards. He was so highly 
pleased with his courteous reception and hospitable 
entertainment, that he tarried with them more than 
a week. His visits were frequently repeated, on 
which occasions he was accustomed to bring to De 
Soto various kinds of presents. 

After all the men, horses, swine, provisions, and 
other articles intended for the expedition had been 
landed, the Governor, De Soto, ordered the vessels 
to return to Cuba. He appointed Pedro Calderon, 
with a company of thirty horsemen and seventy 
footmen, to remain at the place of landing. He ap- 
propriated for their use sufficient stores to last them 
two years. Bidding Calderon farewell, De Soto, 
with his band of hardy adventurers, pushed into the 
wild and unexplored territories of Florida, " not 



94 TREACHEROUS GUIDES. 

knowing the things that would befall him" there. 
His first stopping-place was at an Indian town, the 
name of whose chief was Urribarracaxi. As this 
chief desired to hold no communication with the 
Spaniards, he had fled for concealment into the 
depths of the forest. All efforts to draw him into a 
parley were unsuccessful. The march of the army 
was now impeded by deep morasses and a large im- 
passable swamp. A number of days were spent in 
endeavors to find a place to cross. Great annoy- 
ance was experienced from the natives, who, accord- 
ing to their custom, concealed themselves along the 
route of the Spaniards, and sent among them, from 
behind rocks and trees, their fatal shafts. When a 
favorable opportunity offered, they would make a 
sally upon the unguarded stragglers of the army, 
and then a skirmish would ensue between them. 
In this way some of the Indians were slain, and 
others captured. De Soto used the captives for 
guides. They proved unfaithful ; for they led the 
Spaniards into ambuscades, where they were fired 
upon by the Indians and numbers slain. The Span- 
iards became indignant, and set their dogs upon 
them, who killed several of these treacherous con- 
ductors. They finally succeeded, through the as- 
sistance of one who feared to betray them, in reach- 
ing a rude bridge, made of the trunks of trees, 
over which, with considerable peril, they finally 



CAUTIOUS CHIEFS. 95 

passed in safety. They then entered the territory 
of a chief named Acuera. He, like Urribarracaxi, 
would form no alliance with them. He treated 
them as an invading army. Whilst within his do- 
minions, the Spaniards had occasion for ceaseless 
vigilance. The natives were constantly, but secretly 
prowling around them, and every one who wandered 
from the camp was certain to be captured or slain. 
If slain, they were beheaded. jjNot satisfied witb 
this revenge, the savages would dig up the Span- 
iards who had been buried, decapitate them, and 
then hang their headless bodies upon the trees. 
They spent nearly three Aveeks in this province. 
In order to avoid irritating the haughty and in- 
dependent chief, De Soto prohibited his people 
from destroying the houses or injuring the fields 
of grain. 

At the end of twenty days, they took up their 
line of march for Ocali, which they found to consist 
of some six hundred houses. The wary chief of 
the place carefully avoided them at first, but being 
assured of their kindness, he consented to become 
their guide. At this place four Indians came into 
camp one day, who were received with special cour- 
tesy. A meal was provided for them, to which they 
sat down ; but when the attention of the Spaniards 
was drawn in another direction, they sprang to their 
feet and ran off with the swiftness of the wind. 



9G A SAGACIOUS HOUND. 

The Spaniards were provided with a number of 
hounds. One of these, seeing the Indians fleeing, 
darted after them ; passing by three of them, he 
sprang upon the leader and brought him to the 
ground. When the next one came up, he attacked 
and brought him down in the same manner. He 
then successively fell upon the two others. After 
he had brought them all down, he kept worrying 
them, as they suc<jpssively attempted to rise, until 
the Spaniards came up and secured them. 

Upon examination, it appeared that their flight 
was designed only to exhibit their skill and fleetness 
in visiting the Spanish camp and then making their 
escape. 

A few days after this, De Soto, in company with 
the chief, was examining a river in order to find a 
favorable place over which to throw a bridge. Some 
Indians were on the opposite side of the stream, 
who used insulting language, saying, "Away, vaga- 
bond robbers, away ! " The hound, tearing away 
from the page who held him by a cord, leaped into 
the water and swam towards the threatening sav- 
ages. When they saw him coming, they sent their 
arrows with such successful aim that many struck 
him on the head and shoulders. But the cour- 
ageous animal kept on, amid their shower of shafts, 
till he reached their shore, when, from the effects of 
his wounds and fatigue, he laid down and died. 



AN INGENIOUS PLOT. 97 

His death was sincerely lamented by the company, 
for he was possessed of rare sagacity, bravery, and 
strength. 

A rude but strong bridge was soon after con- 
structed over this river by means of cables and 
poles extending from one bank to the other, across 
which planks were placed, and over which the little 
army safely passed, much to the satisfaction of the 
engineers. 

The next province which they entered was called 
Vitachuco, over which three brothers exercised sov- 
ereignty. Two of these were favorably disposed 
towards their novel visitors, but the oldest of them 
was decidedly hostile. He pretended, however, to 
be on friendly terms, but only, as it afterwards ap- 
peared, to secure a more favorable opportunity for 
their destruction. Whilst moving among the Span- 
iards, and professing an interest in their welfare, he 
was secretly engaged in arranging an ingenious plot 
for their total overthrow. The stratagem was this : 
A large number of his followers were to be drawn 
up in battle array, but with their weapons concealed, 
so as not to excite suspicion, and De Soto was to 
be invited to review them. As the cacique and the 
Spanish leader came upon the field, and reached a 
certain designated spot, twelve strong Indians were 
to seize De Soto and bear him off; the others were 
then to rush upon the camp, take it by surprise, and 
9 



98 AN APPROACHING CRISIS. 

slay the Spaniards. The day was fixed, and, to all 
appearance, the fate of the army was sealed. This 
nefarious plot was confidentially revealed to four 
Indians, who acted as interpreters for the Spaniards. 
They pretended to approve it, saying that it Mas 
worthy of the great chief of Vitachuco. But, be- 
lieving that the vigilance and the good discipline of 
the Spanish army would secure its defeat, they 
made the whole plot known through Juan Ortiz to 
De Soto. In the mean time, the external friendly 
relations between the two parties were still kept up. 
The cacique visited the Spanish camp, the Indians 
went unarmed, and the Spaniards gave no intimation 
of the least suspicion. The chief encouraged his 
followers and confederates, telling them he had 
ten thousand men, well armed, and that, after the 
victory, some of the Spaniards should be roasted, 
others boiled, others hung upon trees, and others 
should be put to death with a slow poison, so as to 
see themselves gradually decay. 

When the day arrived, a large army of the In- 
dians were drawn up in battle array. Their left 
was protected by a forest, and on their right were 
two lakes. They were arranged in three divisions 
— a main body with two wings. They were gayly 
dressed, having head-dresses of tall, waving, beauti- 
ful plumes. They appeared to be unarmed, but 
their bows were lying at their feet, and their arrows 



A GREAT BATTLE. 99 

concealed under grass. Every one of those thou- 
sands of savage men was ready, at a moment's 
warning, to engage in bloody conflict. De Soto had 
informed his officers of the plot, and of his own in- 
tentions, so that they knew what was coming. When 
all things were ready, the deceitful chief very politely 
invited Governor De Soto to walk out and see his 
warriors. Without the least appearance of fear, he 
consented, but at the same time told the chief that 
it was their custom always to march out in battle 
array when they gave honorable reception to their 
friends, and perhaps it would be a gratification to 
his warriors to witness the Spanish mode of warfare. 
To conceal more successfully his designs, De Soto 
accompanied the chief on foot ; each was attended 
by twelve men, and for precisely the same purpose. 
We may imagine their feelings. The chief, sup- 
posing his plot entirely concealed, is sanguine of 
victory in the approaching contest ; De Soto, relying 
upon his brave cavaliers and his firearms, is equally 
sanguine. When they arrived at the designated 
place, where the chief was to give the fatal sign 
to his body-guard, De Soto anticipated him, and 
ordering a gun to be fired as the signal to his army, 
the twelve Spaniards who accompanied him imme- 
diately seized the chief and made him a prisoner. 
De Soto sprang upon a horse and dashed after the 
Indians, who seized their concealed weapons and 



100 THE VICTORY. 

received him with a shower of arrows, aimed prin- 
cipally at his horse, which soon fell under him. He 
mounted another, and rushed, as usual, into the 
thickest of the conflict. The battle now became 
general. The savages maintained their ground, 
however, only a few moments ; for when the cav- 
alry bore down upon them they yielded to the shock 
and fled. All was now confusion. Some concealed 
themselves in the woods at the left, and others 
plunged into the lakes at the right of their position. 
The Spaniards had no desire to make this a san- 
guinary affair. Instead, therefore, of killing those 
who had fled to the lakes, which they might easily 
have done, they endeavored merely to frighten them 
into a surrender. But the Indians continued to 
fight in the water, with the greatest obstinacy, during 
the whole day. Where the water was too deep to 
furnish them a footing, one would mount upon the 
shoulders of two or three others clinging together, 
and from that slippery position fire at the Spaniards. 
When the darkness of the night drew on, these 
cunning watermen would cover their heads with the 
large, round leaves of the pond lilies, and cautiously 
swim to the shore, making as little noise and motion 
in the water as possible. But when their vigilant 
enemy saw through the gloom a leaf floating to- 
wards the bank, they attacked it, and drove the 
sheltered fugitive back again into deep water. One 



THE VICTORY. 101 

would occasionally give out through fatigue, and 
surrender. By daylight, nearly threescore had 
yielded. In the middle of the forenoon of the 
next day, after having been soaking in the water 
for twenty-four hours, and the most of that time 
without touching bottom, two hundred more sur- 
rendered. Seven only remained. They treated 
with equal contempt both the promises and threats 
of their enemies. Being chiefs, they considered it 
their duty to set an example of heroic endurance in 
the presence of their tribes, and rather die than 
yield. At three o'clock in the afternoon, De Soto 
ordered twelve Spaniards, who could swim, to 
plunge in and take them. They did so, carrying 
their swords in their mouths. They seized the 
exhausted warriors by their hair and arms, and 
drew them to the land. These noble fellows were 
quite young — their ages ranging from eighteen to 
thirty-five. Antonio Herrera, historiographer to his 
Catholic majesty, King of Spain, in the account 
which he gives, says that De Soto treated these 
captured braves with great kindness, giving them 
presents and sending them away; but the Portu- 
guese narrative, written by a gentleman of Elvas, 
states that they were put in chains and divided 
among the Spaniards for service. Perhaps both 
accounts are true — some being released, and others 
being fettered as slaves. 
9* 



102 ANOTHER PLOT. 

De Soto deemed it best to treat Vitachuco, the 
conquered chief, with kindness. He therefore had 
the hospitalities of the camp extended to him. 
The cacique dined with the Governor whenever he 
chose. But revenge rankled in his heart. He 
had met with a signal defeat,, and nearly a thousand 
of his subjects were in bonds. He burned for an 
opportunity to wipe out the disgrace. In the course 
of a week another plot was devised and secretly 
communicated to those of his tribe who were held 
as slaves by the Spaniards. It was this : On a 
given day, at an appointed signal from the chief, 
and when the camp would be securely dining, every 
Indian was to rise upon his master and kill him 
with whatever weapon was at hand. Accordingly, 
when the specified day arrived, Vitachuco, who was 
to be a prominent actor in the bloody drama, vis- 
ited the tent of the commander. De Soto, accord- 
ing to his custom, invited him to dinner. Whilst 
the company were busily engaged in the duties of 
the table, Vitachuco pounced upon De Soto like a 
vulture on his prey, at the same moment giving the 
fatal signal in a loud, terrific war-whoop, which 
rang throughout the camp like the knell of death. 
With one blow of the chief's heavy fist, skilfully 
planted between his eyes, De Soto fell to the ground 
with his face bathed in blood ; but before the blow 
could be repeated, the whole company at table 



A FEARFUL STRUGGLE. 103 

sprang to the rescue of their leader, plunged their 
blades into the body of the chief, and drew him 
from De Soto dead. The whole army were instant- 
ly in commotion. Personal rencounters for life or 
death were going on throughout the camp. As soon 
as the war-whoop of Vitachuco reached their ear, 
all the Indian slaves attacked their masters with 
whatever implement they happened to have — with 
pitchers, pestles, dinner-pots, or burning brands. 
The struggle was short but fearful. The firebrands 
did the most mischief, but in the end the Indians, 
being in chains* were all slain. Many of the 
Spaniards were wounded, and four killed. The 
natives displayed great bravery and strength. 
Some who survived at the close of the conflict 
were led into the square and deliberately shot 
down. A tall, muscular Indian, being led by a 
cord into this fatal enclosure by his master, who 
was a small and slender man, determined, when 
he discovered the object, to sell his life as dearly 
as possible. Stepping forward to his master, he 
seized him by the neck a,nd leg, raised him above 
his head with the greatest ease, whirled him 
around, and then threw him violently to the 
ground. Following up his advantage, he sprang 
upon the body of his victim, and would soon have 
despatched him if he had not been attacked by 
the Spaniards. The savage seized the sword of 



104 A TROUBLESOME MARCH. 

his master, regained his feet, and flourished it 
so bravely that he kept fifty of them in check. 
He whirled himself around so violently, with his 
sword at arm's length, that no one could ap- 
proach him. They brought him down with their 
guns. 

The Indians of other tribes who were in alliance 
with the Spaniards, and who were at that time 
about the camp, were compelled to assist in the 
massacre of the prisoners, in order to create 
such a state of enmity between them and the 
tribe of Vitachuco as to prevent any combina- 
tion between them for the future destruction of 
the Spaniards. 

Leaving the province of Vitachuco, De Soto 
marched towards Apalachee. He had heard much 
of the fertility of its soil and the bravery of its 
inhabitants, and was desirous of testing both. 
His journey there was extremely difficult. We 
have not room to narrate the particulars of his 
passage, with his luggage, horses, and obstinate 
swine, through deep swpmps, over rivers, across 
which he had to construct bridges, through for- 
ests, and, what was worse than all, the irritated 
Indians, who were constantly around him like 
swarms of mosquitoes, seizing every opportunity 
to gall him with their arrows, which they sent 
with such force as to pierce the Spaniards' coats 



WINTER QUARTERS. 105 

I 

of mail, and even send them through their saddles 
deep into the bodies of the horses. The towns 
through which they passed were generally aban- 
doned, as the natives desired to form no acquaint- 
ance with them. 

In the month of October they reached Ap- 
alachee, where De Soto determined to pass the 
winter. 



106 



CHAPTER VIII. 

Exploring Parties. — Guide murdered. — Ocean found. — Traces 
of Narvaez. — Signals. — Anasco's Expedition. — Avoids the 
Natives. — His Dangers. — Sufferings from Cold. — Suspense. — 
Acute Smelling. — A Breakfast Party. — Attacked and taken. — 
Plans for an Emergency. — Joyful Discovery. — Happy Meet- 
ing. — Captives liberated. — Different Routes. — Calderon's 
Courage. — Signals discovered. — A fat Chief. — His Con- 
cealment. — Capture. — Stratagem. — Escape. — Declarations 
of the Guard. — Superstition and Necromancy. • — De Soto's 
Policy. 

The town of Apalachee consisted of some two 
hundred and fifty rude Indian huts. Whilst tarry- 
ing here, De Soto sent out parties to examine the 
country. One of these parties, under the command 
of Juan de Anasco, was directed to go to the south 
in search of the ocean. They had a suspicious 
guide, who led them in a long, roundabout course, 
in which they crossed their own tracks several dif- 
ferent times. They became angry with him ; he 
retaliated ; blows ensued, and the poor fellow was 
slain in a swamp. They then used another Indian, 
whom they had captured, as their guide. He led 
them in a direct course until their eyes were cheered 
with a sight of the deep-blue water of the ocean. 
Hurrying on, they soon came to a spacious bay. 



AN IMPORTANT DISCOVERY. 107 

Their attention was here attracted by objects which 
they had seen nowhere else on their journey. In 
one place a quantity of charcoal and cinders were 
scattered around a rough, primitive-looking forge ; 
in another were a number of trees, hollowed out as 
if for feeding-troughs, and near by the skeletons 
of large animals, which they soon discovered were 
those of horses. These unusual appearances were 
soon explained. They had arrived at the spot 
where Pamphilo de Narvaez had constructed his 
rude boats, in which he embarked on his ill-fated 
voyage, to make his escape from this land of sick- 
ness, savages, and death. On their journey through 
the country, they had occasionally heard from the 
Indians of Narvaez. Places had been pointed out 
to them where he had fought with them, and, from 
their accounts, where he was conquered. They 
suspected they were upon his track, but now they 
were certain of it. Here were the affecting memo- 
rials of his splendid failure. After making a care- 
ful survey of the spot, and placing signals in the 
highest trees, that might be seen a considerable dis- 
tance upon the water, they hastened their return to 
the camp, and communicated the important intelli- 
gence to their commander. 

It will be remembered that, when De Soto set 
out upon his wandering through this unexplored 
country, he left near the place of landing thirty 



108 A DARING ENTERPRISE. 

horsemen and seventy footmen, under the command 
of the brave and chivalrous Pedro Calderon, with 
provisions sufficient for two years. He now re- 
solved to send for them to come to him in the 
village of Anhayea, in the province of Apalachee. 
He well knew that to send them a message would 
be a dangerous enterprise. It would require great 
vigilance, bravery, address, and strength. Juan 
de Anasco possessed all these qualities, and was 
therefore selected for the service. He had assigned 
to him thirty bold cavaliers, selected from many 
others, all of whom panted for the honor of en- 
gaging in the enterprise. They rode fleet horses, 
of high mettle ; for, as they were to pass through 
an enemy's country, some of whom were burning 
with revenge against the Spaniards, their success 
would depend as much upon speed as upon any 
other quality. After receiving their orders, they 
started off. Their policy was to keep, if possible, 
from being seen by the natives ; to avoid their towns, 
or pass hastily through them at night ; and, by their 
fleetness, prevent the Indians from sending any in- 
telligence ahead, so that there might be no gather- 
ing of the enemy to impede their progress. Most 
of the way their march was a wild, Gilpin-like 
scamper, as their desire was not to have adventures 
with the Indians, but to reach Calderon as soon as 
possible. They did meet with adventures, however. 



ANASCO'S DIFFICULTIES. 109 

and were obliged to exhibit skill, stratagem, and 
bravery to prevent being taken prisoners. One of 
their number died, and one horse gave out, which 
they left in the fields. They afterwards obtained 
him. A portion of the time they rode many miles 
without seeing an Indian ; at another time they 
found themselves in the midst of an ambuscade. 
Arrows poured upon them from every quarter, as 
if the trees were instinct with life and had converted 
their branches into bows. Juan de Anasco and his 
party fought only in self-defence. They had not 
time to stop and follow up their successes. All 
they desired was to get safely through the dangerous 
region and deliver their message. Along the banks 
of the rivers and around the borders of swamps 
they found the enemy planted, who gave them great 
annoyance. Some of their skirmishes with them 
were highly exciting. In some instances the water 
through which they passed was so cold that they 
had great difficulty to force their horses through. 
After accomplishing this, the men themselves, being 
completely drenched, suffered intensely. 

As they approached the province where they ex- 
pected to find Calderon, they became solicitous to 
know whether he was living, whether the chiefs were 
on good terms with him, and especially whether 
Mocoso continued the faithful ally of the Spaniards. 

There was in the company a half breed, whose 
10 



110 KEEN SCENT. 

name was Pedro Moron, who was distinguished for 
the keenness of his scent. Early one morning, 
while it was yet dark, as they were riding rapidly 
along, Pedro suddenly exclaimed, " Be careful ! I 
smell fire ! " The party checked their steeds, 
looked around in the darkness, carefully listened and 
snuffed the breeze, but without seeing, hearing, or 
smelling any thing unusual. After riding a mile or 
two farther, Pedro insisted upon it that he smelt 
fire, and that it could not be far off. The whole 
company were soon convinced that Pedro's olfacto- 
ries had not deceived them ; for after another exam- 
ination, a light was seen twinkling at a distance 
through the trees of the forest. Approaching it 
very cautiously, they discovered a party of fifteen or 
twenty Indians, men, women, and children, cooking 
and eating. The Spaniards resolved to capture 
them, ascertain Calderon's condition, and whether 
Mocoso continued on friendly terms with him. If 
he did not, they would send these Indians to Cuba 
as slaves. They approached in the darkness, slowly 
and noiselessly, quite near to this breakfast party, 
without detection. Then putting spurs to their 
horses, they sprang suddenly upon the Indians, and 
succeeded in capturing some fifteen, nearly the 
whole of them. A few plunged into the woods and 
thickets, and made their escape. During the excite- 
ment of the occasion, the Indians frequently cried 



PAINFUL SUSPENSE. Ill 

" Ortiz ! Ortiz ! " as if to remind the Spaniards that 
they were friends, and were acquainted with Ortiz. 

The fish which the Indians had been cooking now 
furnished the Spaniards a very acceptable meal, 
which they ate without leaving their horses. The 
limited information which they obtained from their 
captives was far from being satisfactory. They 
were still in doubt respecting Calderon. They 
looked carefully around for the footprints of horses, 
but saw none. They pressed on with hearts sad- 
dened with painful suspense. They had now 
arrived near where Calderon was left, and yet 
they could discover no traces of him. They 
talked over the plan they would adopt in case 
Calderon had been slain, or had left the place. 
They would secrete themselves in the depths of 
some forest, rest a number of days for their horses 
to recover from their fatigue, and then fight their 
way back through the enemy's country, if possible ; 
but if their enemies should prove too powerful for 
them, they resolved to die fighting bravely to the 
last. Whilst pondering and conversing upon these 
things, with depressed spirits, they came to a pond, 
where they discovered prints of horses' hoofs, and 
indications that the Spaniards had made lye there 
for the purpose of washing their clothes, on the 
banks of the pond. Their suspense was now at an 
end; they were as much overjoyed as was Robinson 



112 A JOYOUS MEETING. 

Crusoe when he discovered for the first time human 
footprints on the sandy shore of his desolate island. 
Not only did this weary company of cavaliers shout 
for joy — their horses caught their spirits. They 
seemed now to be as quick scented as Pedro him- 
self, and, snuffing the breeze, they snorted, reared, 
plunged, and neighed aloud, as if calling to other 
horses which they knew could not be far off. All, 
both horses and riders, now pressed on with renewed 
spirits, and in the edge of the evening they came 
suddenly upon Calderon and his company, just as 
the evening patrol were leaving camp. The mo- 
ment the two parties saw each other, they rent the 
air with loud shouts, and rushed towards each 
other with the most joyous excitement. Alas for 
poor human nature! — Calderon, instead of asking 
after the health of De Soto and the adventures of 
the army, earnestly inquired, " Have you found any 
gold I " 

The Indians which Anasco had captured on the 
way were brought into camp ; but when he found 
that their chief, Mocoso, continued the friend of the 
Spaniards, he released them and sent them home 
with presents, at the same time inviting, through 
them, their cacique to visit him with a company of 
his people. A few days afterwards, Mocoso came 
to the camp, bringing with him the horse and its 
accoutrements which Anasco had left in the fields 



calderon's march. 113 

because it had given out. As the Indians did not 
dare to ride the animal, two of them led him, whilst 
others brought the saddle, and other articles that 
belonged to him, in their arms. 

In compliance with the orders which he had re- 
ceived from De Soto before he left, Anasco, in a few 
days, embarked in the brigantines for the Bay of 
Aute, or St. Mark's, where were the remains of the 
horses and forge of Narvaez. Another of the com- 
pany, Gomez Arias, sailed as the bearer of despatches, 
taking with him twenty Indian squaws to Donna 
Isabella, in Cuba ; and Pedro Calderon set out with 
a force of a hundred and fifty, seventy of whom 
were mounted, to find his way to De Soto by land. 
We shall not narrate the particulars of Calderon's 
journey to his Governor at Apalachee. It must 
suffice to say, that it was very similar to the inarch 
of De Soto and that of Juan de Anasco, being se- 
vere and tedious. At the rivers, morasses, and 
woods,, he was met by the Indians, who offered vio- 
lent resistance to his passage. By day and by night 
they were howling, like so many hungry wild beasts, 
around his path, and at every favorable opportunity 
sending their silent, painful, and ofttimes fatal shafts 
among them. With heroic courage, Calderon fought 
his way through them, killing several of their chiefs 
and many of their men. He lost from his own 
company about a dozen soldiers and several horses. 
10* 



114 A CORPULENT CHIEF. 

When Calderon arrived at Apalachee, he was 
highly gratified to find Juan de Anasco there. 
Anasco had coasted along the shore of the Gulf of 
Mexico, until he saw the signals which had been 
fixed in the highest trees at the Bay of Aute ; he 
then sailed into the harbor, and found a company of 
De Soto's men waiting for him, who escorted him 
to their commander at Apalachee. 

Whilst Juan de Anasco was absent on his em- 
bassy to Calderon, De Soto had a curious adventure 
with the cacique of Apalachee, whose name was Ca- 
pafi. This chief was unwilling to come to any 
terms, or even have an interview with the Spanish 
Governor. He kept himself so closely concealed, 
that it was some time before De Soto found out his 
haunt. He had sufficient reasons for this ; among 
them was his own helplessness. He was an Indian 
Daniel Lambert — so heavy, fat, and unwieldy, that 
he could not walk. When at home, he crawled 
around his tent on all fours. If he went abroad, he 
was borne in a rough palanquin, or in the arms of 
some of his people. His personal safety required 
total concealment. He therefore secreted himself 
in the heart of a dense forest, access to which was 
extremely difficult. There was only one entrance 
to his retreat, and that was so narrow that only one 
could enter it at once. This being barricaded in 
several different places, where also was stationed a 



A CORPULENT CAPTIVE. 115 

strong guard, and the old chief being surrounded 
by some of his fiercest warriors, felt comparatively 
safe. But De Soto found him out, and attacked him 
like a lion in his lair. The Indians made a brave de- 
fence for their corpulent chief, but it was of no avail. 
Their barricades were taken one after the other, and 
they were driven into a small clearance in the depth 
of the forest, where the helpless old chief was wait- 
ing, with intense solicitude, the result of the fight. 
When the Spaniards had effected an entrance into 
this enclosure, and were cutting down the guard in 
the presence of the chief, Capafi gave his men or- 
ders to yield, telling them they had done all in their 
power, and further fighting would be useless. After 
the Indians had capitulated, they knelt before their 
conqueror, and earnestly entreated him to spare their 
helpless, yet beloved chief. He assured them that 
his intentions in visiting their country were friendly, 
and that he would inflict no injury upon their ca- 
cique. The fat sagamore was then brought to him 
by some of his body-guard, that he might kiss the 
hand of the successful Spaniard. Though De Soto 
promised to treat him kindly, as a matter of expedi- 
ency he held him a captive. He thought that by so 
doing the Indians would be careful not to molest the 
Spaniards. He was mistaken. Being relieved of 
the care of their chief, they had nothing to do 
but to annoy the invaders, for which they were 



116 CAPAFl's PROPOSAL. 

careful to avail themselves of every favorable oppor- 
tunity. 

De Soto remonstrated with the chief for the ill 
conduct of his tribe. Capafi professed great regret 
for it, and revealed to the Spanish commander the 
hiding-place of some of his bravest followers. He 
even offered to go to them under a military guard, 
and order them to cease troubling their white visitors. 
His proposal was accepted. Under a strong escort, 
embracing both foot and mounted soldiers, the fat 
and wily old chief set out. When they arrived 
near the place of concealment, the chief sent some 
messengers to the Indians who were secreted in the 
forest, ordering them to present themselves before 
him the next morning. At night, a strong guard 
was placed around the cacique, although it seemed 
unnecessary, for it was impossible that such a mass 
of fat should either run or be stolen away. Sen- 
tinels were also stationed a short distance off, to 
give notice of the approach of enemies, if any 
should venture to molest them in the dark. After 
every arrangement was made for their own security, 
and especially for the safety of the chief, those not 
on duty laid down to rest. The night wore away 
without any alarm, but when the morning came 
their amazement was extreme to find that the cor- 
pulent, helpless, cunning old chief was gone ! 
Where he had gone, or how, no one knew. The 



MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE. 117 

sentinels and guard all declared that they bad been 
wakeful and vigilant, yet they bad neither seen nor 
heard any thing during the whole night. The con- 
clusion to which they came was, that he bad been, 
in some mysterious manner, whisked away from 
them through the air, either by evil spirits or by the 
potent influence of Indian necromancy. With fear 
and shame they retraced their steps to the camp, 
and related the wonderful disappearance to De Soto, 
with all the embellishments which their fears and 
superstition could invent. De Soto thought it best 
to take but little notice of the affair, although he 
was probably convinced that it was the result of 
their own carelessness in falling asleep at their 
posts. 



118 



CHAPTER IX. 

Winter Experience. — Golden Reports. — Effects of Cruelty.- — 
Tree shot down. — Cannon left. — Cofaqui. — Peter's Alarm. — 
His Baptism. — Large Escort. — The Course lost. — The Army 
bewildered. — The Swine useful. — Anasco -s Success. — Beau- 
tiful Squaw-Sachem. — Her Courtesy. — A Suicide. — The 
Princess captured. — Gold proves to be Copper. — Pearls. — 
Spanish Mail. — The Princess escapes. — Her Cruelty. — Gi- 
gantic Chief. — Battle of Mauvila. — Engagement of the Rear- 
Guard. — Results of the Battle. — A Night of Agony. 

During the winter that De Soto spent at Ap- 
alachee, the Spaniards had many rencounters with 
the Indians. For whenever any of them wandered 
from the camp, they were almost certain to be dis- 
covered and attacked, whether they were on horse 
or afoot. In these engagements the natives ex- 
hibited great prowess and strength. So large and 
powerful were their bows that they would sometimes 
send an arrow entirely through a horse, and at other 
times would bury the arrow completely in the horse, 
leaving apparently only a small flesh wound, which 
would be the hole through which the arrow had 
entered. 

One day two young Indians were brought Jo 
De Soto, apparently about sixteen or seventeen 
years of age, who had accompanied Indian traders 



NEW RUMORS OF GOLD. 119 

in their journeys from one tribe to another. In 
their examination these Indians stated, that about 
thirteen or fourteen days' march from where they 
then were was a province which produced gold, 
silver, and pearls, and that a woman governed it, to 
whom the surrounding tribes were tributary. One 
of them also gave a particular account of the pro- 
cess of mining and of refining metals, "as if he 
had seen it done, or the devil had taught it him." 
Those who were acquainted with the process said 
that it was impossible to give so correct an account 
without having seen it. This was the most accepta- 
ble news that the Spaniards could hear. The name 
of this new El Dorado was Cofachiqui. De Soto 
determined to lose no time in' setting out for it. 
Accordingly, after having remained in Apalachee 
five months, he broke up his encampment and com- 
menced his march for Cofachiqui. He would have 
taken the Indians which he had captured with him, 
as servants and baggage bearers, but as during the 
winter they had been kept in fetters, were almost 
naked, and had*been exposed to the severity of the 
cold, they had nearly all died from cruel treatment. 
The Spaniards were therefore obliged to carry their 
own baggage. In three days they arrived at a town 
called Capachiqui. Here seven men, who had wan- 
dered too far from the camp, were attacked by the 
same number of Indians. A bloody conflict ensued, 



120 THE CANNON. 

which resulted in the death of six of the Spaniards. 
After ten days' travel, they arrived at Cofa, the 
cacique of which received them with all honor. He 
made them a present of rabbits, quails, corn, and 
large numbers of dogs. He also appointed two 
thousand Indians as a kind of guard of honor to 
the strangers. 

De Soto had persevered in carrying his cannon 
with him through all the woods, swamps, and diffi- 
cult passes which he had thus far met. Finding it 
but of little use in the guerilla mode of warfare 
adopted by the Indians, and it being a great burden 
to those who had the special care of it, he resolved 
to leave it in charge of this friendly chief. That 
he might know its wonderful power, De Soto or- 
dered it to be loaded and pointed at a tree at a 
considerable distance. When it was touched off, 
the Indians were astonished at the loudness of the 
report ; but when they saw its execution in cutting 
off, with only two charges, a large tree, which it 
would have required them a long time to fell, they 
were more amazed than ever. They received the 
care of this marvellous instrument as an evidence 
of the confidence of these strangers, and promised 
that it should receive no injury. After resting here 
a few days, the army resumed their march to the 
country of Cofaqui, the brother of this friendly 
chief. A message had been sent to him by his 



PETERS FRIGHT. 



121 



brother that the Spaniards were coming, with the 
request that he would give them a kind reception. 
He accordingly came out with a large retinue of 
his followers, richly decorated with graceful plumes, 




Firing of De Soto's Cannon. 

showy mantles of costly skins, and the usual orna- 
ments of a full dress. Professions of mutual friend- 
ship were soon exchanged between the two parties. 
Whilst here, Peter, one of the young Indian guides, 
alarmed the whole camp. Two different accounts 
of the affair are given. The Portuguese narrative 
says that the boy had a fit ; he foamed at the mouth 
and tumbled on the ground as one possessed with a 
devil " They said a gospel over him, and the fit 
11 



122 THE ARMY BEWILDERED. 

left him." But the historiographer, Antonio cle Her- 
rera, states that the alarm was given by an Indian 
calling out that Peter was in danger of being killed. 
" All the forces were immediately at arms, and found 
Peter quaking, who said that the devil, attended by 
many of his companions, had threatened to kill him 
in case he conducted the Spaniards as he had prom- 
ised ; that he had dragged and beaten him so un- 
mercifully, that, had they not come to his assistance, 
he would have killed him ; and since the great devil 
had fled from* two Christians, he desired that they 
would baptize him, that he might be a Christian as 
well as they." Herrera goes on very coolly to say 
" This appeared to be no fiction, by the bruises and 
swellings; whereupon the Adelantado (De Soto) 
delivered him to the priests, who stayed with him all 
night, baptized him, and the next day he was 
mounted on horseback, because of his hurts." 

After leaving this place with an escort of several 
thousands of Indians, the army entered a vast wil- 
derness, where, after a short time, they lost the 
path, and knew not which way to go. The escort 
and the guides were equally ignorant. The Span- 
iards were here reduced to great straits. Their 
food was gone, their horses exhausted, the spirits 
of the men depressed, and no one could give the 
least information as to the direction they should 
take to extricate themselves from their perilous 



THE BURIED LETTER. 123 

condition. Being on the banks of an unknown 
river, De Soto sent off four exploring parties, each 
accompanied with a thousand Indians, to follow the 
course of this stream, in opposite directions, for pur- 
poses of discovery. The swine which they had 
succeeded in driving along with them to the present 
time now answered a valuable purpose. Enough 
of them were killed to furnish each man an allow- 
ance of half a pound. Though this was far from 
appeasing their hunger, it was better than nothing. 
The exploring party under Juan de Anasco, after 
three days' travel, succeeded in finding a country 
well inhabited, and where was an abundance of food. 
When this intelligence reached the army, they were 
greatly cheered. De Soto immediately started off 
for this land of plenty. He left a card upon a tree 
containing directions to dig at the root and letters 
would be found. When the other exploring parties 
returned, they saw this card, dug up the letters, and 
in this manner learnt where their Governor had 
gone and what were his orders. The country dis- 
covered by Anasco, and whither the whole army 
had now gone, was in the far-famed province of 
Cofachiqui, of which they were in pursuit. The 
Indians who had accompanied them were at war 
with this people, and therefore now seized, unknown 
to the Spaniards, every opportunity to murder old 
and young, of both sexes, wherever they could 



124 INDIAN SUICIDE. 

find them. That he might not be implicated in 
their cruelties, De Soto released his Indian escort, 
made them presents for their services, and sent 
them home. 

The province of Cofachiqui was under the ad- 
ministration of an Indian princess. This squaw- 
chief is said to have been very beautiful, courteous, 
and generous. She made a visit of ceremony to 
De Soto, gave him provisions for his people, offered 
him houses for their use, and even took off a string 
of rich pearls which went three times round her 
neck, and with her own hands placed it upon the 
neck of the Spanish commander. In return, 
De Soto gave her a gold ring, containing a ruby, 
which she placed upon her finger. The mother of 
this lady-chieftain refused to have any intercourse 
with the Spaniards. All the efforts of De Soto to 
obtain an interview with her were baffled. The 
princess commanded an Indian to guide a company 
of Spaniards to the retreat of her mother. On the 
way this guide committed suicide with the sharp 
flint head of an arrow. Knowing that if he obeyed 
the princess he would greatly offend her mother, if 
he disobeyed he would incur the anger of the prin- 
cess herself, and by suicide he would escape both, he 
preferred this latter to either of the other alternatives. 
As no other person in the company knew the hiding- 
place of the old lady, the secret would die with 



THE BUBBLE BURST. 125 

himself, and the lady would escape. This was the 
most plausible explanation of his conduct which 
could be given. 

To secure good treatment from her subjects, 
De Soto captured the young princess who had 
treated him so kindly, and kept her under close 
guard. As this was the place where the precious 
metals were expected to be obtained, diligent in- 
quiries were made respecting them. Specimens 
were brought, which at once put to flight all the 
dreams of luxury and wealth the Spaniards had 
cherished. The yellow metal which they had heard 
of, and which they had presumed was gold, proved 
to be nothing but light-colored copper, and the 
specimens brought as samples of silver ore were 
nothing but useless sand, containing white, shining 
particles, similar to mica. The golden bubble burst. 
The principal alleviation of their disappointment 
consisted in vast quantities of pearls which they 
found there, some of which were perfect, but others 
had been smoked and injured by fire. In the 
burying-places they found many bushels of them. 
They carried away only a few, and even these soon 
became burdensome. When examining the place 
for valuables, they were greatly astonished to dis- 
cover a dagger and several coats of mail, which 
had long been in the possession of these Indians. 
After diligent inquiry concerning their history, it 
11* 



126 THE CAPTIVE PRINCESS. 

was the opinion of the Spaniards that they had be- 
longed to an expedition which had been fitted out, a 
number of years before, under the command of 
Lucas Vasquez de Ayllon. Vasquez died ; his en- 
terprise proved a failure, and these were its me- 
morials. 

Having staid in this rich and productive country 
until he had worn out his welcome and a state of 
ill feeling had been engendered between the natives 
and the Spaniards, De Soto broke up his encamp- 
ment and resumed his march. He took with him 
the captive princess, in order that through her influ- 
ence he might obtain guides and baggage-carriers 
for his army till he reached the limits of her domin- 
ions. Although this beautiful squaw-sachem was 
closely watched, she had art enough to contrive a 
method of escape, which she successfully executed. 
She secretly left the camp, taking with her a box of 
valuable unbored pearls and two or three negro 
slaves who belonged to the Spaniards. Why she 
enticed these slaves away is unknown, unless she 
wanted them as trophies because they had once be- 
longed to the Spaniards. She had slaves of her 
own, but did not treat them very kindly. They 
were Indians who had been captured in war. In 
order to prevent their return to their own people 
she had them lamed, by having the sinews of the 
leg cut near the ancle. 



SANGUINARY CONFLICT. 127 

A few days after, De Soto entered the territory 
of a chief named Tuscaloosa. He was of gigantic 
stature and of great strength. He had heard of 
the strangers, and was prepared to receive them. 
He was very courteous to De Soto, though he took 
but little notice of any of his officers. The Gov- 
ernor, according to his usual custom with the 
chiefs, held this Goliah-like warrior in durance, in 
order to secure good treatment from his followers. 
He afterwards had to pay dear for this violation 
of confidence. When the chief had conducted 
the Spaniards to Mauvila, a large fortified town, 
where he generally resided, it was found that all 
the aged and the children were absent, but thou- 
sands of noble, sinewy, well-armed braves were 
assembled and concealed in different houses, who 
had all the appearance of being prepared for 
deadly conflict. It so happened that only a portion 
of the Spanish army had pressed on, with De Soto 
and the chief, to the town. The others were slowly 
following, under the command of Luis de Moscoso. 
After the Spaniards had entered the town, which is 
believed to have been located at what is now called 
Choctaw Bluff, between twenty and thirty miles 
above the junction of the Alabama and Tombigbee 
Rivers, the Indians soon managed to become em- 
broiled in a quarrel, which immediately led to a 
general and sanguinary battle. All the men on 



128 RESULTS OF THE BATTLE.* 

both sides who were in arid around the town were 
engaged. The Indians fought like so many demons. 
Every inch of ground in the streets was bravely 
contested by the infuriated combatants. Even the 
young squaws who were in the town engaged in the 
bloody conflict with the heroism of despair. The 
town was set on fire. The murky smoke and raging 
flames, as they swept furiously through the streets, 
added to the horrors of the scene. At times the 
Spaniards would be driven before the savages ; then 
rallying, they would recover, after great effort, the 
ground they had lost. When the vanguard were 
nearly exhausted, the rearguard, under Moscoso, 
came into the field, and seeing many of their com- 
rades slain, and many more wounded, they rushed 
into the thickest of the conflict, burning with re- 
venge. The battle rage*d with new intensity, both 
in and around the city. It commenced in the morn- 
ing, and continued until sunset. The Indians re- 
fused to yield. They fought desperately to the last 
gasp. When night came, the Spaniards were in 
possession of the field. A day of horrors was fol- 
lowed by a night of agony. The loss of the Span- 
iards was nearly a hundred men and fifty horses 
killed. Of the Indians the accounts state that sev- 
eral thousands fell. Many of them were consumed, 
because they could not escape from the houses which 
were on fire. Some of the buildings were very 



SUFFERINGS OF THE SPANIARDS. 129 

large — capable of containing several hundreds. 
These were filled with natives, who perished in the 
flames. 

Though the Spaniards were victorious, they found 
themselves after the battle in an extremely deplora- 
ble condition. There were nearly two thousand 
wounds requiring immediate care, and there was 
only one surgeon in the army, and he inexperienced 
and unskilful. To add to their distress, all their 
ointments, medicines, bandages for swathing wounds, 
and the various other articles so needful in times 
of sickness, were consumed by the fire. No houses 
were standing where the wounded could be shel- 
tered. The night was passed in the open air. 
Those who were so fortunate as to escape being 
severely wounded assisted in taking care of the 
others. Some tore their own shirts into strips to 
furnish bandages for others. Some dissected the 
slain Indians for their fat, to use in the nlace of 
ointments. Others carved the horses, and kept their 
flesh, with which to feed the sick. This was the 
most severe engagement which the Spaniards had 
experienced since their landing upon the continent, 
and they never recovered from its effects. 



130 



CHAPTER X. 

Ecclesiastical Losses. — Dry Mass. — Rumor of Ships. — De So- 
to's Change. — Battle at Night. — Moscoso cashiered. — Novel 
Bedding. — Fortified Town. — The Mississippi discovered. — 
Great Change. — Indian's Request. — Imposing Service. — 
Boats destroyed. — Death of De Soto. — His double Burial. — 
Moscoso his Successor. — Arrival in Mexico. — The Route. — 
The Time occupied. — The Termination. — Diminished Num- 
bers. — The Policy and Influence of the Spaniards. — Blood- 
hounds. — Sunday the sailing Day. 

At the time of the conflagration in Mauvila the 
Spaniards lost all their wine, wheaten flour, plate, 
and ecclesiastical robes, with which they were accus- 
tomed to celebrate mass. This was regarded as a 
great affliction. Having decided that, even in this 
extremity, the use of flour made from corn was not 
allowable in that imposing service, they were reluc- 
tantly compelled to dispense with it. They resolved, 
however, to do the best they could. Hence on Sun- 
days and festival occasions they erected a temporary 
altar of such materials as were at hand, before 
which the priest officiated, arrayed in skins, which 
were made to imitate, as nearly as possible, his 
ecclesiastical robes. He went through the whole 
ceremonial, except the consecration of the elements. 
Being destitute of wheat bread and wine, he was 



THE DRY MASS. 131 

compelled to omit these from the service. This 
imperfect ceremony was denominated by the Span- 
iards the " Dry Mass." 

Soon after this disastrous battle with Tuscaloosa, 
De Soto received reliable intelligence that vessels 
had been recently seen upon the coast, which was 
only about seven days' journey distance. Believing 
them to be some of his own officers whom he had 
sent home some time before for reenforcement and 
additional supplies, he was greatly encouraged. 
•With their assistance he imagined that he would be 
able to establish a colony, keep possession of the 
country, and then make successful explorations for 
the precious metals. His men cherished entirely 
different intentions. They were thoroughly tired of 
these useless wanderings amid savage tribes. To 
them these vessels afforded a gleam of hope that 
they would be able soon either to return home or 
sail to South America, where gold was known to be 
abundant. They determined to make their escape 
in them, if possible. When De Soto learnt this, 
Ms feelings underwent a remarkable change. He 
became taciturn, irritable, and unhappy. He lost 
confidence in his men, and being unwilling to return 
home, or even to send any intelligence, until he had 
met with greater success, instead of directing his 
face towards the sea, he struck into the interior. 
He was followed reluctantly by his disappointed 



132 MIDNIGHT ATTACK. 

men. They arrived upon the banks of a river, per- 
haps the Black Warrior. They were here met by 
Indians, who disputed their passage. Two weeks 
were spent in building boats with which to cross. 
On the 18th of December he reached Chicaza, sup- 
posed to be the territory of the Chickasaws. They 
here passed two months in winter quarters, at the 
end of which time they had another dreadful con- 
flict with the natives. The savages came upon them 
in three bands at the dead hour of night. In a 
moment the whole camp was in confusion. The, 
men seized their weapons and sprang to the defence. 
But little order could be observed in the darkness. 
Each fought as best as he could, whenever he dis- 
cerned a foe. The Indians set the town on fire, 
which operated favorably for them. Before morn- 
ing, they were vanquished. But the victory cost a 
great price. Forty soldiers and fifty horses had 
fallen. Nearly all the swine had perished. They 
were fastened in one of the houses, and were nearly 
all consumed. The only Spanish woman who had 
accompanied the army in all their romantic marches 
also died. Her husband was in the company. 
After she had escaped from her burning dwelling 
she returned to get some pearls which she had for- 
gotten, when retreat became impossible. She was 
burnt to death. De Soto became offended with 
Luis de Moscoso, whose duty it was to see that 



MOSCOSO DEPOSED. 133 

vigilant sentinels were placed upon guard. He was 
suspicious that this duty had been neglected, and for 
this reason the Indians were so successful in their 
midnight attack. He therefore deposed Moscoso 
from his office of master of the camp, and conferred 
this honor upon his brave and faithful Baltazar de 
Gallegos. The army now suffered from cold. 
They resorted to the expedient of making thick 
fabrics of ivy leaves and grass, one half of which 
answered for a mattress, and the other half, thrown 
over them, served for a blanket. 

In the month of April, 1541, De Soto came upon 
a large Indian fortress, protected by strong pali- 
sades. It was square, each side measuring about a 
thousand feet. Inside of this were two other pali- 
sades, behind winch the Indians might successively 
retreat in case of necessity. It was called Alibamo, 
from which the word Alabama comes. He here 
had another engagement. The fort was carried by 
assault. The Indians were defeated with great 
slaughter, while only some fifteen or twenty of the 
Spaniards were slain, or died subsequently of their 
wounds. 

Leaving Alibamo, they travelled for seven days 
unmolested by the Indians, as the country through 
which they passed was uninhabited. They made 
but slow progress, in consequence of dense woods 
and deep swamps, which impeded their course. 
12 



134 DISCOVERY OF THE MISSISSIPPI. 

They at last reached the banks of a wide, turbid, 
and rapid river, which they named the Rio Grande, 
or Great River. Little did they imagine they were 
then standing upon the borders of a stream which, 
in the course of three centuries, would be the great 
central artery of a vast republic, would be lined 
with numerous cities and villages, and be traversed 
by hundreds of floating palaces, borne onward by 
the power of steam more rapidly than the swiftest 
steed could travel. Yet so it was. The river which 
they had reached was the renowned Mississippi, ap- 
propriately designated by the Indians " The Father 
of Waters." 

De Soto spent twenty days in building boats with 
which to transport his army and baggage over. 
During this time he was visited by the natives, who 
came in large fleets of canoes, gayly decorated, and 
made an imposing appearance. After the passage 
of the river had been effected, a cacique came to 
liim and besought him to pray to his God for rain, 
as there had been a long drought, and the fields 
were parched. He promised to comply. To do it. 
in the most impressive maimer, he erected upon a 
high lull, which overlooked the river, a large cross. 
He then ordered the whole army, with the exception 
of the guard, to approach it in procession and offer 
prayers. A company of priests and friars headed 
the procession, chanting the litany, while the soldiers 





DE SOTO OFFERING PRAYER FOR RAIN. 



DE SOTO'S DEATH. 137 

gave the responses. When they arrived near the 
cross, they all knelt and offered prayers; after 
which each individual approached, knelt before it, 
and kissed it. Many of the Indians joined in the 
procession, whilst thousands of others were specta- 
tors. After the ceremony on the hill was over, the 
procession returned in similar order. During the 
night rain fell abundantly. 

After crossing the river, De Soto broke up his 
boats, in order to use the nails and spikes for a 
similar service, if necessary, and marched farther 
into the interior. How far he went, it is difficult 
now to tell. As he found no gold, and his men and 
horses were constantly dying, he retraced his course 
to the Mississippi. He was here taken sick with a 
violent fever. Believing himself to be near his end, 
he made his will, appointed Luis de Moscoso his 
successor, bade his officers and soldiers farewell, 
confessed his sins according to the Roman Catholic 
custom, and died. 

His death was deeply lamented by all his follow- 
ers. As at that time they were among unfriendly 
Indians, it was considered of great importance that 
De Soto's death should be concealed from them. 
He was secretly interred. The Indians, however, 
discovered the place of his burial. Fearing they 
would exhume and mutilate him, the Spaniards 
themselves opened his grave, removed his remains, 
12* 



138 ROUTE OF THE SPANIARDS. 

placed them in the trunk of a tree, which they 
hollowed out for the purpose, and, amid the still- 
ness and darkness of midnight, they buried him 
beneath the waters of the Mississippi. 

His survivors were conducted by Moscoso, after 
incredible hardships, much fighting with the Indians, 
and after the loss of all the- horses and many of the 
men, to Panuco, a river of Mexico, which empties 
into the Gulf of Mexico. 

In the preceding sketch of De Soto's rumblings, 
no attempt was made to trace his course, nor fix the 
localities where the different incidents occurred, be- 
cause of the great difficulty of arriving at correct- 
ness upon these points. The best that can be done 
is to present the results which have been reached by 
those who have given special attention to the sub- 
ject, but without our vouching for their accuracy. 

If the reader will cast his eye on a map of the 
United States, and follow us along, he will obtain as 
good an idea of the route pursued, and the distance 
travelled, as it is in our power to impart. 

Near the middle of the western coast of East 
Florida will be seen Tampa Bay. It was tins 
bay which the Spaniards called the Bay of Espiritu 
Santo, or Holy Spirit. Here they landed. From 
this point they proceeded northerly to Vitachuco. 
Then, turning to the west, they crossed the Suwanee 
River, and arrived at Tallahassee, near the Apa- 



THE TIME OCCUPIED. 139 

lachee Bay, or Bay of St. Mark's. From this point 
they penetrated the country northwardly to the Sa- 
vannah River, touching, in their course, the points 
where Macon and Milledgeville now stand. Then, 
veering to the north-west, they proceeded as far as 
the northern part of Georgia, near La Fayette. Find- 
ing no gold in this direction, they set their faces to 
the south and travelled on, passing through the 
present localities of Rome, Jefferson, and Mont- 
gomery, following the course of the Coosa and 
Alabama Rivers, till they arrived at Maubila, near 
Mobile Bay. From this place they marched to the 
north-west, crossed the Tombigbee River where Co- 
lumbus now stands, and struck the Mississippi at a 
point between Memphis and Helena. This is the 
route as traced by Mr. Theodore Irving, in his in- 
teresting work, " The Conquest of Florida," and 
marked upon the map accompanying his book. 
After the death of De Soto, his survivors visited the 
hunting-grounds of the far west ; they crossed the 
Red River near Natchitoches, and penetrated to 
the borders of Mexico. They then retraced their 
course to the Mississippi. As they arrived in Flor- 
ida in May, 1539, and did not reach Panuco till 
September, 1543, they occupied over four years in 
these useless wanderings. 

Thus terminated an enterprise which had been 
commenced under the most favorable auspices in 



140 DISASTROUS RESULTS. 

respect to the numbers, wealth, and influence of those 
concerned, and also in regard to the probable pros- 
pects of success. With high hopes, dauntless cour- 
age, and noble bearing, did those gallant cavaliers 
set out from Spain to subjugate the new world, and 
return ladened with rich spoils of gold and pearls. 
But, alas ! how different was their experience from 
their anticipations ! 

Of the one thousand persons who landed with 
De Soto in Florida, only three hundred and fifty 
reached Panuco. They had found no gold ; their 
clothes were worn out ; they were roughly clad in 
skins ; many of them were emaciated and diseased, 
so that they presented a most wretched and forlorn 
appearance. They had formed no settlements, es- 
tablished no trading posts, 'and left behind them no 
garrisoned forts. The enterprise had proved a 
splendid failure. Not only had there been an im- 
mense pecuniary loss, but also the sacrifice of some 
of the bravest and most chivalrous spirits of Spain. 
Another unpropitious circumstance was, that, on al- 
most all the tribes through which they passed, they 
had left an unfavorable impression. How could it 
have been otherwise 1 Their great object was 
gold, gold. For this they made great sacrifices, 
and endured great hardships and dangers. They 
seem to have regarded any measures justifiable 
which would assist in the accomplishment of their 



TREATMENT OF THE NATIVES. 141 

cherished pursuit. They acted as if they had a just 
claim to every thing which they found upon their 
route — as if the aborigines had no rights, and 
were destitute of all feeling. Hence they seized 
any food, pearls, skins, or other articles which they 
found, and which they knew belonged to the natives. 
Men and women were captured, chained, and com- 
pelled to be the slaves and baggage-bearers of the 
Spaniards. The caciques, whether male or female, 
were also seized and held in captivity whilst the 
army were passing through their domains, in order 
to secure the services of their subjects. If the In- 
dians were detected in making reprisals, or re- 
venging themselves, they would be horribly muti- 
lated, by having their hands and their noses cut off, 
and in that condition would be sent home to drag 
out a degraded and miserable existence among their 
friends. Ravenous bloodhounds were used to dis- 
cover and seize the poor natives when they attempted 
to secrete themselves from their unfeeling pursuers. 
In some instances these hounds were allowed to tear 
the Indians to pieces, as a punishment to terrify 
others. 

Another peculiar feature of this expedition was 
seen in the manner of their observance of the Sab- 
bath. Although the rites and ceremonies of the 
Roman Catholic form of worship were performed 
on that day, yet it was on a Sunday that De Soto, 



142 SAILING DAY. 

with his magnificent army, sailed from St. Lucas, in 
Spain, amid the roar of artillery and the sound of 
martial music, to touch at the Canary Islands on his 
way to Cuba. It was on Sunday that he departed 
from the Canaries. After spending some time at 
Cuba, of which he had been appointed Governor by 
the Ring of Spain, he set sail from there on Sun- 
day, May 18, in the year 1539. In each instance, 
this day was selected as the time of embarkation. 
They practically adopted the maxim, " The better 
the day, the better the deed." 



143 



CHAPTER XI. 

Our Plan. — Sir Martin Frobisher. — Queen. — Pinnacled Coast. — 
Dangers. — Men lost. — Discouragements resisled. — Beautiful 
Sight. — Straits discovered. — Mighty Deer. — Escape from In- 
dians. — Visitors. — Boat's Crew captured. — Frobisher badly 
off. — Decoy Bell. — Man caught. — Tongue bitten. — Reports 
of Gold. — The black Stone. — Second Voyage. — Gold seek- 
ing. — Conflicts. — Suspicions of a cloven Foot. — Woman 
licks Wounds. — Lameness feigned. — Talking to a Picture. — 
Vessels loaded. — Meta incognito. — Third Voyage. — Dogs. — 
Whales. — A Whale run down. — Fresh Water from Icebergs. — 
The Dennis destroyed. — Sudden Changes. — Refining the 
Ore. — False Stories. — The Truth discovered. 

As the plan of this work is based upon chrono- 
logical order in the account of the various explora- 
tions of the country, irrespective of the question 
whether the explorers confined their examination to 
the coast or penetrated the interior, adherence to 
our plan requires us now, though at the hazard of an 
apparent abrupt transition, to part company with the 
Spaniards at the sunny south, and attempt a descrip- 
tion of the experience of the voyagers to our more 
northern regions. 

Of the different early navigators who visited the 
coast of North America, none were more deter- 



144 SIR MARTIN FROBISHER. 

mined and resolute than Sir Martin Frobisher.* 
Like many others of his day, he supposed it practi- 
cable to find a passage to India and China round 
the north-west coast of America, and he was willing 
to undertake its discovery. Though this may not 
have been the only, nor the ostensible object of his 
voyage, it was one. His first voyage was made in 
1576, with three vessels, two of which were barks, 
called the Gabriel, Christopher Hall, master, and the 
Michael, Matthew Kinderslye, master ; the other a 
pinnace. Captain Hall, who wrote an account of 
the voyage, says that, June 8th, « we set sail, all 
three of us, and bore down by the court, where we 
shot off our ordnance, and made the best show we 
could ; her majesty beholding the same, commended 
it, and bade us farewell out of the window. After- 
wards she 'sent a gentleman aboard of us, who de- 
clared that her majesty had good liking of our 
doings, and thanked us for it, and also willed our 
captain to come the next day to the court, to take 
his leave of her." Their voyage fairly commenced 
on the 11th, when they probably left Gravesend, 
and committed themselves to the broad Atlantic. 
On the 11th of July, the sun appearing to be in the 
south-east, they came in sight of Friesland. As 
they neared it, it presented the beautiful but unin- 

* New England Historical and Genealogical Register, January, 
1849. 



HIS VOYAGE. 145 

viting appearance of an immense iceberg. The 
coast was studded with tall, steeple-like pinnacles, 
having a close resemblance to white marble, on ac- 
count of the snow with which they were covered. 
The water was so deep that no soundings could be 
obtained. In sixty-one degrees north latitude, Fro- 
bisher attempted to land, but found it impossible, in 
consequence of the immense quantities of ice which 
encumbered the shore. The sea was so full of it as 
greatly to endanger the ships. But Frobisher here 
experienced more serious troubles than the ice occa- 
sioned. A violent storm having arisen, he became sep- 
arated from his pinnace, which he concluded was de- 
stroyed by the severity of the gale, by which he lost 
four men. But this was not all, nor the worst. The 
captain and crew of the Michael, becoming disheart- 
ened with the severities of the voyage, secretly escaped 
with their vessel and returned home, carrying with 
them the false report that Frobisher was cast away. 
But notwithstanding these unlooked-for discourage- 
ments, and although his mast was sprung, his top- 
mast blown away, and extremely foul weather pre- 
vailed, yet the resolute Frobisher continued to point 
his prow to the north-west. On the 1st of August 
he found himself in the vicinity of a large floating 
island of ice. When the rays of the sun fell upon 
it, it presented a brilliant and magnificent scene. 
All the hues of the rainbow were reflected from it, 
13 



146 FROBISHER IN DANGER. 

giving to its uneven surface the appearance of a 
splendid temple, profusely ornamented with every 
variety of precious stones. But the next day it 
suddenly fell to pieces with the noise of thun- 
der. 

On the 11th of August, in latitude sixty-three de- 
grees and eight minutes, he discovered and entered 
the straits which, from that circumstance, have ever 
since been called by his name. His vessel having 
sprung a leak, he ran into another sound, caulked 
her, and took in a supply of fresh water. He then 
continued his voyage. After sailing sixty leagues 
into the straits, he landed, and found signs of recent 
fire. The account also states that " he saw mighty 
deer, that seemed to be mankind, which ran at him, 
and hardly he escaped with his life in a narrow way, 
where he was fain to use defence and policy to save 
his life. He soon discovered other enemies. Whilst 
walking about the shore, he saw evident tokens that 
the place was inhabited. He then ascended a hill 
to see if any dwellings or inhabitants were in sight. 
From this elevated position he saw at a distance in 
the sea dark objects moving about, which he sup- 
posed to be porpoises, seals, or some kind of singu- 
lar fish. But upon reconnoitring them more close- 
ly, he was equally surprised and gratified to perceive 
that they were men floating in small canoes of 
leather. When he attempted to descend the hill, he 



FIVE MEN LOST. 147 

found that some of these uncouth-looking creatures 
had made it almost impossible for him to reach his 
boat. They had secretly concealed themselves be- 
hind the rocks, to intercept him on his way to the 
sea. He ran with all speed, and with difficulty 
reached his boat in sufficient time to push off and 
save it. He subsequently had various interviews 
with them. They came on board his vessel, 
brought salmon, raw flesh, and fish, and devoured 
them in the presence of the captain and crew. 
They amused themselves in handling the ropes and 
climbing the rigging, in which they were found to 
be quite expert. They possessed strong, sinewy 
arms and nimble bodies. 

As their visits were frequently repeated, and 
their conduct unexceptionable, they secured the con- 
fidence and good will of the crew. The captain 
was more suspicious, and cautioned the men to be 
on their guard. His advice was unheeded. The 
men probably thought that they understood the 
character of these savages better than Frobisher, 
and therefore there was no necessity for special 
caution. They had occasion, before long, to repent 
of their presumption. Being equally destitute of 
fear and suspicion, five of the crew put off to the 
shore in the boat belonging to the bark. The sav- 
ages, in whom they had so much confidence, seized 
a favorable opportunity, intercepted the boat, and 



148 • UNKNOWN DESTINY. 

the men were never seen again. What became of 
them — whether they were held in captivity, whether 
they made the bold attempt to escape from this 
region of snow and ice by land, and perished in the 
attempt, or whether they were sacrificed — was 
never known. They were never heard of again. 
Frobisher was now left in a trying condition. One 
of his vessels had foundered at sea, the other had 
cowardly sneaked off home, and now five of his 
own crew had perished. He scarcely had men 
enough to navigate his vessel. In addition to this, 
his boat was gone, so that he had no means of pur- 
suing the savages or reaching the shore. He was 
shut up to the narrow limits of his own deck. The 
natives were aware of his inability to leave his ves- 
sel, and they were sufficiently prudent to keep 
beyond reach of his guns. 

It was usual with those early navigators to take, 
as evidences of their discovery, specimens of the 
productions of the countries visited, especially some 
of the natives. No one then, however evil-minded, 
could deny that the voyagers had been to unknown 
lands. After the loss of his boat, Frobisher greatly 
regretted that he had not seized some of the sav- 
ages who had visited him and retained them for that 
purpose. Now that he had met with this loss, and 
the natives artfully kept out of his way, he was fear- 
ful of being obliged to return without any. He 



THE COW-BELL. 



149 



determined to resort to stratagem. " To deceive 
the deceivers he wrought a pretty policy." Know- 
ing how greatly they were delighted with bells, he 
resolved to use one as a decoy or bait to draw them 
within reach. For this purpose he brought on deck 
a showy-looking cow-bell, and rang it. The sav- 
ages made their appearance, but kept at a respectful 
distance. After securing their attention, he signi- 
fied to them by signs that whoever would come and 
get it might have the bell. This was a strong temp- 
tation. They approached a little nearer, but not 




Frobislier seizing an Indian. 

within reaching distance. They were suspicious of 
some evil design. To convince them of the sincerity 
13* 



150 frobisher's honors. 

of his offer, Frobisher now tlirevv the bell towards 
them, but purposely cast it so that it fell short of 
them and sank in the water. To increase their 
desire, he now rang a louder bell. Its merry tones 
were too attractive for resistance. One of them 
approached the vessel and reached up his hand to 
receive it. Frobisher handed the bell over the side 
of the bark, and then, letting it drop, suddenly seized 
the poor savage and drew him by main force on to 
the deck, boat and all. When the Indian found 
himself a prisoner, so greatly was he enraged that, 
" for very choler and disdain, he bit his tongue in 
twain within his mouth." 

After taking possession of the country in the 
name of Queen Elizabeth of England, and com- 
manding each of his men to take home something 
as evidence of the discovery, he commenced his 
return, and safely arrived in England October 2d, 
1576. He was received with great distinction. All 
classes united in honoring the man who had done 
80 much towards the discovery of the long-looked- 
for passage to India by the north-west coast of 
America. 

Another circumstance which contributed greatly 
towards the enthusiastic reception of Frobisher was 
the report that the country which he had discovered 
abounded with gold, specimens of which had been 
brought home. Intelligence of this nature will 



PSEUDO GOLD. 151 

always make a man popular. No one is so highly 
honored by the populace as he who reveals some 
easy method of obtaining a fortune. The origin 
of this rumor in regard to Frobisher seems to have 
been this : One of his men, whose name was Hall, 
brought home, as his evidence of discovery, a black 
stone somewhat resembling sea-coal. This stone 
accidentally came into the possession of a woman, 
who threw it into the fire. After it was well heated, 
she poured vinegar upon it, when it presented a 
bright, golden color. Curiosity was now awakened. 
Perhaps this yellow, metallic appearance is caused 
by gold ! The stone was next sent to an assayer 
of metals, who examined it and said it contained a 
large proportion of gold. One account says that 
he extracted from it so great a quantity of the pre- 
cious metal that they gave it the name of gold ore. 
This was enough to excite the whole nation. 

Frobisher had not been home long before a second 
voyage was planned. The discovery of a north- 
west passage became suddenly very attractive, now 
that gold could be picked up on the way. So great 
was the number of adventurers who presented them- 
selves, that all could not be accommodated. As the 
voyage promised to be profitable, the government 
took the lead in it. By the 26th of May, 1577, 
Frobisher was ready for sea. He was. provided, as 
before, with three vessels — one belonging to the 



152 GOLD SEEKERS. 

Queen, of two hundred tons, called the Ayde, and 
the two barks he had before, the Gabriel and the 
Michael. The Ayde carried a hundred men, of 
whom thirty were gentlemen and soldiers, the rest 
experienced sailors. Just before he started upon 
this second voyage, Frobisher was exalted, by the 
Queen to the high honor of kissing her majesty's 
hand. 

Leaving England the latter part of the month of 
May, he sailed first towards the Orkney Islands, 
then towards Friesland. When near the Orkneys 
he met vast quantities of driftwood, all of which 
was driven by a current in a north-easterly direction. 
Soon after leaving Friesland he entered the straits 
discovered by him in the former voyage. He at 
once proceeded to the place where Hall picked up 
his famous black stone which was supposed to be 
gold ore. It was called Hall's Island. Upon their 
arrival, many of the company went ashore, among 
whom were several professional gold finders, and 
all began to seek diligently for the precious metal. 
.But, alas ! none could be found. They also unfor- 
tunately had a collision with the natives, in which 
Frobisher himself was wounded, and had a narrow 
escape with his life. In another conflict they killed 
five or six of the natives and took two women cap- 
tives, one of whom, being so old and ugly, the men 
questioned whether she was a human being. They 



DOG-LIKE REMEDY. 153 

suspected that she was a devil and had a cloven foot. 
But when it was uncovered for examination it was 
found to be formed just like their own; Still, so 
repulsive did she appear that they gave her her lib- 
erty. The other was a young woman, with a child 
on her back. When first discovered, she was taken 
for a man, fired upon, and the child was wounded. 
After she was taken, the English dressed the wounds 
of her child and bound them up; but she, not 
knowing the design of their treatment, tore off the 
bandages, removed the ointments, and with her own 
tongue, in dog fashion, licked the wound well. 
Frobisher had previously captured a man, so that 
now he had three natives on board his vessel. 
Through these he was enabled to have intercourse 
with others. From them he learnt that the five 
men who w r ere lost the preceding voyage were still 
living. This was good news, provided it should 
prove true. The natives agreed to take the cap- 
tives a letter, and to return with their answer. A 
note, dated August 7th, was accordingly written 
and committed to them. Frobisher waited two 
weeks for a reply, but none came. It was probably 
a stratagem on the part of the natives, from which 
they hoped to derive some advantage. 

In their conflicts with the English, the Indians 
exhibited great resolution ; for when any of them 
were wounded, instead of allowing themselves to be 



154 THE SILENT PICTURE. 

taken prisoners, they plunged into the sea and were 
drowned. 

They practised different arts to induce the Eng- 
lish to leave their boats and pursue them. One of 
them pretended to be lame, and got another to carry 
him on his back. But when the English fired their 
guns, the pretended cripple ran away, without limp- 
ing, as swiftly as the rest. By none of their meth- 
ods could they entrap the English so as to take them 
captives. 

The one whom Frobisher took to England in his 
previous voyage died soon after his arrival. But 
previous to his death his portrait was painted. This 
picture Frobisher had suspended in the cabin of his 
vessel. When the other native, captured on the 
second voyage, saw it, he supposed that it was his 
old friend returned alive, and addressed him as such ; 
but receiving no answer, he became offended, and 
thought that the English had it in their power to 
make men live or die at their pleasure. 

As the season was advancing, and as the " com- 
mission of Frobisher was for procuring gold ore, 
rather than the further discovery of a passage to the 
Pacific Ocean, he gave orders to load the vessels 
with ore, as he called it. Accordingly, the men 
went to picking up stones and shovelling up dirt, 
such as they could get, and soon ladened the vessels. 
This was on an island in Frobisher's Straits. On 



UNKNOWN GOAL. 155 

the island was a high mount. Some of the com- 
pany ascended this mountain, built fires on its sum- 
mit, and then firing, at the command of Frobisher, 
a volley in honor of Lady Anne, Countess of War- 
wick, after whom he named the island, they set sail 
for England, where they arrived, after a tempestuous 
voyage, with the loss of only two men, one from 
sickness, and one, the master of the Gabriel, by 
being washed overboard. 

This second voyage resulted in no profit nor 
honor. No new discoveries were made, and no 
precious metal was brought home. What was sup- 
posed to be gold ore proved to be nothing but worth- 
less stones and sand. Before this latter fact con- 
cerning the worthlessness of the ore was ascertained, 
another voyage was planned. The land which they 
had visited was called by the Queen Meta Incognita, 
(The Unknown Goal,) and she resolved to plant a 
colony there, through whom she probably expected 
to compete with Spain in coining gold for the circu- 
lating medium of the world. 

Fifteen ships were prepared, and one hundred 
persons obtained for colonists. It was agreed that 
they should remain in this new El Dorado at least a 
year, and retain during that time three of the ships ; 
the other twelve were to return with cargoes of gold 
ore. Sir Martin Frobisher was appointed admiral 
of the fleet. As a token of her special esteem and 



156 DOGS TAKEN. 

encouragement, the Queen presented him with a 
gold chain, and permitted his captains to kiss her 
hand. 

This fleet of fifteen sail commenced their voyage 
from Harwich the last of May, 1578. They had a 
cold, stormy passage. On the 29th of June they 
discovered West Friesland, to which they gave the 
name of West England. Frobisher went on shore 
and took possession of it in the name of her majesty, 
Queen Elizabeth of England. He found huts whose 
construction and furniture were similar to those he 
saw in Meta Incognita. So soon as the inhabitants 
saw the strangers, they fled. The houses were 
searched, and in them were found a small box with 
little iron nails, some pickled herrings, some well- 
cut deal boards, and other articles, from which it 
was inferred that these people either traded with 
some civilized nation or else had made considerable 
proficiency in manufactures themselves. About 
these huts they saw some dogs, two of which they 
appropriated to themselves, leaving for them, how- 
ever, a number of presents, consisting of small 
bells, looking-glasses, and other cheap toys. Many 
whales were seen cutting the deep-green water with 
their dark backs, and throwing up in various direc- 
tions little fountains in the air. They were in 
schools, like porpoises. One of the ships, the Sal- 
amander, when under full sail, with a fair wind, 



ADVENTURE OF A WHALE. 157 

struck one of these huge leviathans with such force 
that it seemed like striking a rock. The progress 
of the ship was entirely stopped. The whale made 
a hideous noise, rose almost entirely out of water, 
and then plunged again into the deep. Two days 
after this, a large whale was seen floating upon 
the sea, dead, which was supposed to be the one 
struck by the Salamander. John Reinhold Forster, 
in alluding to the power of a ship under full sail 
being sufficient to kill one of these creatures, relates 
the following circumstance : " I remember, in our 
voyage round the world, that one day several whales 
appearing about our vessel, while some of these un- 
wieldy animals amused themselves with diving under 
the water on one side of her and coming up again 
on the other, the ship in her course grazed against 
the back of one of them, which, in pursuing these 
gambols, had probably not gone deep enough ; for 
when it came up on the other side, the whole sea 
was immediately dyed red with its blood, though at 
the same time we had but a very moderate breeze, 
and the direction taken by the whale went right 
across the motion of the ship. Now, had we been 
sailing before the wind with a stiff gale, and at the 
same time the whale had met us in a direct line, its 
death would have been unavoidable." 

Upon the arrival of the fleet at Frobisher's Straits, 
it was found impossible to enter, in consequence of 
14 



158 DANGEROUS ICEBERGS. 

the great quantities of ice which obstructed their 
course. Although the sea was as salt there as in 
any other part of the ocean, yet, when the floating 
ice found a hundred miles from land was melted, it 
yielded water as fresh as though it had been frozen 
upon some inland, fresh-water lake. No salt taste 
whatever could be perceived. Some of it was 
melted to supply the men with fresh water to drink. 
As the icebergs were continually changing their 
position, and were tossed about by the waves and 
currents, they occasioned the fleet much trouble to 
keep clear of them. Much of the time dense fogs 
and thick snow storms prevailed, which prevented 
them from discovering these floating mountains of 
ice until they were almost upon them, and then 
great presence of mind, skill, and strength were ne- 
cessary to extricate themselves from the sudden peril. 
Sometimes, several of these icebergs would be float- 
ing around the ships in different directions, by 
which the danger was greatly increased. In some 
cases, escape is impossible. One of the vessels of 
Frobisher's company, the bark Dennis, struck one 
of these unwelcome visitors with such force as to 
be unable afterwards to keep above water. So 
soon as the extent of the injury was ascertained, 
the captain ordered alarm guns to be fired, so that 
some other vessel of the fleet might know their dan- 
ger and send them relief. Fortunately, those guns 



frobisher's resolution. 159 

were heard, and brought assistance. The crew were 
all removed from the shattered vessel, and soon after 
she went to pieces. This proved to be a serious 
loss, and materially altered the subsequent proceed- 
ings of the company. On board of this vessel was 
the frame of a house which was to have been 
erected for the residence of the colonists, and also 
the stores and provisions which they were to use. 
Their loss defeated the settlement. 

The admiral now sent the Gabriel into an inlet, 
and ascertained the possibility of reaching, in that 
direction, Frobisher's Straits. He also explored the 
numerous islands in that vicinity, and, notwithstand- 
ing the murmuring spirit of his men, and the dan- 
gers of another Greenland storm which came furi- 
ously down upon him, he resolutely persevered until 
he reached in safety Warwick Sound. He went on 
shore and searched for mines. He found that, 
though this was one of the bleakest and coldest 
countries in the world, yet in the valleys the air was 
sometimes astonishingly hot. It continued so, how- 
ever, only a short time. When the wind blew over 
fields of ice, it suddenly changed this heat into the 
most piercing cold. 

During this, as in his former voyages, Frobisher 
found the inhabitants extremely shy. Evidences of 
their own skill, or of their intercourse with civilized 
nations, were furnished by iron bars, dart-heads of the 



160 SEPARATION OF THE FLEET. 

same metal, needles with four square points, and 
copper buttons for forehead ornaments, which were 
found among them. They also had kettles of stone, 
which exhibited much ingenuity. In one place, a 
house was seen, built of lime and stone, and also an 
oven. Dogs were used to draw their luggage over 
the ice. Fires were kindled by the friction cau«ed 
by rubbing two sticks together, a practice which was 
generally adopted by Indians all over the continent. 

Three of the vessels, having become separated 
from the rest of the fleet, had been long at sea with- 
out being heard from. Whether they had perished, 
or had returned to England like the Michael in the 
former voyage, or had kept out to sea to avoid dan- 
ger, was unknown. On the other hand, the vessels 
which were missed knew not where to find the rest of 
the fleet from which they were severed. They, how- 
ever, after much difficulty from the ice, made a har- 
bor. But Frobisher was not there. As their vessels 
were damaged by the severity of the voyage, they con- 
cluded to bestow upon them necessary repairs, and 
then to put together a pinnace, the framework of 
which they brought with them, and in that to search 
for their admiral. They did so, and were success- 
ful in finding him. Great was the joy of the two 
parties when they met. 

As the winter season was now approaching when 
they had reason to expect that the inlets and straits 



REFINING THE ORE. 161 

would be completely blocked up with ice, and far- 
ther explorations would be impossible, Frobisher 
began his preparations to return. As the house and 
the provisions designed for the colonists were de- 
stroyed with the Dennis, it was considered inexpe- 
dient for any of the people to remain. Nothing 
further, therefore, could be done but to load the ves- 
sels with the precious metals, and return. Assays 
were made of different kinds of ore found in two 
different places, and all the vessels were ladened 
with large quantities of both. 

Upon the arrival of the fleet at home, which oc- 
curred in the beginning of October, 1578, the ore 
was carefully deposited in the Queen's storehouse on 
Tower Hill, that being a place of great safety. Ex- 
tensive arrangements were then made for assaying 
and refining it. Large works were erected, and the 
most experienced men were obtained for this pur- 
pose. Of course, the curiosity of the nation was 
awakened to know the result. All were inquiring 
what amount of gold was obtained. Stories were 
invented sufficiently marvellous to excite the admira- 
tion of the credulous. So extravagant were the re- 
ports concerning the richness of the ore, that Holin- 
shed, an historian of that day, recorded it as his sober 
opinion that that must have been the place where 
Ring Solomon in ancient times obtained his vast 
quantities of gold. But deception could not long 
14* 



162 DECEPTION DISCOVERED. 

continue in a case like this. It was too expensive 
an operation. In process of time the illusion slowly 
vanished — the bubble burst. It appears that, when 
the parties concerned, found that the great quantity 
of dirt which they had on hand, amounting to more 
than thirteen hundred tons, was perfectly valueless 
as ore, being desirous to escape the popular odium 
which they knew would be heaped upon them when 
the truth should become known, caused the report 
to be circulated that the rubbish actually contained 
a large amount of gold. 

After this, Frobisher was employed in various 
naval expeditions in other parts of the world, and 
finally died from a wound received in an engage- 
ment with the French, in an attack upon Fort Cro- 
zon. His discoveries were confined to Greenland 
and the region about the entrance of Hudson's Bay. 



1G3 



CHAPTER XII. 

Sir Francis Drake. — Visits California. — San Francisco. — Sin- 
gular Conduct. — Imposing- Visit. — Supposed Coronation. — 
Professing" Allegiance. — The Californians. — Drake takes Pos- 
session. — Visits Florida. — St. Augustine. — A French Cap- 
tive. — Spaniards flee. — Death of Powell. — The Town de- 
stroyed. — Drake visits Virginia. — Raleigh's Colony. — New 
Calamity. — The Colony disheartened. — Their Interpretation 
of Providence. — They are taken home. — Governor Lane. — 
Tobacco introduced into England. 

The voyages to North America of which we have 
thus far given an account were confined to an ex- 
ploration of its eastern coast. Of the character of 
its western coast Europeans were ignorant. After 
Frobisher had completed his first voyage, another 
bold navigator set sail from England, for the purpose 
of examining the west coast of America and cir- 
cumnavigating the globe : this was Sir Francis 
Drake. Omitting all account of his previous voy- 
ages to other parts of the world, it will be in har- 
mony with the design of this volume if we com- 
mence our account of him from the time of his vis- 
iting Aguapulco, or Acapulco, on the south-western 
coast of Mexico, which was April 15th, 1577. He 
had coasted down the eastern side of South America ; 
sailed through the Straits of Magellan ; been driven, 



164 DRAKE DISCOVERS SAN FRANCISCO. 

by unfavorable winds, south of Cape Horn, the ex- 
treme point of South America, and had coursed his 
way up the western coast as far as Acapulco. 

Leaving this port, Drake penetrated farther north, 
until the cold became so severe, and gave the men 
so much annoyance, especially in freezing the ropes 
and hindering the management of the vessel, as to 
occasion great complaints. He sailed as far as the 
48th degree of latitude, near Vancouver's Island, 
where he found a harbor. But dense fogs, sudden 
flaws, and violent tempests, prevented him from 
tarrying there very long. His men being strongly 
opposed to proceeding farther north, and the 
wind being against him, he concluded to run down 
the coast to the neighborhood of the 38th de- 
gree of north latitude, where he found another 
harbor, which Mr. Burney, in his " South Sea 
Discoveries," says there can be but little doubt 
was San Francisco. The country was inhabited, 
and many of the natives had erected their huts 
close by the water. On approaching this har- 
bor, they saw a single native coming off to them in 
a canoe, who, when he came within speaking dis- 
tance, made a long address to them, and then, with 
marks of great reverence, returned to the shore. 
What the address was, whether it was made up of 
threats, information, or offers of submission, they 
knew not, as they were unacquainted with the 



EXPRESSIONS OF FRIENDSHIP. 165 

language. The vessel having sprung a leak, it was 
necessary to lighten her, in order to repair her. 
Tents were raised on the shore for the men, and a 
rude fort constructed for the protection of the stores 
and cargo. The natives looked on from a distance, 
not knowing what these things meant. By and by 
they came down armed, in great numbers, but gave 
no evidence of hostile design. They were ordered, 
by signs, to lay down their bows and arrows, and at 
once complied. The admiral, in order to secure 
their good will, gave them a number of presents of 
European manufacture. In return, they presented 
him with articles of their own handiwork, and also 
some feathers and skins. At night they withdrew to 
their own village, about a mile distant. They there 
made demonstrations of a most noisy character ; 
the women, especially, shrieked in a terrific manner, 
as if they expected to be led to captivity or death. 
For two days after this, none of them came near 
the English ; but on the third day a company pre- 
sented themselves, much more numerous than those 
who first appeared. One of them, who was prob- 
ably a chief speaker among them, delivered a long 
address. When he had finished, the whole com- 
pany laid down their weapons, and came to the 
English camp. Judging from their conduct, it 
would seem that the women had no sympathy with 
the proceedings of the men. They made doleful 



166 INTERESTING VISIT. 

lamentations, tore the flesh from their cheeks, and 
appeared to be overwhelmed with sorrow. Perhaps, 
however, this was their method of giving more in- 
tense expression to the same feelings as those of the 
men. 

The English suspected that they were about to 
offer a sacrifice. Whereupon the admiral, with his 
company, engaged in prayer, and in the reading of 
the Bible to them, to which the natives gave good 
attention, and seemed much impressed by it ; but 
when they came to the English, they restored the 
gifts which they had previously received from them. 
Presently the King himself made his appearance, ac- 
companied by many of his followers, of stately and 
warlike appearance, and painted in various colors. 
His Indian majesty was preceded by two ambassa- 
dors, who came to announce his approach. Their 
address continued about an hour, at the end of 
which the King advanced, surrounded with all the 
trappings of royalty at his command. During his 
stately march to the English camp, the followers 
who composed his train " cried continually, after a 
singing manner, with a lusty courage. As they drew 
nearer and nearer, so did they more and more strive 
to behave themselves with a certain comeliness and 
gravity in all their actions." 

So friendly was the manner of their approach, 
that Drake, being disarmed of all suspicions, gave 



SIGNIFICANT CEREMONY. 167 

orders for their admission within the enclosure of 
the camp without interruption. They entered the 
fort with songs and dances. During the continuance 
of the festivity, the King approached the admiral with 
singing, and, with the consent of all the rest, placed 
upon his head, with great ^reverence, an ornamented 
feathered cap, as if it were an act of coronation, 
threw over his neck many chains belonging to his 
followers, presented many other things as gifts, and 
then greeted him with the salutation, Hioh, which 
the English supposed was either his own name or 
else the Indian title for King. They then added 
what was supposed to be a song and dance of tri- 
umph. The women, not satisfied with songs and 
dances, tore their faces and breasts until they were 
horribly disfigured with wounds and blood. 

The ceremony of coronation which we have de- 
scribed was interpreted by Drake as a formal and offi- 
cial acknowledgment of allegiance to him, by which 
the King resigned himself, his people, and all their 
lands, into his hands, and bound themselves and all 
their posterity to become his subjects. In reply, 
Drake gave them to understand, as well as he was able, 
that he accepted them and their lands in the name 
and for the use of her majesty Queen Elizabeth of 
England. It is very uncertain whether the interpre- 
tation of the admiral was correct. The ceremony 
of the Indians was undoubtedly an expression of 



163 STRENGTH OF THE NATIVES. 

great respect and reverence for the English ; but it 
seems quite improbable that they should voluntarily 
have offered themselves, their lands, and their pos- 
terity to these strangers, without receiving, or even 
asking, any equivalent. Such an act is not in har- 
mony with Indian character. 

These people are described as teachable, confid- 
ing, and amiable, destitute of duplicity, treachery, 
and revenge. Their bows and arrows were com- 
paratively harmless, being weak, and more appropri- 
ate for children than adults. Yet the men were 
unusually strong. A burden, which two or three of 
the English found it difficult to lift, one of them 
would carry over a rough road, up hill and down, a 
long distance. It was observed also that, although 
they had never heard the apostolic injunction, 
" Wives obey your husbands," yet the women were 
very obedient and serviceable to those whom they 
had married. 

Before the admiral left this place, he erected a 
post, or column, on which he fastened a brass plate, 
containing the date of his arrival, the voluntary 
proffer of the country by the Ring and people to 
him, with his own name underneath. He also had 
skilfully set in the plate a current English sixpence, 
on which were impressed the picture and coat of 
arms of her majesty. In this manner he left evi- 
dence of having taken formal possession of the 
place in the name of Queen Elizabeth of England. 



NEW ALBION. 169 

As a token of respect to his own country, and 
also because he had observed on different parts of 
this coast white cliffs similar to those on the coast 
of England, he called all the land he had here seen 
New Albion. 

After remaining in this port thirty-six days, re- 
pairing his ships and cultivating friendly relations 
with the natives, Drake again put to sea. The In- 
dians appear to have parted with him with regret, 
and to have, wished for his speedy return. They 
ran upon the hills, kindled fires, and kept them 
burning all the time that he was in sight. 

After leaving the western coast of North America, 
Drake pursued his voyage, and was the first who 
circumnavigated the globe. 

At a subsequent period, he again visited this coun- 
try. He approached it from the West Indies on the 
eastern side. On the 28th of May, 1586, he dis- 
covered on the coast of Florida a rude scaffold, sup- 
ported on four poles, having the appearance of an 
observatory. As no one on board could give any 
account of its history, he manned his pinnaces and 
went on shore to discover who held it. Passing up 
the River St. Augustine, he came to a fort newly 
erected by the Spaniards, but not quite finished, 
called the Fort of St. Juan de Finos. When the 
Spaniards saw the English approaching, they aban- 
doned the work and fled as rapidly as possible to 
15 



170 COWARDLY SPANIARDS. 

the town of St. Augustine, which contained a gar- 
rison of one hundred and fifty men. The next day 
the English landed, and marched to the fort which 
protected the town, for the purpose of storming it. 
As they approached, they could discover no one there 
to defend it. Perhaps the garrison are concealed, 
in order to throw the English off their guard. Per- 
haps they are in ambush, and will suddenly fire upon 
their flank or rear. The storming party advance 
very cautiously. Not a sword, musket, nor feather 
can they see. They enter the fort ; but no one is 
there. They have all fled. On a platform, con- 
structed of large pine-trees, were fourteen pieces of 
large brass ordnance. But the Spaniards tested the 
calibre of none of them. They fled without firing 
a single ball. Upon examining the place, the attack- 
ing party discovered a Frenchman, a fifer, who had 
been held by the Spaniards a prisoner. He informed 
the English that the Spaniards fled in such haste as 
to leave behind them a chest containing two thou- 
sand pounds in money. The English now pressed 
on to the town. The Spaniards mustered sufficient 
courage to fire a few shot at them, and then, having 
no blood to spare, they ran away. Anthony Powell, 
a sergeant-major, leaping upon one of the horses 
they had left behind, pursued them over ground 
which was covered with long grass. His rashness 
led him too far in advance of his company. A 



ST. AUGUSTINE DESTROYED. 171 

Spaniard who had concealed himself in the grass 
fired at him and shot him through the head, and 
then pierced his body with many wounds. The 
Governor of the place had retired to St. Matheo, 
leaving not a single inhabitant in the town. Drake 
noticed that St. Augustine appeared to be in a pros- 
perous condition. Among other edifices it contained 
a town-house and church, and was ornamented with 
a number of gardens ; but all these pleasant things 
were burnt and laid waste by the English, in revenge 
for the death of Major Powell. 

It was Drake's intention to have visited another 
Spanish settlement, about thirty miles farther on, 
called St. Helena, and to have destroyed that also ; 
but the weather being unfavorable, and the shoals 
dangerous, it was considered advisable to relinquish 
the attempt, especially as he had no pilot who was 
acquainted with the channel. 

Abandoning this design, Sir Francis Drake pro- 
ceeded farther north, in search of Sir Walter Ra- 
leigh's colony, which had recently been planted in 
Virginia. He had received orders from her majesty 
the Queen, before his departure from England, to 
extend to this infant settlement every encouragement 
and assistance in his power. He found the shore 
inaccessible on account of shoals, and was there- 
fore obliged to anchor in an open, exposed situa- 
tion, two miles from land. To Mr. Ralph Lane, 



17*2 raleigh's colony. 

Governor of the colony, who was then at his fort in 
Roanoke, he sent an offer of assistance and supplies. 
The Governor, with some of his men, visited the 
admiral, and requested him to furnish the colony 
with more men and provisions, and also a small 
vessel and boats, so that, if an extremity should 
occur they might be able to return to England. In 
compliance with their request, the admiral immedi- 
ately fitted up one of his ships and bountifully sup- 
plied it with all manner of stores for their use. A 
storm now arose, which drove that ship and some 
others out to sea, and Drake did not see them again 
till his return home. He now proposed to furnish 
another of his ships for their use. But the Governor 
and his colonists, having passed through many hard- 
ships, had become quite disheartened. And now 
that this recent calamity had been visited upon them, 
and the promised stores from England had failed, 
they construed it into an expression of the disappro- 
bation of Providence of their design to establish a 
colony. After mutual consultation among them- 
selves, they requested Sir Francis Drake to remove 
them from the coast and take them home. When 
they landed in Virginia, their number was one hun- 
dred and eight ; it was reduced to one hundred 
and three, all of whom now embarked in the fleet 
of the admiral for England. Mr. Lane, the Gov- 
ernor of tiiis colony, is said to have been the first 



ORIGIN OF TOBACCO. 173 

who introduced tobacco into England as an article 
for use. It derived its name from the Island of 
Tobago, on which it was first found. Sir Walter 
Raleigh accustomed himself to its use, and through 
his example and influence it soon became a fashion- 
able practice at the English court and in the circles 
of the nobility. 

15* 



174 



CHAPTER XIII. 

Captain John Davis. — Great Roaring'. — Its Cause. — Land of 
Desolation. — Band of Music. — Its Effect. — Friendly Alli- 
ance. — Bear-hunting. — Mistake about Dogs. — Davis's Dis- 
coveries. — Amusements. — Change in the Natives. — Ring- 
leader taken. — Interesting Phenomenon. — Game. — Secret 
Attack. — Sun shines twenty-four Hours. — Fat Dogs. — Stag 
Hunt. — The Marquis de la Roche. — Sable Island Sufferers. — 
Captain George Weymouth. — Fresh Water from Icebergs. — 
Effect of Ice upon the Vessel. — Sailors appalled. — They mu- 
tiny. — Weymouth yields. — He sails South. — Finds an Inlet. — 
Nain. — Great Storm. — His Return. — Bartholomew Gosnold. — 
Indians with an European Shallop. — Cape Cod discovered. — 
A perpetual Name. — Elizabeth Island. — A Colony. — Its 
End. — Its Ruins. 

Contemporaneous with Sir Francis Drake was 
another distinguished navigator, who has succeeded 
in impressing his name upon the territory of the 
new world. This was Captain John Davis. Though 
all previous attempts to discover the long-sought-for 
north-west passage to India had proved abortive, yet 
the zeal of the English for adventures in that direc- 
tion was not entirely destroyed. The subject was 
again agitated, and new expeditions were planned. 
A number of enterprising merchants, opulent land 
proprietors, and noblemen of the court formed an 
association for this purpose, and committed the 



A PHENOMENON SOLVED. 175 

execution of it to Captain John Davis. He was 
furnished with two small vessels, one of fifty, the 
other of thirty-five tons, christened with the signifi- 
cant names, the Sunshine and the Moonshine, as if 
expressive of the desire that he might be furnished 
with light, by day and by night, to aid him in making 
the important discovery. 

He left Falmouth, in England, on the loth of 
June, 1585. His course was first to the northward, 
and then to the westward. On the 19th of July, 
when surrounded with a dense fog, and when the 
sea was unusually calm, they were somewhat sur- 
prised to hear a great roaring, as if the ocean in a 
storm was sending its huge waves against a rock- 
bound coast. The lead was immediately thrown 
over, which indicated that the water was three hun- 
dred fathoms deep. The captain put off in a small 
boat to discover the cause of the phenomenon, and 
soon ascertained that it was owing to large numbers of 
icebergs, which were constantly dashing against each 
other. He landed on some of the larger ones, and 
was gratified to find that they tasted fresh. He broke 
off a quantity and carried it to the vessel, which, 
when melted, furnished them with cool fresh water. 
The next clay, the south-western coast of Greenland 
was in sight, which is described as " deformed, 
rocky, and mountainous, like a sugar loaf, standing 
to our sight above the clouds. It towered above 



176 EFFECT OF MUSIC. 

the fog like a white list in the sky, the tops alto- 
gether covered with snow, the shore beset with ice, 
making such irksome noise that it was called the 
land of desolation." It was also observed that the 
water of the ocean here was dark and thick, like a 
stagnant pool. Numerous seals and birds were 
seen, but all attempts to take them were vain. The 
coast was inaccessible, on account of the fields and 
mountains of ice. Davis now sailed to the north- 
west for several days. On one occasion, when the 
weather and the ice permitted, he went on shore 
with two companions. When the shaggy, skin- 
clothed natives discovered them, they set up a loud 
and dismal howling, similar to that of wolves. As 
Davis knew not their character, nor the object of 
their lamentable noise, he gave a signal note to his 
crew on board the vessel, a portion of whom imme- 
diately put off for the shore, accompanied with a 
band of music. They were all armed. When they 
landed, they advanced towards the natives with 
dancing and music, and extended to them every 
manifestation of friendship. The unusual notes of 
a band of European music, amid the ice and snows, 
of their desolate country, awakened the curiosity 
of the half-frozen natives. Ten canoes from the 
neighboring islands made their appearance, but kept 
at a respectful distance. The English continued 
their proffers of friendship, but without success. 



TRAFFIC WITH THE NATIVES. 177 

One of the natives pointed towards the sun, and 
commenced beawhg his breast. John Ellis, master 
of the Moonshine, imitated these gestures. This 
had the desired effect. The natives now approached 
and received from their strange visitors presents of 
gloves, caps, stockings, and toys. The band re- 
galed them with their sweetest notes, and a league 
of friendship was formed. The next day thirty- 
seven canoes came out to the vessels, and earnestly 
invited the men on shore again. Davis accepted 
their invitation. He manned his boats and went on 
land. One of the Indians, not satisfied with simply 
shaking his hand, also kissed it. Confidence being 
established between the two parties, trading com- 
menced. The natives parted with the clothes they 
wore, which were made of seals' skins, birds' skins 
dressed with the feathers on, buskins of leather, and 
also with their darts, paddles, and canoes, for what- 
ever these friendly strangers were disposed to give 
in exchange. They promised to return the next 
day, but failing to do so, Davis sailed across the 
straits which now bear his name, and discovered a 
high mountain which glistened like gold. This was 
Mount Raleigh. The northern promontory of it 
was Dyer's Cape, and the southern was called Cape 
Walsingham, after Sir Francis Walsingham, who 
was then secretary of state. The men here saw 
tliree animals at a distance, which they believed to 



178 BEARS AND DOGS. 

be white goats. Being in want both of sport and 
of fresh meat, they set out in purHit of these harm- 
less animals. To their amazement, they found that, 
instead of goats, they were large white bears ! The 
animals rushed towards them, fearless and furi- 
ous. When they arrived sufficiently near, the men 
levelled their guns and greeted their approach with 
several balls. Not anticipating such a warm recep- 
tion, the bears were glad to retreat ; they were pur- 
sued by the men and killed. They appeared to 
have fed only on grass, yet so corpulent were they 
that large quantities of fat had to be cut away be- 
fore their flesh was fit to be eaten. The next day 
another enormously large one was killed, whose 
paws were fourteen inches in breadth. 

After coasting about for some days without any 
important results, Davis found himself in the neigh- 
borhood of the cape which he first saw when he 
crossed from Greenland, and which he named God's 
Mercy. He doubled this and entered a sound, 
which, after ascending sixty leagues, brought him to 
a number of islands. As he could pass between 
them, his expectation was daily strengthened of 
finding the great object of his search — the north- 
west passage to China. 

On one of these islands he saw some dogs. As 
he supposed they could not be otherwise than wild, 
he fired at them, killing two. To his surprise, he 



DISCOVERIES OF DAVIS. 



179 



found on the neck of one of them a collar, which 
was a part of his harness. Presently he discovered 
the sled to which it had been attached. This 
proved that the island was inhabited. John Rein- 
bold Foster, in his History of Northern Voyages, 
says, " Thus it appears that Davis was the first who 
in later times saw the western coast of Greenland, 
on which Cape Desolation lies. He afterwards dis- 
covered land farther to the westward, on the island 
which he afterwards himself called Cumberland's 
Island. On this island, also, is Mount Raleigh, Tot- 
ness Road, Exeter Sound, Dyer's Cape, and Cape 
Walsingham. The sea between Cumberland's Island 
and the western coast of Greenland was afterwards 
named Davis's Straits ; and as in the sequel all 
the land quite to Button's Islands, on the coast of 
Labrador, was discovered by Davis, Davis's Straits 
were also extended as far as this spot. He likewise 
saw the Cape of God's Mercy, and the straits which 
he also called Cumberland Straits. These, then, 
are Davis's discoveries on his first voyage. 

During this voyage, he also saw large quantities 
of the black stone and other rocks which glistened 
like gold, and which Sir Martin Frobisher had taken 
home for gold ore. It attracted no attention now ; 
its worthlcssness was known. He returned to Eng- 
land on the 38th of September. 

On the 7th of May, 1586, Davis left Dartmouth, 



180 FRIENDS TURN THIEVES. 

England, on his second voyage. His fleet, this time, 
consisted of the Sunshine, the Moonshine, the Mer- 
maid, and one other small vessel. They had a stormy 
passage to Greenland. They entered a harbor on the 
western side called then Gilbert's Sound, but now 
known as God Haab, or Good Hope. Their inter- 
views with the natives were at first of the most friendly 
character. The two parties entered into the amuse- 
ments of leaping and wrestling with great good 
humor. At leaping the English beat, but in wres- 
tling the natives were the victors. It was not 
long, however, before they exhibited other qualities. 
They practised what Davis regarded as solemn in- 
cantations. At one time they kindled a fire by the 
friction occasioned by the rubbing of two sticks 
together, and then requested him to pass through it. 
Instead of complying, he gave the strongest expres- 
sion of contempt of their ceremony in his power. 
He caused the fire to be trodden out, and the black- 
ened brands to be cast into the sea. 

The natives now developed a strong thievish pro- 
pensity. They stole every thing they could without 
detection. Not satisfied with this, they destroyed 
what they could not carry away. Davis fired two 
pieces at them, which " did sore amaze them." 
They were not cured, however, of their insulting 
disposition. Some days afterwards, five came with 
proposals of friendship. One of them was the 



GAME AND FISH. 181 

ringleader in all the mischief. Davis made him a 
captive, and carried him away. 

On one occasion, when the men were gathering 
muscles for supper, Davis was furnished with a view 
of a magnificent waterspout. Two currents of air 
meeting created a whirlwind, which, operating upon 
the waves as a whirlwind does upon the dust, created 
a waterspout, and kept it whirling about for three 
hours in succession. It was an object of great in- 
terest. Had it reached the vessel, it would probably 
have torn it to pieces. 

The cold being intense, the rigging coated so 
thickly with ice, and the men being determined to 
proceed no farther north, Davis directed his eourse 
south. He found a number of islands, which were 
crowded with immense flocks of gulls and seamews. 
The water seemed to be equally abundant with fish. 
In the course of an hour, which was measured by a 
glass, they caught a hundred large cod. 

The coast of Labrador was found to be covered 
with forests of fir, pine, yew, and birch. They also 
saw a black bear, pheasants, barbary hens, par- 
tridges, wild geese, ducks, blackbirds, jays, thrushes, 
and various other small birds. Some of these they 
killed. 

Some fish having been left by them in a certain 
place, five of the men were sent ashore to get 
them. They were fired upon by some Indians who 
16 



182 DAVIS'S THIRD VOYAGE. 

were lurking in the woods, and four of the men 
wounded, two of whom died. The vessels ap- 
proached the shore, fired upon the savages, and scat- 
tered them. Subsequent to this Davis experienced 
two violent storms. He then returned. He made no 
advance towards the great object of his voyage, 
namely, the discovery of the north-west passage, 
though his expedition was important in other re- 
spects. It is difficult to tell with precision what 
places he visited, because his own descriptions are 
so indefinite. 

So unsuccessful were his two voyages that he ex- 
perienced great difficulty in obtaining the means for 
another. Merchants were unwilling to risk their 
property in an enterprise which, to all appearance, 
would prove a total loss. Davis, however, succeeded 
in convincing certain individuals that the expenses 
of another expedition might be defrayed by fisheries 
on the northern coast of America. Accordingly, he 
once more had committed to him three ships. He 
reached the coast of West Greenland on the 16th 
of June, 15S7. Davis here ordered two of his 
vessels to engage in fishing whilst he pursued his 
discoveries. When he arrived opposite Disko Road, 
he saw large numbers of whales. The inhabitants 
came off, in their small boats, for purposes of trade. 
On the 30th of June, in latitude seventy-two degrees, 
twelve minutes, the sun was visible above the horizon 



A LONG DAY. 183 

the whole twenty-four hours. Davis called the 
place Hope Sanderson, after Mr. William Sander- 
son, who had contributed largely towards the expe- 
dition. From there he crossed the straits to Mount 
Raleigh, or Cumberland Island. He entered Cum- 
berland Straits, and sailed up one hundred and 
eighty miles to a cluster of islands. A whale passed 
them, going to the west. The needle here varied 
thirty degrees west. As they retraced their course 
they were becalmed, and the weather became ex- 
cessively hot. The men who went on shore saw 
graves, and found a place where train oil had been 
spilt. Dogs were seen so fat as to be scarcely 
able to run. Having reached the open sea, he dis- 
covered an inlet, which he named, after my Lord 
Lumley, Lumley's Inlet. On the 31st of July he 
saw a promontory, which he called Warwick's 
Foreland. He also discovered an island, which, 
after Lord Darcy, he called Darcy's Island. On the 
top of it they found some stags. The men went in 
pursuit of them, and after chasing them three times 
round the island, they leaped into the water and 
swam to another island eight or nine miles distant. 
One of them was as large as a cow, with large feet, 
and very fat. 

Davis now returned to the place where he had 
ordered the other ships to meet him. But not find- 
ing them there, he was disappointed and offended, 



184 MARQUIS DE LA ROCHE. 

and returned immediately home, where he found 
the missing vessels. 

In the year 1598, the Marquis de la Roche, a 
Breton gentleman, obtained a patent from the King 
conferring upon him the same powers which had 
been granted to Roberval. He sailed in an armed 
vessel for Nova Scotia the same year. He took out 
with him a company of miserable convicts, drawn 
from the prisons of France, with which to plant a 
colony. He landed forty of these on the Isle of 
Sable, situated nearly a hundred miles from Nova 
Scotia. Whether he ever reached the continent is 
unknown, but he returned to France, leaving these 
unfortunate criminals upon this island to drag out a 
lingering, wretched existence. It was a fate more 
dreadful to many of them than the original penalty 
of their crimes. After enduring seven years of ex- 
treme suffering, during which twenty-eight of their 
number died, an expedition was sent to their relief, 
who brought away the remaining twelve. They 
were reduced to abject wretchedness. In appear- 
ance, they were the most miserable specimens of 
humanity ever seen. So great had become the 
public interest in them that the King ordered them 
to be brought into his presence in the same condi- 
tion in which they were found. They presented 
a truly affecting sight. So great had been their 
sufferings upon that island, whilst exposed to the 



captain weymouth's expedition. 185 

inclemencies of a severe climate, that they were 
regarded as more than an equivalent to the penalties 
which their offences had incurred. They were, 
therefore, pardoned of their crimes. Money was 
given to them, and the furs which they had collected 
during their residence there, but which had been 
unlawfully taken from them by the captain who had 
brought them home, were restored to them. 

The Marquis de la Roche, who had been guilty 
of this inhumanity, being harassed by persecutions, 
perplexed with vexations, and ruined by the failure 
of the enterprise, died wretchedly of a broken 
heart. 

After the third failure of Davis to discover the 
north-west passage, two events occurred which pro- 
duced a disheartening effect upon the spirit of 
marine discovery : the first was the death of Secre- 
tary Walsingham, and the other was the invasion of 
England by the Spanish self-styled and misnamed 
Invincible Armada, preparation for the reception of 
which engrossed the whole attention and energies 
of the English nation. 

In 1602, efforts were resumed, under the combined 
auspices of the Muscovy Company and the Levant 
Company. They deputed Captain George Wey- 
mouth, with two fly-boats, one of sixty and the 
other of seventy tons, called the Discovery and the 
Godspeed, to make one more attempt. He departed 
16* 



186 ICED VESSELS. 

from London on the 2d day of May, and on the 18th 
of June he arrived off the coast of Greenland. 
Here he observed the same peculiarity in the water 
which Captain John Davis had described. It was 
" thick as puddle," occasioned perhaps by number- 
less animalcule. On the 28th, he came in sight of 
America. The bald head of a conspicuous promon- 
tory presented itself to view, covered with snow, 
which he concluded was Warwick's Foreland. He 
here had a narrow escape from being wrecked. So 
strong were the currents, so violent the sea, and so 
dense the fog, that he had almost run upon an ice- 
berg before it was discovered. As their water was 
brackish and nearly exhausted, the crew landed upon 
it and loaded their boat with cakes of ice, which 
furnished them with a very agreeable drink. 

As a loud and continuous roaring, like the break- 
ing of the surf upon the shore, was heard, the men 
made towards it, and found it was produced by the 
rolling in and dashing of the waves upon the icy 
barrier of the coast. So dense was the mist that it 
was impossible to see but a very short distance in 
any direction. Prudence dictated the order of the 
captain to take in the sails ; but when the men made 
the attempt, they were horror-struck to find them so 
frozen as to be unmanageable. The next day they 
renewed the attempt; but so large had the ropes 
become by the accumulation of ice upon them, that 



A MUTINY. 187 

they could not be worked until large quantities of 
the ice were cut away. The day following, matters 
were still worse. Though it was midsummer, ropes, 
sails, rigging, every thing on which the mist and 
the spray settled, was thickly incrusted with ice and 
rendered immovable. The Godspeed and the Dis- 
covery were tossed about by the billows as if they 
were vessels of glass. The sailors were appalled. 
If this is the climate of summer, who can conceive 
the severities of winter 1 If the suns of July can- 
not prevent the formation of vast masses of ice, 
what may be expected in December ? A conspiracy 
was formed among the men, and they resolved to 
leave this climate, where the atmosphere was filled 
with snow, and the water with mountains of ice, 
and bear away to England. Their plan was, to 
seize the captain and confine him until they obtained 
his consent. Before they commenced the execution 
of their iniquitous scheme, Weymouth obtained in- 
formation of what was in progress, and immediately 
called the men to an account. Without the least 
exhibition of timidity, they manfully justified their 
conduct by what appeared to them sufficiently co- 
gent reasons. Their defence was, that, if they be- 
came frozen up in that unknown and dangerous sea, 
their destruction was highly probable, or, if they 
survived the sufferings and horrors of an arctic 
winter, they could not recommence their explorations 



188 STRAIT DISCOVERED. 

next year earlier than May ; whereas, if they set out 
at once for England, they would be able to return 
here by that time, besides escaping the severities of 
the climate and enjoying a visit to their friends. 
The captain went below to consider the subject. 
The men remained firm in their determination, and 
as soon as the captain was out of sight they directed 
the course of the vessel towards England. Wey- 
mouth was soon informed of what had occurred, 
and hastening on deck, and finding the vessel sailing 
in a direction different from his orders, he inquired 
by whose authority it was done ; the answer was, 
by " one and all." Finding the conspiracy general 
among the men, the captain deemed it the part of 
prudence to yield, at least for the present, though at 
a subsequent period he brought the ringleaders to 
punishment. 

As the men expressed a willingness to prosecute 
discoveries any where to the south, even at the risk 
of their lives, Weymouth, rather than return prema- 
turely to England, directed his course to the south- 
ward. Finding an inlet, he entered it, and pene- 
trated to the south-west a hundred leagues ; but the 
fog being thick, gales severe, and the winter ap- 
proaching, he was compelled to return to the open 
sea. The discovery of this inlet awakened hopes 
of the ultimate success of his enterprise. It seemed 
to present the most feasible course to the long- 



A HURRICANE. 189 

looked-for north-west passage. This is believed to 
have been the principal entrance to Hudson's Bay. 
In latitude fifty-five he found land, with islands and 
harbors favorable for a settlement, probably the place 
where the indefatigable and fearless Moravians af- 
terwards established a missionary station and called 
it Nain. 

Though Weymouth had now regained the open 
sea, he had not escaped from danger. A violent 
hurricane came down upon him from the west, 
which threatened to tear the vessels in pieces and 
strew the ocean with their wrecks. The water was 
agitated in the most violent manner. The ships 
were driven on with the speed of the wind, but for- 
tunately it blew off the shore, otherwise nothing 
could have saved them. They soon afterwards re- 
turned home. 

The same year that Captain Weymouth was 
endeavoring to find a passage to the sultry clime of 
India, by ploughing through the ice and snows of the 
arctic regions, another bold adventurer was creeping 
along the less bleak, but perhaps not less rock- 
bound, coast of New England, to find a desirable 
location for a colony. This was Bartholomew Gos- 
nold. The route pursued by this navigator was dif- 
ferent from that which was usually taken by visitors 
to the new world. Instead of sailing to the Cana- 
ries, or touching at the Bermudas or the West Indies, 



190 DISCOVERY OF CAPE COD. 

he steered, as nearly as the winds would allow, 
due west. He is distinguished as being the first 
Englishman who came to this part of the country 
by a direct course across the Atlantic, by which the 
distance was shortened some five hundred leagues. 

On the 14th of May, he discovered land in the 
forty-third degree of latitude, somewhere near where 
Portsmouth now stands. Presently a shallop was 
seen making towards them, with sails. As it was 
not usual for the Indians to use sail boats, Gosnold 
was at first at a loss to know whether the boat was 
manned with natives or with Europeans. His sus- 
pense was not of long duration. As the craft ap- 
proached, he perceived that it contained Indians. 
After exchanging professions of peace and friend- 
ship, the savages came on board and engaged in 
traffic. The shallop, so different from the canoes 
which were in common use among them, was prob- 
ably some fishing vessel which had been driven 
ashore and abandoned. In managing it, the Indians 
used both sails and oars. Directing his course 
south, Gosnold discovered an arm of the main land 
projecting far into the ocean, with a singular, con- 
tinuous, scroll-like bend. He found at its termina- 
tion a convenient and safe harbor, but so circui- 
tous was the course to reach it, in consequence of 
the bending of the cape, that in entering it he sailed 
to nearly all points of the compass. Near this place 



A NAME UNCHANGED. 191 

Gosnold's crew caught large numbers of cod. One 
of the company, in a journal which he kept, says, 
" In five or six hours we pestered our ships so with 
codfish that we threw numbers of them overboard 
again." From this circumstance he named it Cape 
Cod. Since then it has received various other ap- 
pellations. By the Dutch, in 1659, it was called 
Staaten Hoeck, or State Point, and Witte Hoeclc, or 
White Point, perhaps from the white sand hills with 
which it was covered. For the same reason the 
French named it Cap Blanc, or White Cape. 
Charles, Prince of Wales, ordered it to be called, 
in honor of his father, Cape James. It retained, 
however, none of these appellations. The old, 
original, significant name of Cape Cod, given to it 
by Gosnold, it bears still, " a name," says Cotton 
Mather, " I suppose it will never lose, till shoals of 
codfish be seen swimming on its highest hills." 

Gosnold coasted southerly, and on the next day 
after leaving the cape he attempted to double another 
point of land, when he suddenly found himself in 
shoal water, where he was in danger of getting 
aground. No little care was required to extricate 
himself from his unexpected peril, from which cir- 
cumstance he named the place Point Care. This is 
supposed to have been the southern point of the 
cape, which forms the elbow, and is now called 
Cape Malabar. Whilst here he was visited by the 



192 gosnold's discoveries. 

natives. Passing on farther, they came to an island, 
which they named Martha's Vineyard. Dr. Holmes, 
in his American Annals, says, " This was not the 
island that now bears that name, but a small island 
now called Noman's Land." But as this is situated 
a short distance to the south-west of the island now 
known as Martha's Vineyard, it is probable that he 
also saw this latter, as he must have passed it in his 
course. He also discovered Gay Head, to which he 
gave the name of Dover Cliff. The next day he 
entered a large bay, which received the name of 
Gosnold's Hope, but is now known as Buzzard's 
Bay. About twelve miles to the south was an island 
called, by the Indians, Cuttyhunk ; it was one of a 
cluster which Gosnold christened Elizabeth Island, 
in honor of his Queen. This name, like Cape Cod, 
has proved to be permanent. A little to the north 
were two small elevations, which they called Hill's 
Hap, and Hap's Hill. 

As Gosnold had visited the country for the pur- 
pose of founding a colony, he was constantly on the 
lookout for a suitable location. After an examina- 
tion of the place, it was agreed, upon mutual con- 
sultation, to make the attempt upon the western part 
of Elizabeth Island. This island was found to con- 
tain a large pond of fresh water, having in its cen- 
tre a small rocky islet. They here commenced 
the erection of a fort and storehouse, which they 



gosnold's colony. 193 

finished in nineteen days. Whilst the men were en- 
gaged in building, Gosnold crossed the bay to the 
main land, and opened a traffic with the natives ; 
he also discovered the mouths of two rivers — one 
in the vicinity of Hap's Hill, and another on which 
New Bedford now stands, called, by the Indians, 
Acushnet. He was absent five days. This colony 
was never established. Difficulties and dissatisfac- 
tion arose among those who were to have consti- 
tuted it. On this account it was agreed, after con- 
sultation among the parties, to abandon the project 
and return to England. This ephemeral settlement 
of Gosnold's was sometimes called Old Plymouth, 
whilst that commenced in 1620, in Massachusetts 
Bay, was known for a time as New Plymouth, evi- 
dently to distinguish it from the first. 

In 1797, several gentlemen, one of whom was the 
Rev. Dr. Belknap, visited Elizabeth Island, for the 
purpose of examining the ruins, if there were any, 
of Gosnold's buildings. They had the satisfaction 
of finding the cellar of the storehouse, which they 
noticed was built of stones taken from the beach, as 
the rocks of the island were less available, being in 
solid ledges. The ruins had then lasted a hundred 
and ninety-five years. 
17 



194 



CHAPTER XIV. 

Dutch Enterprise. — Henry Hudson. — Arrives at Sandy Hook. — 
Horseshoe Harbor. — Sounding's. — Coney Island. — Produc- 
tions. — Visitors. — Indian Alliance. — Mr. Heckeweldcr. — In- 
teresting 1 Tradition. — The long House. — How it was short- 
ened. — The Conduct of the Natives. — The Crew land. — What 
they saw. — Hudson suspicious. — Unfortunate Adventure. — 
A gloomy Night. — A sad Spectacle. — The Burial. — Cole- 
man's Point. — Precautionary Measures. — More Visitors. — In- 
dian Stratagem. — Indians captured. — One escapes. — Red 
Coats. — Discovers a great River. — Its Names. — Show of 
Love. — Want of Confidence. 

Not long after the abandonment of this enter- 
prise by Gosnold, we find the Dutch engaged in ex- 
plorations, and in attempts to open trade with the 
aborigines of North America. In their employ was 
an Englishman, whose name was Henry Hudson, 
one of " the few whose names were not born to die." 
He was a gentleman of intelligence, of great physi- 
cal and moral courage, and possessed of no small 
share of fortitude — an essential qualification for 
one who aspires to the honors of geographical dis- 
covery. 

On the 3d of September, 1609, Hudson, in a ves- 
sel called the Half Moon, arrived at Sandy Hook, 
and came to anchor. As a precautionary measure, 



Hudson's first landing. 195 

he sent bis small boat abead, to sound and ascertain 
the depth of the water. Being satisfied that the 
movement would be safe, he advanced the next 
morning farther in the bay, and anchored in Horse- 
shoe Harbor. In a journal which was kept on 
board his vessel is the following entry at that date : 
" At three o'clock in the afternoon we came to three 
great rivers. So we stood along to the northern- 
most, thinking to have gone into it ; but we found 
it to have a very shoal bar before it, for we had but 
ten foot water. Then we cast about to the south- 
ward, and found two fathoms, three fathoms, and 
three and a quarter, till wc came to the southern 
side of them ; then we had five and six fathoms, and 
anchored. So we sent in our boat to sound, and 
they found no less water than four, five, six, and 
seven fathoms, and returned in an hour and a half. 
So we weighed and went in, and rode in five fath- 
oms, oozy ground, and saw many salmons, and mul- 
lets, and rays very great." Some of his men being- 
sent on shore with a net, caught ten large mullets, 
eighteen inches long, and a ray so heavy as required 
four men to get it on board the ship. 

It would be gratifying if we could designate the 
precise spot where Hudson first stepped upon the 
shore ; but this is now impossible. The nearest ap- 
proximation that we can make is based upon a tra- 
dition that the first landing-place was Coney Island, 



196 INDIAN LEAGUE. 

opposite Gravesend, Long Island. Though the soil 
appeared to be unpromising, consisting chiefly of 
white sand, yet they were delighted to find large 
numbers of plum-trees, loaded with fruit, and grape 
vines hanging in graceful festoons among their 
branches. Various kinds of birds darting about in 
different directions, added another element of life 
and beauty to the scene. 

It was not long before the curiosity of the natives 
prompted them to visit these strangers who had 
come to them in a mysterious floating-house. At 
that time, among the various tribes of Indians who 
occupied the present precincts of the Empire State 
and its vicinity, were Mohawks, Delawares, Manhat- 
tans, Algonquins, and various other tribes, each of 
whom had their own territories, or hunting and fish- 
ing grounds. Extensive confederacies were formed 
among some of these native tribes. There was the 
league of the Iroquois, which, in their highly figura- 
tive language, they represented under the image of 
a house, the Mohawks being the eastern, and the Sen- 
ecas the western door. They were distinguished 
both for political sagacity and warlike bravery. 
They conquered, or, to use their own language, they 
put petticoats on the Delawares — reduced them to 
the weakness of women. This league, which was 
sometimes called the Six Nations, embraced the 
Mohawks, the Oneidas, the Onondagoes, the Senecas, 



INDIAN TRADITION. 197 

the Cayugas, and, at a later period, the Tuscaro- 
ras. The Delawares, also, were very numerous and 
powerful. They extended over the whole country 
from York Island to the Potomac. They were tra- 
ditionally the fathers of many other tribes. Rev. 
Mr. Heckewelder, who labored as a Moravian mis- 
sionary among the Indians at a more recent period, 
and who became acquainted with what knowledge 
they possessed themselves of their own origin, says 
that the best information which he could obtain he 
received from an aged and intelligent man of the 
Mohegan tribe, whose grandfather had been a dis- 
tinguished chief. This Indian informed him that, 
when he was a boy, his old grandfather used to talk 
much about the early history of the nation, and, 
among other things, said that the towns and settle- 
ments of the Mohegans extended from Tuphanne, 
which means in the Delaware tongue Cold Stream, 
and from which the whites derive the name Tappan, 
to the head of tide water up the river, where was 
their uppermost town. He also mentioned the 
names of several tribes who occupied the country 
now known as New England, and said they were 
all united together as one, and assisted their 
" grandfather," the Delawares, against their com- 
mon enemies. " Our grandfather," (the Dela- 
wares.) said he, " owned and inhabited all the 
country from the extent of tide water above Gash- 
17* 



198 THE LONG HOUSE. 

tenick (now called Albany) to the extent of tide 
water in a river far to the south, where a place 
was called Pate-ham-mock, (now Potomac.) Clear 
across this extent of country, from Albany to the 
Potomac, our grandfather had a long house, with a 
door at each end, one door being at the Potomac 
and the other at Albany, which doors were always 
open to all the nations united with them. To this 
house the nations from ever so far off used to 
resort, and smoke the pipe of peace with their 
grandfather. The white people coming from over 
the great water unfortunately landed at each end of 
this long house of our grandfather's, and it was 
not long before they began to pull the same down 
at both ends. Our grandfather still kept repairing 
the same, though obliged to make it, from time to 
time, shorter, until the white people, who had by 
this time grown very powerful, assisted the common 
enemy, the Maqua, in erecting a strong house on 
the ruins of their grandfather's." This ingenious 
figurative statement corresponds with the traditions 
of the Delawares themselves. This allegory teaches 
that the Delawares were the head or chief of 
many nations. Their territory embraced all the 
country between the Potomac and the head of tide 
water on the North, or Hudson River. All tribes 
and nations, except the Mingoes and their allies, 
were welcome amomr them. To use their own 



NEW YORK INDIANS. 199 

expressive language, "the united nations had one 
house, one fire, and one canoe." But the Euro- 
peans arrived and took possession of the Hudson 
and the Potomac. That was the commencement 
of the pulling down of the " long house " at each 
end. Still the Delawares maintained their national 
character until the Europeans united with the Min- 
goes and deprived them of their lands. 

The islands, the bays, and the rivers in the neigh- 
borhood of New York were inhabited by some of 
these various tribes. Hence, when Hudson made 
his appearance, like a messenger from another 
world, he was soon visited by the " red men of the 
forest" from the Jersey shore. They not only 
sailed fearlessly around his vessel, but, in the sim- 
plicity of unsuspecting confidence, they went on 
board, and appeared to be greatly pleased with their 
pale-faced, visitors. They brought with them a 
quantity of green tobacco, which they exchanged for 
other articles. Their costume displayed no great 
skill in manufactures and no great taste in style. 
It consisted of deer-skins, well dressed, and hanging 
loosely upon their persons. They expressed a wish 
for European clothes, and behaved with great civil- 
ity. They were found to possess yellow copper, and 
large quantities of maize, or Indian corn. 

The next day some of the crew went on shore 
again, and saw large numbers of men, women, and 



200 FRIENDLY VISITORS. 

children, who, instead of being timid and fleeing 
from them, boldly surrounded them and made them 
presents of tobacco. They found the land well 
covered with woods, and here and there 'bushes of 
currants, ladened with fruit. Many of the natives, 
being encouraged by the kind treatment which the 
others had received, came on board the vessel. 
These were arrayed in more showy garments than 
the first, some of them wearing various kinds of 
soft furs, and others beautiful mantles of graceful 
feathers, which, as they contrasted with the reddish- 
brown of their own complexion, produced a highly 
picturesque effect. Some of the women brought 
with them hemp. They had red copper tobacco 
pipes and ornaments of copper suspended from their 
necks. Towards evening they returned to land. 
Although these visitors gave every indication of 
sincere friendliness, Hudson was not disposed to 
trust them too implicitly. An event soon occurred 
which showed the necessity of vigilance. On the 
morning of the 6th of September, the weather 
being fair, John Coleman and four others were sent 
out to make discoveries of what appeared to be, at 
a distance of twelve miles, an extensive river. As 
they passed along through the narrows, they kept 
their lead going, and ascertained the depth of the 
water at various points. Some of the time their 
lead would sink but two fathoms, but at the north 



AN ATTACK. 201 

of the river it ran out eighteen and twenty fathoms, 
showing that it was a safe place for ships. The 
lands which they passed they describe as covered 
with grass, ornamented with flowers, and studded 
with trees, filling the air with a sweet perfume. 
They passed into the present Bay of New York 
about six miles, and then turned back. On their 
return they were met by a party of Indians in two 
long canoes, one containing twelve and the other 
fourteen men. A fight took place between them, 
the Indians being the aggressors. Night soon came 
on, and rain beginning to fall, extinguished their 
match, so that they could not discharge their piece. 
In this conflict John Coleman was killed by an 
arrow-shot in the throat, and two others were 
wounded. The night was so dark that the men 
could not find their way back to the ship. They 
were therefore obliged to be at their oars, rowing 
hither and thither all night, carrying with them the 
wounded and the dead. As soon as it was light 
enough for them to see, they made for the vessel. 
It was a mournful sight when they ascended the 
deck of the Half Moon, bearing with them the dead 
body of Coleman, who the clay before had left in 
fine health and spirits, and when the others exposed 
their wounds, which, for aught that was known to 
the contrary, were made with poisoned arrows, and 
would before long result in death. The unfor- 



202 STRATAGEM DETECTED. 

tunate Coleman was taken on shore and buried upon 
a point of land, supposed to be Sandy Hook, but to 
which they gave the name of Coleman's Point. 
Hudson now increased his means of defence. He 
raised his small boat on board and built a temporary 
bulwark*, behind which the men might be protected 
if they were again attacked. It was expected that 
this act of hostility would have interrupted the 
friendly relations between the ship and the shore ; 
but the second day after Coleman's death the na- 
tives came on board the same as before, and ap- 
peared to be unacquainted with the sad event which 
had taken place. They brought tobacco and Indian 
wheat, in order to exchange them for knives and 
beads. Nothing of an unfriendly nature was detected 
in their conduct. But on the morning of the 9th 
two large canoes, full of men, were seen to leave the 
shore. Dipping their light, short paddles gracefully 
in the water, they soon attained a rapid motion. 
Their course was direct towards the ship. Are their 
intentions amicable, or warlike ? As they approached 
nearer, one of them was seen to be filled with armed 
Indians. Their bows and arrows presented a very 
threatening aspect. The men who were in the 
other pretended to have come for purposes of trade, 
when their real object was to betray them and get 
possession of the vessel. Hudson was not to be de- 
ceived. He at once discovered their object. He 



A GREAT DISCOVERY. 203 

therefore allowed but two of the Indians to come on 
board, and obliged the others to keep at a distance, 
who soon returned to land. Presently another 
canoe visited them, with only two in it. One of 
these he allowed to come on board, with the inten- 
tion of keeping him. But this wild rover of the 
forest had no idea of having his liberty restricted to 
the narrow limits of the deck of a vessel ; he 
seized the first opportunity that presented itself, and 
leaped overboard. The other two who remained 
prisoners Hudson clothed in dashy red coats. That 
night he spent in the channel of the Narrows. The 
next day he went farther into the bay, and on the 
11th he entered the mouth of a large and beautiful 
river, between the Island of Manhattan and Hobo- 
ken, which, from the circumstance of his being the 
discoverer, has ever since been called the Hudson. 
It did not, however, receive this name by his author- 
ity. He called it the Great River. It was also 
very early denominated Riviere des 3Iontagnes, or 
River of the Mountains, in consequence of the high- 
lands or mountains through which it flowed. By 
the New Englanders it was subsequently called the 
Mohegan River, because a tribe of that name inhab- 
ited its banks. By the Mohegans themselves it was 
denominated the Mahakaneghtuc. By the Iroquois 
it was known as the Cohohatatea, and among the 
Wiccapee Indians of the Highlands as the Shate- 



204 SHOW OF LOVE. 

muc. At the present time it is also, especially by 
the citizens of New York, frequently called the 
North River, whilst the narrow outlet of Long 
Island Sound, on the opposite side of the city, is 
denominated the East River. 

Soon after the Half Moon came to anchor, the 
natives came on board, probably different tribes 
from those who visited them at the Narrows. They 
made a "show of love," left a present of tobacco 
and Indian wheat, and departed. Hudson, how- 
ever, placed no confidence in their professions of 
friendship. 



205 



CHAPTER XV. 

Suspicious Visitors. — Hudson's Progress. — The Highlands. — 
Thick Fog. — Effect of its Disappearance. — The two Captives 
again. — Catskill Mountains. — Loving People. — Cause of bad 
Luck. — Trade. — Hudson. — Shoals. — Adventures of the 
Mate. — Proof of Friendship. — Feeling the Way. — Hudson 
intoxicates the Indians. — Modest Wife. — Drunken Chief. — 
Effect upon the People. — Wampum. — The Chief recovers. — 
Thank Offering. 

On the morning of the next day the water around 
the ship was covered with canoes of different sizes, 
which were restlessly paddling about in various 
directions. They were filled with men, women, 
and children, and were evidently there for an evil 
purpose. Hudson allowed none of them to come 
on board, although he purchased of them a supply 
of oysters and beans. They had large tobacco 
pipes of yellow copper, and earthen pots for cook- 
ing purposes. 

Hudson had now fairly entered upon the explora- 
tion of this noble river. Whither it would lead 
him, or what would be the extent or nature of his 
discoveries, of course he knew not. As the great 
object of his voyage was to find a north-west passage 
to China, he may perhaps have been cheered by the 
18 



206 ASCENDS THE RIVER. 

hope that he was now on the right track to that 
splendid discovery. 

The next day he ascended four miles farther. 
He seems to have been borne onward more by the 
tide than the wind. Four canoes came off from the 
shore to the ship, but none of the men were allowed 
to come aboard. They had large quantities of oys- 
ters, which they sold for a few trifles. When the 
afternoon tide came in, he weighed anchor and 
floated up about eight miles farther, in the neighbor- 
hood of Phillipsburg or Yonkers, where he passed 
the night. On the 14th he proceeded, according to 
Moulton, through Tappan and Haverstraw Bay, 
passed between Stoney and Verplanck's Point, left 
behind him Peekskill, and ascended as far as West 
Point, where he passed the night. The journal 
states that a portion of the river through which 
they passed was a mile wide, and " very high land 
on both sides ; " and at the place where they an- 
chored "the land grew very high and mountainous. 
The river is full of fish." On the morning of the 
15th the mountains and the river were found to be 
covered with a thick fog, which effectually shut out 
from view the surrounding scenery. But when the 
warm rays of the sun were poured down upon it, 
the mist was gradually dispersed, until the lofty 
highlands stood forth in all their magnificence, and 
the river was seen winding around their base in 



THE CAPTIVES ESCAPE. 207 

quiet beauty, half concealed by the dark shadows 
of the mountains. The two Indians whom they 
took on board at the mouth of the river and clothed 
in showy red coats had been exceedingly impatient. 
They were totally averse to this involuntary impris- 
onment in the floating-house, and wanted to be re- 
leased. As Hudson was not disposed to^give them 
their liberty, they took occasion this morning to leap 
from one of the portholes into the water and swim 
ashore. After Hudson had weighed anchor and was 
under sail, these two Indians called after him in a 
contemptuous manner, and indulged in various in- 
sulting gesticulations. It will be found hereafter 
that, not satisfied with this scornful conduct, they 
sought another mode to revenge themselves upon 
their captors. At night, the Half Moon came to 
other mountains, which are supposed to be the Cats- 
kill, and the height of which is nearly four thou- 
sand feet above tide water. "There," says the 
journal, " we found very loving people and very old 
men, where we were well used. Our boat went to 
fish, and caught great store of very good fish." The 
next day being cloudless, gave the sun a fair chance 
to pour down his burning rays. It was oppressively 
warm. The men went a fishing, but met with poor 
success ; the reason of which was, according to 
their own belief, that the Indians had been there 
with their canoes all the preceding night. A number 



208 CITY OF HUDSON. 

of the natives came aboard, bringing Indian corn, 
"pompions," and tobacco, which they readily ex- 
changed for a few trifles. Part of the time the 
men were employed in replenishing the casks with 
fresh water. 

This was near where a city of over ten thousand 
inhabitants now stands, and which is called, after 
the intrepid navigator who here paused to replenish 
his Half Moon with water, the city of Hudson. 

Early the next morning they weighed anchor and 
sailed up about twenty miles, and found shoals in 
the middle of the river, with a channel on each 
side. Some small islands were there. In endeav- 
oring to avoid these shoals, the Half Moon grounded 
on the shore. They warped her off*, but before long 
she ran upon the shoals in the river. When the 
tide rose she got afloat and passed out of danger. 
On the 18th, one of the prominent Indian saga- 
mores, who is called in the journal the Governor of 
that country, took Hudson's chief mate to his house 
and " made him good cheer." This is probably the 
same visit to which De Laet refers, when giving an 
account of Hudson's reception in latitude forty-two 
degrees, fifteen minutes. He states that he went on 
shore with an old Indian, who was chief of forty 
men and seventeen women. He was escorted to a 
house made of bark, exceedingly smooth, and well 
finished in every part. Here was an abundance of 



INDIAN HOSPITALITY. 209 

corn and beans. On the outside of the house 
there were quantities of these articles, sufficient to 
fill three ships, besides more that were in the fields. 
When he arrived at the house, two mats were spread 
upon the floor to sit on. Food was then brought 
in red wooden bowls, which exhibited considerable 
skill in their manufacture. The old chief sent off 
two of his men, with their bows and arrows, who 
returned in a short time, bringing with them two 
pigeons. Not satisfied with providing this fare, they 
killed a fine fat dog, and skinned it with shells, for 
want of better implements. They had expected 
that Hudson would remain with them all night ; but 
when they found him determined to return to his 
vessel, they imagined that it proceeded from his 
fear of their bows and arrows. To convince him 
of their sincere friendliness, they broke their bows 
and arrows to pieces before his eyes, and threw 
them into the fire. This was certainly a strong 
expression of good will, as it must have cost them 
much labor to make their weapons, without knives 
or other convenient tools. Moulton says that these 
Indians were the Wabingi, or the Mohawks. This 
must have been somewhere near Castleton. 

.On the 19th, at about eleven o'clock, A. M., he 

sailed up six miles farther, and anchored in eight 

fathoms water. He was here visited by many of 

the natives, who brought on board grapes, pumpkins, 

18* 



210 RUM AND INDIANS. 

beaver and other skins, which they exchanged for 
beads, knives, and hatchets. The next day Hudson 
sent his mate with four men, in a small boat, to 
sound the river above. They returned in the even- 
ing, and reported that two leagues farther up the 
channel was very narrow, and the water only two 
fathoms deep. But above that, the river increased 
in depth to seven or eight fathoms. The next day, 
as the weather was fair and the wind south, Hud- 
son desired to push his little craft still farther up, 
but was prevented by the great number of Indians 
who came on board. He sent his carpenter on 
shore to get timber and make a fore-yard. 

There can be no doubt that, notwithstanding Hud- 
son's familiarity with the Indians, and his permis- 
sion for them to come on board his vessel in con- 
siderable numbers, he had not full confidence in the 
sincerity of their professed friendship. He was con- 
stantly distrustful. He therefore resorted to a sin- 
gular expedient to detect, if possible, their treachery, 
if any existed. He and his mate invited some of 
the Indian chiefs into the cabin, and then treated 
them freely to wine and " aqua vitce" that is, ardent 
spirits. Their design probably was to intoxicate 
them, so that they might in some way unwittingly 
disclose their evil intentions. In a short time the 
liquor took effect, and they all became very merry. 
One of them had his wife with him, who conducted 



DRUNKEN SAGAMORE. 211 

herself with great decorum ; for she " sate so mod- 
estly as any of our country women would doe in a 
strange place." Presently one who had been aboard 
during all the time the vessel had been there gave 
decided indications of drunkenness. The others 
beheld his strange conduct with amazement. They 
knew not what it meant, or, in the language of the 
journal, " they could not tell how to take it." The 
whole company of them took to their canoes and 
fled to the shore, leaving the intoxicated sagamore, 
in his helplessness, behind them. They were not, 
however, unconcerned for his fate. They soon re- 
turned, bringing straps of beads. Some had six, 
seven, eight, nine, and ten. These they gave to 
their unfortunate chief. It is probable that these 
" stropes of beades " were wampum, Indian money, 
and were given to the chief to enable him to pro- 
pitiate those who had caused this mysterious spell, 
and thus obtain his liberty. He remained on board, 
and slept quietly all night. The Indians did not 
come aboard again till about noon the next day. 
When they found that their chief had recovered 
from his spell of enchantment, they were highly de- 
lighted. They went back to the shore, carrying the 
good news to their companions. They returned in 
the afternoon, bringing with them tobacco and beads, 
which they gave as a thank-offering to Hudson, and 
left him. 



212 VENISON. 

They repeated their visit again in the middle of 
the afternoon, bringing tobacco and more beads, 
which they gave to Hudson, and then " made an 
oration, and showed him all the country round 
about." Being desirous of producing as favorable 
an impression upon these mysterious strangers *as 
possible, the Indians sent one of their number ashore, 
who soon returned with a large platter full of veni- 
son, which they had cooked after their own style, 
and which they gave to Hudson to eat. After hav- 
ing given other expressions of their respect, they all 
departed except the old chief, who, for the first time, 
had experienced the disgrace of intoxication. He 
preferred to remain longer on board. 



213 



CHAPTER XVI. 

Effect of Ardent Spirits. — Heckewelder. — Singular Tradition. — 
Great Surprise. — Opinions concerning the Arrival of the first 
Ship. — Effect upon the Indians. — Preparation for its Recep- 
tion. — Grand Dance. — Exciting Reports of the Runners. — 
Salutations exchanged. — A Man in Red. — How he is re- 
ceived. — He drinks, and offers the Glass to the Indians. — Their 
Conduct. — One of them, after a Speech, drinks. — Its Effect. — 
His Assertions. — His Example followed. — General Intoxica- 
tion. — Presents. — Their ridiculous Use of them. — The Whites 
considered Gods. — Story of the Bullock's Hide. — Indians out- 
witted. — Locality of this Scene. — Different Names of Manhat- 
tan Island. 

The introduction of ardent spirits among the 
aborigines of this country has been among the most 
fruitful causes of their degeneracy and ruin. It has 
produced alienations between friendly tribes, led to 
murders which have resulted in sanguinary wars, 
attended with all the horrid atrocities of Indian bar- 
barity. Under its influence they have entered into 
treaties, and disposed, for a mere trifle, of immense 
tracts of valuable land, containing their hunting- 
grounds, their gardens, and the graves of their 
fathers. Hudson has the honor or the dishonor of 
being among the first Europeans who initiated the 
renowned Iroquois into the fatal pleasures of its 
use. 



214 SINGULAR TRADITION. 

It is a fact worthy of remark, that a tradition pre- 
vails at the present time among these Indians, that a 
scene of intoxication occurred among them at the 
first arrival of a ship. A similar tradition has also 
been found among the Lenni Lenape, or Delawares, 
a branch of whom resided opposite Albany when 
Hudson visited that place. Other branches of the 
Iroquois confederacy, the Monseys and Delawares, 
resided on Manhattan and Staten Islands and the 
Jersey shore. The tradition is given by Rev. Mr. 
Heckewelder at length. In a letter dated at Beth- 
lehem, Pennsylvania, January '26, 1801, he says, 
" As I receive my information from Indians in their 
language and style, I return it in the same way. 
The enclosed account is, I believe, as au- 
thentic as any thing of the kind that can be ob- 
tained." He further says it was related to him by 
aged and respected Delawares, Mohegans, and 
Mahicanders, nearly forty years ago. It is copied 
from notes taken on the spot. This tradition is so 
peculiar, and contains so many points of interest, 
that we should do it injustice if we failed to employ 
Rev. Mr. Heckewelder's own language. We copy 
it from the New York Historical Collection, New 
Series, Vol. I. 

" A long time ago, when there was no such thing 
known to the Indians as people with a white skin, 
(their expression,) some Indians who had been out a 



THE FIRST SHIP. 215 

fishing, and where the sea widens, espied at a great 
distance something remarkably large swimming or 
floating on the water, and such as they had never 
seen before. They, immediately returning to the 
shore, apprised their countrymen of what they had 
seen,' and pressed them to go out with them and see 
what it might be. These together hurried out, and 
saw, to their great surprise, the phenomenon, but 
could not agree what it might be ; some concluding 
it to be an uncommon large fish, or other animal, 
while others were of opinion it must be some very 
large house. It was at length agreed, among those 
who were spectators, that as this phenomenon moved 
towards the land, whether or not it was an animal, 
or any thing that had life in it, it would be well to 
inform all the Indians on the inhabited islands of 
what they had seen, and put them on their guard. 
Accordingly, they sent runners and watermen oif to 
carry the news to their scattered chiefs, that these 
might send off in every direction for the warriors to 
come in. These arriving in numbers, and them- 
selves viewing the strange appearance, and that it 
was actually moving towards them, (the entrance of 
the river or bay,) concluded it to be a large canoe, 
or house, in which the great Mannitto (Great or Su- 
preme Being) himself was, and that he probably was 
coming to visit them. By this time the chiefs of 
the different tribes were assembled on York Island, 



216 REPORTS OF THE RUNNERS. 

and were counselling or deliberating on the manner 
they should receive their Mannitto, on his arrival. 
Every step had been taken to be well provided with 
a plenty of meat for a sacrifice ; the women were 
required to prepare the best of victuals ; idols or 
images were examined and put in order ; and a 
grand dance was supposed not only to be an agree- 
able entertainment for the Mannitto, but might, with 
the addition of a sacrifice, contribute towards ap- 
peasing him, in case he was angry with them. The 
conjurors were also set to work to determine what 
the meaning of this phenomenon was, and what the 
result would be. Both to these and to the chiefs 
and wise men of the nation, men, women, and chil- 
dren were looking up for advice and protection. 
Between hope and fear, and in confusion, a dance 
commenced. While in this situation, fresh runners 
arrive, declaring it a house of various colors, and 
crowded with living creatures. It now appears to 
be certain that it is the great Mannitto bringing them 
some kind of game, such as they had not before ; 
but other runners soon after arriving, declare it a 
large house of various colors, full of people, yet 
quite a different color than they (the Indians) are of; 
that they were also dressed in a different manner 
from them ; and that one in particular appeared al- 
together red, which must be the Mannitto himself. 
They are soon hailed from the vessel, though in a 



SUPPOSED MANNITTO. 217 

language they do not understand ; yet they shout or 
yell in their way. Many are for running off to the 
woods, but are pressed by others to stay, in order 
not to give offence to their visitors, who could find 
them out and might destroy them. The house (or 
large canoe, as some will have it) stops, and a 
smaller canoe comes ashore, with the red man and 
some others in it ; some stay by this canoe to guard 
it. The chiefs and wise men, or counsellors, had 
composed a large circle, unto which the red-clothed 
man, with two others, approach. He salutes them 
with friendly countenance, and they return the salute 
after their manner. They are lost in admiration, 
both as to the color of the skin (of these whites) as 
also to their manner of dress, yet most as to the 
habit of him who wore the red clothes, which shone 
with something (the lace) they could not account 
for. He must be the great Mannitto, (Supreme 
Being,) they think ; but why should he have a white 
skin ? (their own expression.) A large hockhack (their 
word for gourd, bottle, decanter) is brought forward 
by one of the supposed Mannitto's servants, and 
from this a substance is poured out into a small cup, 
or glass, and handed to the Mannitto. The (ex- 
pected) Mannitto drinks, has the glass filled again, 
and hands it to the chief next to him to drink. The 
chief receives the glass, but only smelleth at it, and 
passes it on to the next chief, who does the same. 
19 



218 THE FIRST GLASS. 

The glass thus passes through the circle without the 
contents being tasted by any one ; and is upon the 
point of being returned again to the red-clothed 
man, when one of their number, a spirited man 
and great warrior, jumps, harangues the assem- 
bly on the impropriety of returning the glass with 
the contents in it ; that the same was handed them 
by the Mannitto, in order that they should drink it, 
as he himself had done before them ; that this would 
please him ; but to return what he had given to 
them might provoke him, and be the cause of their 
being destroyed by him. And since he believed it 
for the good of the nation that the contents offered 
them should be drank, and as no one was willing to 
drink it, he would, let the consequence be what it 
would ; and that it was better for one man to die, 
than a whole nation to be destroyed. He then took 
the glass, and, bidding the assembly a farewell, drank 
it off. Every eye was fixed on their resolute com- 
panion, to see what an effect this would have upon 
him ; and he soon beginning to stagger about, and at 
last dropping to the ground, they bemoan him. He 
falls into a sleep, and they view him as expiring. 
He awakes again, jumps up, and declares that he 
never felt himself before so happy as after he had 
drank the cup. Wishes for more. His wish is 
granted ; and the whole assembly soon join him, and 
become intoxicated. 



INDIAN MISTAKES. 219 

" After this general intoxication had ceased, (dur- 
ing which time the whites had confined themselves to 
their vessel,) the man with the red clothes returned 
again to them, and distributed presents among them, 
to wit, beads, axes, hoes, stockings, &c. They say 
that they had become familiar to each other, and 
were made to understand by signs ; that they now 
would return home, but would visit them next year 
again, when they would bring them more presents 
and stay with them a while ; but that, as they could 
not live without eating, they should want a little 
land of them to sow some seeds, in order to raise 
herbs to put in their broth. That the vessel arrived 
the season following, and they were rejoiced at 
seeing each other ; but that the whites laughed at 
them, (the Indians,) seeing they knew not the use 
of the axes, hoes, &c, they had given them, they 
having had these hanging to their breasts as orna- 
ments ; and the stockings they had made use of as 
tobacco pouches. The whites now put handles (or 
helves) in the former, and cut trees down before 
their eyes, and dug the ground, and showed them 
the use of the stockings. Here (say they) a gen- 
eral laughter ensued among the Indians that they 
remained for so long a time ignorant of the use of 
so valuable implements, and had borne with the 
weight of such heavy metal hanging to their necks 
for such a length of time. They took every white 



220 THE NATIVES OUTWITTED. 

man they saw for a Mannitto, yet inferior and attend- 
ant to the supreme Mannitto, to wit, the one which 
wore the red and laced clothes. Familiarity daily 
increasing between them and the whites, the latter 
now proposed to stay with them, asking them only 
for so much land as the hide of a bullock would 
cover, (or encompass,) which hide was brought for- 
ward and spread on the ground before them. That 
they readily granted this request ; whereupon the 
whites took a knife, and, beginning at one place on 
this hide, cut it up into a rope not thicker than the 
finger of a little child, so that by the time this hide 
was cut up there was a great heap. That this rope 
was drawn out to a great distance, and then brought 
round again, so that both ends might meet. That 
they carefully avoided its breaking, and that, upon 
the whole, it encompassed a large piece of ground. 
That they (the Indians) were surprised at the supe- 
rior wit of the whites, but did not wish to contend 
with them about a little land, as they had enough. 
That they and the whites lived a long time content- 
edly together, although these asked, from time to 
time, more land of them, and, proceeding higher up 
the Mahicanittak, (Hudson River,) they believed they 
would soon want all their country, and which, at 
this time, was already the case." 

The precise spot where the landing and carousal 
referred to in this tradition took place is unknown. 



MANHATTAN ISLAND. 221 

There is a strong probability of its general correct- 
ness, though it is possible that incidents which took 
place at different times are blended together in the 
legend. Hudson was dressed in red. He did give 
liquor to the natives ; he also made them presents 
of various articles ; and it is not at all unlikely that 
the scenes took place very nearly as they are de- 
scribed. 

Some contend that the locality of this adventure 
was Manhattan Island, on which the city of New 
York now stands. As one evidence of this, it is 
said that, to the present time, the Delawares call 
this island Mannahattanink, or Mannahachtanink, 
which means the island or place of general intoxi- 
cation j and that this name was given to it in con- 
sequence of the intoxication of the Indians by Cap- 
tain Hudson. The Mohegans call it by the same 
name, but suppose that it arises from a certain kind 
of wood which is found there, which is well adapted 
to bows and arrows. Other natives call New York 
Laaphawachking, which means the place of string- 
ing beads. This name arose from the fact that, 
after the whites had left in their vessel, the Indians 
were seen in every direction engaged in stringing 
beads, or wampum, which the visitors had given 
them. 

19* 



222 



CHAPTER XVII. 

Hudson's highest Point. — He descends. — Lands. — Trees. — 
The old Man again. — Disappointed Chief. — Fishing. — New- 
burgh. — Hard Metal. — A Boat Thief. — An Affray. — Effect 
of a Gun. — The two Captives again. — An Attack. — The Re- 
pulse. — Attack renewed. — Falcon. — Its Execution. — Both 
Parties retreat. — Appearance of Ore. — Sail along Manhat- 
tan. — The Half Moon at Sea. — Magic Change. — Different 
Rates of Travel. — The Time Hudson occupied in exploring 
the River. — Extent of the Country. — Population. — English 
Prohibition. — Crew mutinies. — Hudson returns. 

Hudson's explorations extended as far as to Fort 
Orange, or Albany. Some think that his vessel 
(the Half Moon) ascended as high as that, and that 
then he sent some of his men higher up in the 
small boat, who reached a place now called Water- 
ford, in the town of Half Moon. The journal 
states, " The two and twentieth was fair weather. 
In the morning, our master's mate and four more of 
the company went up with our boat to sound the 

river higher up This night, at ten 

o'clock, our boat returned, in a shower of rain, from 
sounding of the river, and found it to be an end for 
shipping to go in ; for they had been up eight or 
nine leagues, and found but seven foot water." The 
language of the journal is not sufficiently precise to 



HUDSON DESCENDS THE RIVER. 223 

enable us to fix definitely the highest point that was 
reached. 

The next day Hudson commenced his descent. 
On the 24th, he got aground, but was floated off 
with the rising of the tide. On the 25th, a " stiff 
gale " blew from the south. As they could make 
no progress down the stream, they went ashore on 
the west side of the river, and found large quanti- 
ties of oak, walnut, chestnut, and yew-trees, and 
" trees of sweet wood in great abundance, and great 
store of slate for houses, and other good stones." 
This is believed to be the spot where Athens now 
stands. 

The next day they were visited by the old man 
whom they had intoxicated, who was accompanied 
by another Indian, with their wives and two young 
squaws, sixteen or seventeen years of age, " who 
behaved themselves very modestly." Hudson in- 
vited the men and one of their wives to dine with 
him, and exchanged a knife for some tobacco. Be- 
fore the visitors departed they invited the captain to 
visit them when he should reach their place of resi- 
dence, which was a few miles below where they 
then were. 

September 27th was Sunday. They weighed 
anchor and ran the ship down until she struck upon 
a shoal and grounded. The old chief came aboard 
again and invited them to go ashore and visit his 



224 A CORRECT OPINION. 

people. But the vessel again floating, and the wind 
becoming fair, they declined his request, much to his 
regret. At five o'clock in the afternoon they an- 
chored in fourteen fathoms water. Some of the 
crew amused themselves with fishing. They were 
successful in taking between twenty and thirty mul- 
lets, breams, bass, and barbils. By the 29th they 
had gotten down as far as Newburgh. The writer 
of the journal states, " This is a very pleasant place 
to build a town on." He was correct. A large 
and flourishing city has risen upon the spot. Whilst 
lying here the people brought to Hudson a stone, in 
appearance like emery, which was harder than iron 
or steel, and would cut them ; when pulverized 
and mixed with water it made a shining black color, 
and. glistened like black lead. 

The 1st of October was signalized by an unfortu- 
nate occurrence. The vessel had dropped down 
the river some distance below the Highlands, some- 
where near Stoney Point, and came to anchor. The 
Indians came off from the shore in canoes in con- 
siderable numbers. Some of them came aboard 
for traffic. One was seen as if carelessly floating 
under the stern of the vessel. He excited suspi- 
cion, and was ordered off. He soon returned to 
the same position, and would not leave it. The 
men, however, kept a vigilant eye upon his move- 
ments. When he supposed their attention was 



A STERN THIEF. 225 

diverted in another direction, he left his canoe, 
climbed up the rudder, and entered the cabin win- 
dow. He took a pillow, two shirts, and two bando- 
leers, — small wooden cases, covered with leather, 




The Stern Thiet 

containing each a sufficient quantity of powder to 
charge a musket, — dropped them into his canoe, 
and made off. He was detected. The mate, see- 
ing him flying off with his booty, seized a musket, 
fired at him, and killed him. * Instantly there was a 
great scampering among the natives. So frightened 
were they, that some leaped out of their canoes and 
swam rapidly away. Hudson ordered his small boat 
to be manned and go after the stolen articles. 



226 CONFLICTS. 

Whilst the men were executing the order, one of 
the Indians, who was somewhat more courageous 
than the rest, swam to the boat, seized it, and made 
efforts to overturn it. The cook, having a sword 
with him, immediately cut off one of his hands. 
The poor fellow sank and was drowned. This was 
a severe punishment, but perhaps the lives of the 
men were in danger. After this painful adventure, 
they descended the stream about two leagues. The 
next day they proceeded seven leagues farther, and 
anchored near the upper end of Manhattan Island. 
Whilst lying here, one of the two savages whom 
they took with them up the river, and who jumped 
overboard and swam ashore, came out to the vessel, 
accompanied by a large number of others. His 
object was to seek revenge for the captivity he had 
endured on board the ship. Hudson perceived his 
design, and suffered none of them to come aboard. 
But they were not to be defeated in this manner. 
They paddled around to the stern of the vessel, and 
then poured a shower of arrows into her. This 
was too much for patient endurance. Their fire 
was returned by a discharge of six muskets, which 
took fatal effect upon two or three of them. This 
added fresh fuel to the fire of revenge which burnt 
in the hearts of the ignorant savages. A hundred 
of them assembled on a point of land for another 
attack upon the vessel. But Hudson caused a small 



RENEWED ATTACKS. 227 

cannon, called a falcon, to be fired upon them, 
which killed two more, and caused the others to 
disappear in the woods. A few of them soon gath- 
ered courage and returned to the attack. Nine or 
ten of them pushed off in a canoe once more to the 
vessel. The falcon was brought to bear upon them 
a second time. The ball which it sent killed one 
of their number and went through the canoe. Not- 
withstanding this mysterious mode of warfare, by 
which fire was brought into requisition to send invis- 
ible missiles among the enemy, and notwithstanding 
some of their number had fallen by the power of 
these unseen weapons, and their canoe had been 
completely bored through, yet the Indians did not 
seem disposed to retreat. But when another volley 
of musketry was poured upon them from the Half 
Moon, which killed three or four more of them, 
they adopted the principle that discretion is the bet- 
ter part of valor, and fled. Hudson, actuated prob- 
ably by the same principle, dropped down the river, 
and came to anchor in a bay on the opposite side of 
the stream, "clear from all danger of them." .Tuet, in 
his journal, states, " Hard by there was a cliff, that 
looked of the color of white green, as though it 
were either a copper or silver mine ; and I think 
it to be one of them by the trees that grow upon it, 
for they be all burnt, and the other places are green 
as grass. It is on that side of the river that is called 



228 



MAGIC CHANGE. 



Manna-hatta." They remained there undisturbed 
all night, though they had much wind and rain. 
The next day the weather continued boisterous ; 
but on October 4th the wind became fair. They 
weighed anchor, sailed down between the shores 
of Manhattan Island on one side, Weehawken and 
Hoboken on the other, and, passing by the Battery 
and Governor's Island, in a few hours were beyond 
the Narrows, out on the wide ocean. 

How magical is the change which has taken 
place on the shores of this noble stream since its 
first exploration by him whose name it bears ! 
Where then his eye fell upon nothing but the nat- 
ural scenery, with here and there an Indian en- 
campment, are now seen beautiful palaces, flourish- 
ing villages, splendid cities, and well-conducted, 
profitable farms. The water, whose surface was 
troubled only by the rude canoe of the aborigines, 
clumsily made out of the bark or the trunk of a 
tree, is now covered by vessels of all shapes and 
sizes, some of which, for the perfection of their 
architecture and the splendor of their decorations 
and furniture, have appropriately been called float- 
ing palaces. Equally surprising is the increased 
speed which has been attained in navigation. The 
distance up and down the river, which occupied 
Hudson twenty-two days, can now be accomplished 
in as many hours. Similar transformations, to a 



THE CREW MUTINIES. 229 

great extent, have taken place in all parts of the 
land ; so that the country which at the time of his 
visit was an uncivilized waste, is now occupied by 
one of the most enlightened and powerful nations 
upon earth. 

Henry Hudson was an Englishman ; but when he 
discovered and explored the important river which 
now bears his name he was in the employ of the 
Dutch. Some of the men who accompanied him 
were also Englishmen. This circumstance after- 
wards resulted in an entire change of his plans and 
of his whole subsequent history. His crew were 
strongly disposed to mutiny. He found it difficult 
to control them. After his exploration of the river, 
he held a consultation with them as to what course 
he had better pursue. Their opinions and wishes 
did not agree. The mate proposed going to New- 
foundland, passing the winter, and seeking Davis's 
Passage. To this Hudson was decidedly opposed. 
He suggested that, if they went to the north, their 
provisions would probably not hold out ; that they 
would be unable to replenish their stock ; that a num- 
ber of the men were on the sick list, and that they 
would probably never return to Holland. No one but 
himself, however, mentioned Holland. The English 
sailors did not, because they did not want to go 
there ; the Dutch did not, because they knew that 
the English on board would be strongly opposed to 
20 



230 ENGLISH INJUSTICE. 

it. The consultation produced no decided results. 
Hudson directed the prow of his vessel towards 
England. He kept on for a month without seeing 
any land. It was his intention to return to Amster- 
dam and make a report of his important discoveries 
to his employers. But as he neared the coast of 
England, his crew mutinied. The English were 
unwilling to sail by their own country and proceed 
to Holland. They longed for home. They com- 
pelled him, therefore, to put into Dartmouth, where 
he arrived November 7, 1609. 

The rumors of his discoveries soon became noised 
abroad in England, and secured to Hudson great 
honor. He was treated as a person of more than 
ordinary consequence. He soon sent an authentic 
account of his voyage and its results to Holland, 
and had some correspondence with them concerning 
another voyage. But the English government, who 
wanted to secure to themselves all the benefit of his 
discovery, prohibited, it is said, his sailing again 
in the employ of the Dutch. They also forbade 
the English portion of his crew to reenter that ser- 
vice. If it had not been for these English sailors, 
Hudson would have proceeded to Holland, without 
stopping at England, and in that case he would, in 
all probability, have continued in their employ. So 
that the mutinous disposition of these few English 



Hudson's fate. 231 

seamen was the means of changing the whole course 
of Hudson's history. 

He made three voyages to this country. During 
his third voyage his mutinous crew cruelly commit- 
ted him, in a small boat, to the tender mercies of 
an arctic sea. They abandoned him to his fate, 
and he was never heard from again. 



232 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

Rum and Gunpowder. — 'Samuel Champlain. — His Discovery.— 
French and Indian Allies. — A War Party. — The Five Na- 
tions. — Champlain passes up the St. Lawrence. — Lake St. 
Peter. — Sorelle River. — Indian Deception. — Dangerous Rap- 
ids. — Vessel sent back. — Vigilance. — Beautiful Country. — 
Superstitious Incantations. — Champlain's pretended Dream. — 
Its happy Effect. — Passage through Lake Champlain. — Trans- 
parent Water. — Unexpected Meeting. — Singular Message. — 
Morning Battle. — Novel Expedient. — Effect of Firearms. — 
Victorious Rejoicings. — Indian Practice after a Battle. — Tor- 
tures. — Champlain returns to France. 

Whilst Hudson was exploring the southern parts 
of New York, and initiating the ignorant savages 
into the mysteries of rum, another intrepid and skil- 
ful adventurer was examining its northern borders, 
and introducing to the natives there a knowledge of 
another article of fearful energy. With rum coming 
upon them from one quarter, and gunpowder from 
another, and ere long both of these fatal agencies 
being furnished from every trading establishment, in 
quantities to suit purchasers, it is not in the least de- 
gree surprising that the aborigines have melted away 
so rapidly. The fearless and persevering pioneer to 
whom we refer was Samuel Champlain. He first 
discovered and explored that long and beautiful lake 
in the north-eastern part of the state which now 



SAMUEL CHAMPLAIN. 233 

bears his name. For many years it was called Lake 
Iroquois, because it was in the country of the pow- 
erful Iroquois Indians. It is now universally known 
as Lake Cham plain. 

After the settlement of Quebec, it was deemed by 
the colonists wise policy to keep on friendly terms 
with the neighboring Indians, among whom were the 
Algonquins, Les Montagnez, and Hurons. At the 
same time the Indians were glad to avail themselves 
of the alliance of their new neighbors, who, they 
thought, would render them efficient service in their 
attacks upon their powerful enemies the Iroquois. 
Having secured the friendship of the whites, it was 
not long before they obtained their consent to unite 
with them in vigorous measures against their com- 
mon enemy. A party of Indians, in company with 
a few of the Frenchmen of Quebec, set out, in 1609, 
upon an expedition against the terrible Iroquois. 
Samuel Champlain was one of their number. He 
was induced to join them with the hope that, by so 
doing, he might be able to humble the proud Iroquois, 
and then, by negotiating a peace, bring all the tribes 
of Indians in Canada into a friendly league with the 
French. If this could have been accomplished, it 
would have been highly advantageous to the French. 
Champlain, however, found that it was much more 
easy to project the plan than to carry it into execu- 
tion. The confederated Iroquois, otherwise known 
20* 



234 champlain's project. 

as the Five Nations, or sometimes as the Six Na- 
tions, who had held in check, and were the terror of, 
the tribes for a space of three hundred miles around 
them, were not to be subdued. Another European 
nation, who had watched with an eagle eye the ad- 
vancing power of the French in the new world, was 
to enter into league with the Iroquois, for the pur- 
pose of arresting the farther progress of France. 
This, however, was hidden from Champlain. He 
no doubt was determined to exert himself, to the 
utmost of his ability, for the accomplishment of the 
object he had in view. He accordingly embarked 
with his Indian allies at Quebec. The vessel pro- 
ceeded slowly up the broad and noble St. Lawrence. 
They passed the mouth of the Chaudiere River on 
the south ; then the River St. Anne, which came in 
on the north ; then the Becancour and the St. Mau- 
rice, nearly opposite each other. Here the St. Law- 
rence gradually widened into a broad lake, now 
called Lake St. Peter, twenty-six miles long, and 
containing several islands. They sailed through the 
whole length of this lake, passed by the islands, and 
then entered a river which came in on the south. 
This was the Iroquois, now known as the St. John's, 
or the Sorelle River. It unites the waters of the 
St. Lawrence with those of Lake Champlain. They 
had not proceeded far into this new river before a 
discovery was made which convinced Champlain of 



champlain's vigilance. 235 

the unprincipled duplicity of his allies ; this was the 
discovery of impassable rapids. His allies, if they 
had been true, would have given him information of 
these rapids ; but, instead of that, they had carefully 
concealed them from him. His vessel could proceed 
no farther. He therefore sent her back to Quebec. 
Himself and two faithful Frenchmen, who would not 
forsake him, determined to press on, notwithstanding 
the secrecy and deceitfulness of the Indians. They 
carried their canoes around the falls, and then made 
preparations for their night encampment. The In- 
dians, according to their custom, sent out one of 
their number to reconnoitre and ascertain whether 
any enemies were in sight. He returned without 
making any discoveries. They then prepared for 
sleep, without the precaution of appointing a guard. 
Champlain rebuked them for stupidity and careless- 
ness ; but all the reply they gave was, that those who 
were fatigued all day needed sleep at night. But 
as they approached nearer the settlements of their 
enemies/they redoubled their vigilance. They trav- 
elled only at night, and made no fires in the day, 
lest the columns of smoke might reveal their retreat. 
Champlain was delighted with the beautiful and 
romantic appearance of the uncultivated regions 
through which he passed. The islands were well 
stocked with deer and other game, whilst the river 
abounded with fish. They found it a pleasant 



236 A PRETENDED DREAM. 

amusement to hunt and fish in order to supply them- 
selves with food. On this excursion, Champlain 
obtained considerable information of Indian customs 
and character. He was especially interested in the 
implicit confidence which they reposed in the myste- 
rious powers of their sorcerers or powwows. One of 
these was in their company, who took occasion, at 
one of their encampments, to go through with his 
superstitious, terrific incantations. After this they 
inquired for several days, of Champlain, if he had 
not dreamed of seeing the Iroquois. He told them 
no. At this they were greatly troubled, and made 
no attempt to conceal their anxiety from him. Un- 
der the impression that it would afford them relief, 
and might encourage them to deeds of noble daring 
in the coming conflict, he finally told them that, in a 
dream, he had seen their hated enemy, the Iroquois, 
drowning in a lake, but that he placed no confidence 
in it. They, however, were filled with joy. They 
had now no doubt of victory. It is not improbable 
that the powwow, in his incantations, had associated 
Champlain, dreaming of the Iroquois, with a favor- 
able termination of the present expedition ; hence 
their enthusiasm When he informed them that he had 
seen, in a dream, their enemy overwhelmed in the 
waters of a lake. After this they pressed on with 
high hopes. They soon left the spot where St. 
John's now stands, and the Isle aux Noix, passed by 



AN UNEXPECTED MEETING. 237 

Rouse's Point, and entered upon the romantic Lake 
Champlain. For a hundred and ten miles did they 
paddle their light canoes over this beautiful sheet, 
passing by places which, since then, have been con- 
secrated by important national events, as classic lo- 
calities in the history of the country. On the south 
Champlain connects with Lake George, which is 
greatly admired for the transparency of its waters 
and the extreme beauty of its shores. Pebbles and 
shells on its bottom can be seen at a great depth. 
It seems almost like sailing in the air. Between 
these two lakes there are rapids. The intention of 
the allies was to pass these rapids, make an irrup- 
tion into the quiet and romantic valleys of the Iro- 
quois, and suddenly pounce upon one of their vil- 
lages. But their plan was thwarted by the unex- 
pected appearance of their enemy, at ten o'clock at 
night, upon the lake. When they met, both parties 
were surprised and elated, which they expressed in 
loud shouts. As it was contrary to their practice to 
fight upon the water when they could reach the 
land, the two parties made directly for the shore. 
The allies immediately placed themselves in a po- 
sition for battle, by concealing themselves behind 
trees and stumps, or whatever else offered them 
safety, and then sent a messenger to their enemy, to 
know whether they would fight that night. This, 
certainly, was a somewhat singular procedure. Why 



238 NOVEL MODE OF WAR. 

did they not at once attack the Iroquois, and let 
them exhibit by their conduct whether they were 
ready for battle ? Their enemy sent them word 
that the night was too dark ; they must, therefore, 
wait till day. Early the next morning, Chainplain 
stationed his two Frenchmen, with a few Indians, 
in the woods, so as to attack the enemy in flank. 
Each party consisted of about two hundred men, 
all confident of victory. They were all armed 
with bows and arrows, except the French, who 
alone had fire-arms, and who were expected by the 
allies to determine the victory. They showed 
Champlain who were chiefs among their enemy, 
and advised him to fire upon them. They were 
distinguished by their head-dress of feathers being 
higher and more showy than the others. Their 
plan of attack was original and ingenious. The 
allies rushed out from their entrenchments and ran 
two hundred feet towards the enemy; they then 
parted to the right and left, making an opening in 
the centre. Through this opening Champlain, who 
was in the rear, advanced and took the command. 
This sudden appearance of a singular-looking, pale- 
faced stranger, with a kind of weapon which they 
had never seen before, created great astonishment 
among the Iroquois. Whilst they were wondering 
at this white-skinned stranger, suddenly a flash was 
seen, and a loud report heard, followed by a cloud 



BATTLE-FIELD AMUSEMENTS. 239 

of smoke. It was the discharge of an arquebuse 
from the spot where Cham plain had placed four 
of his men. When the Iroquois saw, as the effect 
of this new mode of warfare, two of their chiefs 
slain, and a third badly wounded, their amazement 
was extreme. The allies rent the air with their 
wild shouts, and let fly a shower of arrows. 
Champlain followed up his success with another 
discharge of his fire-spitting and ball-hurling weap- 
ons. The enemy were terrified ; they turned and 
fled in dismay. They were hotly pursued by the 
victorious army, and some of them were taken 
prisoners. The corn which the Iroquois left behind 
them in their flight furnished a timely supply to 
their conquerors, who were reduced to great need. 
Two hours did they pass upon the field of battle 
in singing, dancing, and feasting. 

So successful had been the conflict that not one 
of their number had been slain, and only a few 
wounded. They made no attempt to follow up 
their advantage. It was the custom with those 
tribes for the conquerors, as well as the conquered, 
to retreat after an engagement ; and sometimes 
the victors would exhibit as much disorder in their 
retreat as though the enemy were shouting in 
full pursuit. One of their prisoners they sub- 
jected to horrible tortures, to which Champlain 
soon put an end. The victorious party returned 



240 champlain's operations. 

to Quebec. In September following, Champlain 
sailed for France. He returned the next year and 
resumed offensive operations against these same 
enemies, sometimes meeting with success, and at 
other times with defeats. 



241 



CHAPTER XIX. 

Rumors of a great River. — Opinions concerning' it. — Reasons for 
visiting it. — The exploring Party. — Wild Rice Indians. — 
Their Advice. — Alarming Stories. — Salt Bay — No Salt. — 
Beautiful Landscape. — A Cross discovered. — Village in Com- 
motion. — The Portage. — Pleasant Sail. — Iron Mines. — The 
Mississippi Mode of Travelling. — Welcome Paths. — Ro- 
mantic Cluster of Villages. — Their judicious Approach. — 
Friendly Reception. — Courteous Entertainment. — The Cal- 
umet. — Council. — Feast — Escort. — Meaning of Illinois. — 
Departure. — Looking out for a River.— Discover huge painted 
Monsters. 

Soon after the French had formed their infant 
settlements in Canada, certain vague rumors began 
to be circulated among them that, many miles to 
the west, was a river of great width, which flowed 
many hundreds of miles through the country, and 
terminated no one knew where. On its banks, at 
different distances, villages of various Indian tribes 
were planted, and in its waters fish and monsters 
of gigantic size were said to exist. The reports 
concerning it, though indefinite and unsatisfactory, 
appear to have been tinged with no small amount 
of exaggeration and superstition. The curiosity of 
the French was excited, and their love of adventure 
called into action. Brave, enterprising spirits were 
not wanting among them, who panted for the 
21 



242 RUMORS OF A GREAT RIVER. 

honor of being able, by their personal explorations, 
to settle the questions concerning the locality, the 
course, the length, and the outlet of this mysterious 
stream. So limited and indefinite was the informa- 
tion which was derived from the Indians respecting 
the course of this river, that some believed it flowed 
in a south-easterly direction, and emptied into the 
Atlantic. Others maintained the opinion that, after 
pursuing a south-westerly course, it found its way to 
the Pacific through the Gulf of California; whilst 
others believed that it tended southerly, and emptied 
in the Gulf of Mexico. It was important, in a geo- 
graphical point of view, that correct information 
should be obtained. In addition to this considera- 
tion, whatever nation discovered and explored the 
river would be regarded as entitled to the territory 
through which it flowed. New sources of trade 
would be opened with interior tribes of Indians, 
and vast fields of benevolent labor would be thrown 
open for the cultivation of Christian missionaries ; 
for these Indians, being heathen, needed the elevat- 
ing and converting influences of Christianity. For 
these reasons, M. De Frontenac, who was then Gov- 
ernor of Canada, favored an exploring expedition. 

Father Marquette, a Roman Catholic missionary, 
who was then a resident of the old town of Mich- 
ilimackinac, the settlement of which is attributed to 
his influence, and M. Joilet, were considered suitable 



FATHER MARQUETTE. 243 

persons to have charge of the perilous expedition. 
Marquette was especially adapted to this service, on 
account of his bravery, discretion, religious zeal for 
the conversion of the natives, and his acquaintance 
with several Indian dialects which were widely 
spoken by the natives. Five others were associated 
with them. Father Marquette wrote an account of 
the incidents winch occurred on the expedition, by 
means of which a knowledge of their adventures 
has been perpetuated to the present time.* 

On the 13th of May, 1673, these seven individuals 
embarked in two canoes on their exciting and dan- 
gerous expedition. The first tribe of Indians which 
they reached were called Wild Rice, because their 
country produced this grain in great abundance. 
Father Marquette informed them of his design to 
visit the tribes of the remote west and south, and 
make known to them the knowledge of the true 
God. These sons of the forest, being favorably 
impressed with the good father's appearance and 
doctrines, were unwilling that he should expose him- 
self to the perils of so hazardous an enterprise. 
They earnestly entreated him to abandon it. They 
pictured it as full of terrors. They represented the 
navigation of the river as extremely dangerous, the 
Indians as cruel, and the climate as insufferably hot. 

* Life of Marquette, by Jared Sparks. 



244 ALARMING STORIES. 

They moreover said that the water of the river 
teemed with gigantic monsters, with which it would 
be useless to contend. Their tales of terror were 
sufficient to have chilled the ardor of any other than 
the bravest hearts. But they produced no effect 
upon Marquette. Although he expressed his grati- 
tude for the affectionate interest which they mani- 
fested in his welfare, he informed them he had no 
fear of the aquatic monsters of the river, and that 
he should use extra vigilance to guard against sur- 
prise from the Indians. True to his design, Mar- 
quette gave these Wild Rice Indians religious in- 
struction, and offered for them his prayers. We 
next find him at the Bay of Puans, on the north- 
western side of Lake Michigan. Its present name 
is Green Bay. As in the Indian language its name 
signified Salt Bay, our adventurers were induced to 
make some examination of the place, to ascertain 
if any salt springs existed in the neighborhood ; but 
none were found. 

Ascending a river which emptied into the bay, and 
which is now known as Fox River, they approached 
a village, beautifully situated on a hill, from which 
an extensive view was had of a landscape which, as 
it stretched away in every direction, presented to 
the beholder, in picturesque combination, the gor- 
geousness of the many-flowered prairie, with groves 
of trees scattered over it, like islands in a lake, and 



A CROSS DISCOVERED. 245 

a dense forest skirting the horizon, as if it were the 
green bank by which the waters of this golden lake 
were kept within their limits. Here Marquette was 
delighted to see a large cross — the symbol of his 
religion — erected in a conspicuous place in the 
Gentre of the town. He was even more gratified to 
perceive that it was covered with offerings which the 
natives had presented to the Great Spirit as an ex- 
pression of their gratitude for successes which he 
had granted them during the preceding winter. The 
cross had not been reared in vain. 

The year before this, Father Allouez, a Catholic 
missionary, had labored among this people ; and so 
deeply were they interested in his communications, 
that they scarcely allowed him time for necessary 
repose. They required him to teach at night as well 
as through the day. The cross, decorated with their 
thank offerings, was probably the result of his influ- 
ence among them. 

From these Indians Marquette obtained two 
guides, and, in return for some presents, they gave 
him a mat, which was used for a bed during the 
whole voyage. Like the Wild Rice Indians, they 
endeavored to dissuade the pioneers from their haz- 
ardous expedition, but in vain. 

The 10th of June was a day of unusual excite- 
ment in the village. All the inhabitants understood 
the object of their visitors. And as they were well 
21* 



246 EXCITING OCCASION. 

acquainted with the fierce, warlike disposition of the 
powerful tribes to the south and west whom this 
small company intended to reach, they regarded the 
attempt as extremely hazardous, and one which 
would most probably result in martyrdom. When, 
therefore, the hour arrived for their friendly visitors 
to embark, the whole village — chiefs, braves, squaws, 
and naked children — assembled together and gazed 
with astonishment upon the temerity of this small 
handful of men, in exposing themselves to the power 
of the distant barbarous tribes, and to the perils of 
navigation which they knew would inevitably beset 
them. 

The voyagers entered a river which emptied into 
Green Bay, and followed it to a place known as the 
Portage. Here they were obliged to carry their two 
canoes across land to another river which ran west, 
called the Mescousin, but now known as the Wis- 
consin. Here their guides left them, to return. 
Until now, the natural current of all the water 
which they had traversed was towards Quebec. 
From this point the water flowed in an opposite 
direction — to the west and south. As they passed 
slowly on through the broad, but shallow Wisconsin, 
they found the river checkered with numerous islands 
of various shapes and sizes, covered with stately 
trees, and ornamented with brilliant flowers and the 
graceful drapery of innumerable vines. As they 



SAIL DOWN THE WISCONSIN. 247 

swept along close by the shore, various kinds of wild 
fowl were started, some of which, as they left their 
nests or, feeding-places, would fly away with a shrill, 
shrieking cry, and some with a whirring sound, 
whilst others darted off noiselessly, as if fearful of 
betraying the direction of their flight. Occasion- 
ally the timid deer and uncouth buffalo were seen, 
but no Indians. After sailing about thirty leagues, 
they discovered extensive iron mines, the ore of 
which appeared to be of good quality. They con- 
tinued their course for forty leagues more, and on 
the 17th of June they entered, with emotions of 
gratitude and joy, the far-famed river of which they 
were in search. The friendly Wisconsin had intro- 
duced them to the magnificent Mississippi ! 

It, of course, was not known at that time that the 
river, about which they had heard such vague, yet 
startling rumors, and which they had now reached, " 
was the same as that beneath whose waters the re- 
mains of Hernando De Soto had found their last 
resting-place. A knowledge of that fact was to be 
the result of future discovery. 

Thus far every thing had been favorable, and 
they commenced their exploration of the Rio Grande, 
as the unknown river was sometimes called, under 
encouraging auspices and with high hopes. 

Although they had seen no natives since they left 
Green Bay, they were well aware that they were 



248 EXPLORING THE MISSISSIPPI. 

passing through Indian territory, and were liable at 
any moment to an attack. They therefore pro- 
ceeded with great caution. Some of the party were 
always on guard whilst the others took their rest. 
As they could not conveniently cook their food in 
their small canoes whilst floating down the stream, 
their method was, to approach the shore in the latter 
part of the afternoon, kindle a fire, cook their game, 
then push out into the middle of the river and an- 
chor for the night. They proceeded in this manner 
until the 25th of June, when, at a point some sixty 
leagues below the mouth of the Wisconsin, they dis- 
covered the footprints of men. They now knew 
that they were in the vicinity of Indian settlements. 
Looking around, they perceived a well-trodden path, 
which led into a prairie. This was no unwelcome 
sight. Although they were no war party, stealthily 
seeking their unsuspecting enemy, yet they were as 
highly pleased to find themselves in the neighbor- 
hood of Indians as were the bloodthirsty warriors 
of the forest when they discovered the hiding-places 
of those whom they were pursuing for purposes of 
revenge. The good Father Marquette rejoiced at the 
opportunity, which he now hoped would he afforded, 
of preaching the true faith to the benighted red men, 
who had never heard the history of the cross, and 
who were perishing for lack of knowledge ; whilst 
Joilet, being himself a merchant, was probably grat- 



A ROMANTIC VILLAGE. 249 

ified with the prospect of discovering new fields for 
commercial adventure and speculation. 

After committing the canoes to the care of the 
boatmen, and giving them all necessary instructions, 
our two heroes set out in pursuit of natives. After 
following the beaten track about six miles, they 
came to a cluster of villages quite romantically situ- 
ated, two of them being perched upon a hill top, as 
if for purposes of observation, and the other nes- 
tling by the margin of a graceful stream, as if it 
were an outpost guarding the hill from the approach 
of danger. 

When they arrived within hailing distance, in or- 
der to avoid exciting suspicion by any appearance 
of concealment, they paused, and signified their pres- 
ence by a loud call. In an instant the Indians 
presented themselves at the doors of their cabins. 
After gazing at their unexpected visitors a few mo- 
ments, they deputed four old men of their tribe to 
advance and hold a parley with them. As these 
four messengers approached with slow and dignified 
step, two of them performed the interesting service 
of elevating ornamented pipes towards the sun, as a 
sign of friendship. Encouraged by this proffer of 
peace, Father Marquette broke silence and inquired 
the name of their nation. " We are Illinois," was 
their reply. They then offered pipes to the strangers, 
and invited them to their homes. As they entered 



250 THE COUNCIL AND CALUMET. 

the village, they were received with every demonstra- 
tion of respect. After they were seated in the wig- 
wam of the chief, the calumet, or pipe of peace, was 
presented them. 

The Illinois Indians were divided into separate 
tribes, having, however, one general chief, who 
ruled over all. As there was to be a council of all 
these tribes, the chief invited Marquette and Joilet 
to attend it, which they accepted. They were there 
treated with every mark of friendship. Marquette 
explained fully the objects of their voyage. The 
chief approved the objects, but at the same time 
earnestly endeavored to dissuade them from attempt- 
ing its accomplishment, in consequence of the perils 
which would necessarily be incurred. In return for 
presents received from Marquette, the chief gave 
him a calumet. This is an ornamented pipe, the 
smoking of which by different parties indicates that 
they are at peace with each other. 

After the council, a feast, of four courses, was 
served up in Indian style, after which the two visit- 
ors were publicly conducted, with great ceremony, 
through the village, and received from the hands of 
individuals small presents of ornamented girdles and 
garters. When they returned to their canoes they 
were escorted by nearly a thousand natives, who 
seemed to take pleasure in bestowing upon them all 
the tokens of respect in their power. 



TERRIFIC MONSTERS. 251 

The word Illinois signifies men. This tribe, in 
appropriating this word to themselves, profess to 
be a noble, manly people ; as if they said, " We 
are men, in comparison with whom other tribes 
are as children or as brutes." Marquette observed 
that they were more civilized than some other 
tribes. Their language was a dialect of the 
Algonquin, with which Marquette was acquaint- 
ed. They were ignorant of the use of leather, 
and possessed no iron tools. Their clothes 
were of skins, and their weapons and tools of 
stone. 

Bidding farewell to these friendly Indians, with 
the promise of returning after four moons, (or 
months,) our voyagers pursued their course down 
the Mississippi, with attention awake to discover 
another large river, which emptied into this on the 
west. It was called Pekitanoni, but has since re- 
ceived the name of the Missouri. 

As they were floating quietly upon the surface 
of the water, their eyes were arrested by two huge 
monsters, which were portrayed in green, red, 
and blue upon the perpendicular, rocky cliffs, on 
one side of the stream, as if they were Gorgons, 
placed there to defend the passage of the river. 
So bright were their colors, so well denned their 
outline, and so artistic their execution, as to suggest 



252 THEIR ORIGIN UNKNOWN. 

the belief that they were the work of savages ; and 
yet this solution seemed to be disproved by the 
height and inaccessibleness of their position. Their 
terrific appearance was well fitted to excite the 
fears of the superstitious. 



253 



CHAPTER XX. 

Marquette discovers the Missouri. — Effect of its Waters upon the 
Mississippi. — Marquette's Opinions. — The Platte and Colora- 
do. — The Ohio passed. — Spirit's Residence. — Ochres. — 
Reeds. — Interview with Indians. — Possess European Arti- 
cles. — Warlike Movements allayed by the Calumet. — Interpret- 
er discovered. — Arkansas Indians. — Escort of ten Canoes. — 
Distance of the Sea. — The Party in Danger. — The Peril 
escaped. — Reasons for returning. — Enter the Illinois. — A 
Chief invites Marquette to return. — Reach Chicago. — Time 
of Absence. — Marquette settles as a Missionary. — His Pre- 
sentiment. — His rural Worship. — His Retirement. — His sin- 
gular Decease. 

Without stopping to settle the question whether 
those uncouth figures on the rocks were natural or 
artificial, Marquette, after examining them as long 
as he desired, paddled off down the stream. It was 
not long before a rushing sound was heard ; then 
rapids were discovered. Floating timber and dead 
trees, in great quantities, were seen coming into the 
Mississippi from its western side. They had reached 
the mouth of the Pekitanoni, (Missouri River.) 
Until now the water of the Mississippi had been 
clean ; below this it was very turbid. The sediment 
brought into it by the Pekitanoni colored and ren- 
dered muddy the whole river. 

As one object of this expedition was to discover 
22 



254 CORRECT CONJECTURES. 

the course and outlet of the Mississippi, this was 
made a subject of special attention and inquiry. 
After they reached the mouth of the Pekitanoni, 
Father Marquette formed the opinion that, if the 
Mississippi continued in general the same course it 
had thus far, it must empty itself in the Gulf of 
Mexico. He also expressed the belief that, by fol- 
lowing the Pekitanoni, another river might be 
reached, which discharged its waters into the Gulf 
of California. The sagacity of the good father 
may be inferred from the correctness of his con- 
jectures. The Mississippi does empty, as he sup- 
posed, in the Gulf of Mexico, and the north fork 
of the Platte River, which is a branch of the Peki- 
tanoni, extends to within a short distance of the 
sources of the Colorado, which empties into the 
Gulf of California. The Platte and the Colorado 
Rivers both take their rise in the Cordilleras Moun- 
tains, and flow in opposite directions — the former 
through the Gulf of Mexico into the Atlantic Ocean, 
the latter through the Gulf of California into the 
Pacific Ocean. Marquette was right in both of his 
opinions. 

Another river which they came to, that dis- 
charged its waters into the Mississippi, was called 
Ouabouskigou. This came in from the east, and is 
now called the Ohio. Near its mouth is a place 
which was regarded by the Indians as the residence 



Marquette's discoveries. 255 

of some evil spirit, and against which Marquette 
had been seriously cautioned. An island in the river 
divided the waters, and sent a portion with great 
force against a ledge of rocks, from which they re- 
coiled with a loud noise, and then stole rapidly 
away through a narrow and dangerous channel. 

They also discovered in this vicinity iron ore, 
earths, or ochres, of purple, red, and violet colors, 
some of which, coming in contact with the oar, pro- 
duced a stain which remained for more than two 
weeks. Tall reeds now began to grow along the 
shores, and mosquitoes became numerous and trouble- 
some. 

Some Indians presented themselves upon the 
bank of the river, and appeared to be waiting for 
the approach of the voyagers. Not knowing what 
their character might be, the boatmen prepared for 
battle ; but the missionary Marquette raised his cal- 
umet and spoke to them in Huron. They made no 
reply, but invited them, by signs, to land and take 
some food. Their invitation was accepted. Mar- 
quette noticed that this tribe were better provided 
with weapons and tools than the Illinois were. 
They had iron hoes, hatchets, knives, and guns. 
They carried their powder in glass bottles. As 
they could not have manufactured these, it was evi- 
dent that they had had intercourse with Europeans. 
Upon inquiry, Marquette ascertained that these 



256 WARLIKE DEMONSTRATION. 

articles were purchased of men who came from the 
east and dressed as he did, who had images and 
beads, and performed on different instruments. 
They were probably Europeans, who had formed 
settlements in Carolina and Virginia. After in- 
structing them in the elements of the Christian 
religion and giving them some medals, Marquette 
continued his journey. The next village he came 
to was called Metchigamea, the inhabitants of which, 
at first, made some warlike demonstrations. They 
came out armed with bows, arrows, tomahawks, and 
clubs, and threatened to attack them. Marquette 
raised his calumet. The young warriors, pretend- 
ing not to see it, were about to open the battle, 
when some old men made their appearance, who, as 
soon as they saw the pipe of peace in Marquette's 
hand, constrained the young savages to desist, and, 
casting their own weapons at the feet of the visit- 
ors, they entered the canoes and invited them to 
land. Their invitation was accepted, though with 
some apprehension. Marquette addressed them in 
six different languages, but was unsuccessful in mak- 
ing them understand, until an old man was found 
who had some acquaintance with the language of 
the Illinois. Through him, as an interpreter, Mar- 
quette informed them of his intention to proceed to 
the sea, and asked of them information as to the 
distance. He also gave them, as usual, religious 



AKAMSCA. 257 

instruction. They referred him to a town some 
thirty miles farther down the river, called Akamsca, 
(or Arkansas,) for the information he desired. He 
spent the night, though with some degree of un- 
easiness, on shore among this people. The next 
day he took the newly-found interpreter, and has- 
tened to Akamsca. When he had arrived within 
about two miles of it, he met canoes filled with sav- 
ages. As they approached, the chief presented the 
calumet, and invited them to go ashore. They 
were received with kindness, and supplied with 
stores. They were accompanied from Metchigamea 
by ten canoes of Indians, who preceded them on the 
water, as if to show them the way. At Akamsca 
they very fortunately found a young man who was 
well acquainted with the Illinois language, and 
through whom communications could be made to 
these Indians with some degree of ease and cor- 
rectness. 

After making these Indians presents, as was his 
usual custom, he learnt from them that the sea was 
only five days distant, but they could give him no 
additional information, as between them and it the 
river was infested by tribes with whom they were at 
war, and who prevented them from holding inter- 
course with the inhabitants who dwelt lower down. 

Whilst at Akamsca, our company of trustful 
voyagers were exposed to some peril. The elders 
22* 



258 DANCE OF THE CALUMET. 

of the Indians, who embraced the wise men and 
counsellors of the tribe, held a secret meeting, at 
which they seriously deliberated upon the measures 
to be adopted in their treatment of these novel, 
pale-faced visitors. Some were in favor of mur- 
dering them, and then taking possession of their 
property. This they could easily have done. The 
chief, however, would not consent. He favored a 
more peaceful course. A kind Providence caused 
his counsels to prevail. The result was that Mar- 
quette and .Toilet were invited to attend the interest- 
ing ceremony of the dance of the calumet, at the 
conclusion of which the chief gave them a calumet, 
as an expression of his friendly feelings towards 
them. 

The question was now considered whether it was 
expedient to proceed farther south. Being per- 
suaded, from the general southerly direction of this 
crooked river, that it could neither empty into the 
Atlantic at the east, nor into the Gulf of California 
at the west, but that its outlet must be into the Gulf 
of Mexico, they had accomplished one prominent 
object of their expedition. As it was possible that 
by penetrating farther south they might be attacked 
by the more warlike tribes and taken prisoners, and 
thus the results of their discoveries be lost to the 
civilized world, they decided that the wisest policy 
was to return. They had now been a month upon 



REASONS FOR RETURNING. 259 

the river, during which time they had traced its ser- 
pentine windings from the forty-second to the thirty- 
fourth degree of latitude; had examined the nature 
of the country, the character of the inhabitants, and 
had been privileged to preach the gospel to those 
who had never before heard the name of Christ. 

On their return, instead of ascending the Missis- 
sippi to the Wisconsin, by which they had entered 
it, they turned into the Illinois, which conducted 
them by a much shorter route to Lake Michigan. 
On the banks of the Illinois they visited a village, 
where they gave religious instruction to an attentive, 
inquiring people. The chief was so much pleased 
that he entreated Marquette to return and teach 
them more fully. Some of the young men of this 
tribe, with a chief, accompanied our party as far as 
the Lake Michigan, near, probably, the place where 
Chicago now stands. From thence it was easy for 
them, by following the shore, to find their way to 
Green Bay. They reached here in September, after 
an absence of four months, during which time they 
had travelled over two thousand five hundred miles. 

After this Marquette became a missionary among 
the Miamis, and made it his home near the southern 
extremity of Lake Michigan. He died under some- 
what peculiar circumstances. On one occasion, 
when sailing along the eastern shore of the lake, he 
turned into a small river, at the same time express- 



260 Marquette's singular death. 

ing the presentiment that that would be the termina- 
tion of his voyage. Being strongly attached to the 
ceremonial of his church, he landed, reared an altar, 
and there, in the grand cathedral of Nature, with 
pointed arches formed by the meeting of the green 
boughs above him and the soft carpeted earth be- 
neath him, with the incense of fragrant flowers, and 
accompanied with the melody of birds, he per- 
formed the solemn service of the mass. At his 
request, his boatmen left him alone for half an hour. 
At the end of this time they sought him, and were 
horror-struck at finding him dead. The river 
where this mournful scene occurred has ever since 
been known by the name of Marquette. Thus died, 
amid the beauties of nature, which it was his delight 
to explore, and at the foot of the altar which it was 
his profession and privilege to serve, the first ex- 
plorer of the largest river in America. 



261 



CHAPTER XXI. 

La Salle. — His Opinions about China. — His Desire for Adven- 
ture. — His Patents. — His Company. — Builds a Vessel. — First 
Voyage. — Great Storm. — A Vow to St. Anthony. — False Ru- 
mors. — The Griffin lost. — Noise forbidden. — A Bear shot. — 
Effect of the Report. — Robbery. — False Friendship. — Case 
of Perplexity. — A Battle at hand. — Effect of a Parley. — The 
Difficulty adjusted. — Want of Food. — Arrival of De Tonty. — 
La Salle lost. — Kills Opossums. — Finds the Company. — 
Disagreeable Voyage. — The welcome Buffalo. — Forsaken Vil- 
lage. — The Reason. — La Salle seizes Corn. — New Year's 
Day. — Mass. — Hennepin exhorts the Men. — The Effect. — 
Lake Peoria. — Meaning of the Name. 

When the discovery and the exploration of the 
Mississippi by M. Marquette became known, it 
awakened in the breasts of others a thirst for similar 
adventures. There were not wanting men who, if 
the requisite means could have been obtained, would 
cheerfully have pushed inquiries far beyond the most 
extreme points which had yet been reached by any 
European. Among these, none were more ardent 
and determined than Robert Cavalier de la Salle, a 
native of Rouen, in Normandy, who had opened a 
somewhat extensive trade with the Indians who in- 
habited Canada, or who dwelt on the borders of the 
great lakes. In exchange for European goods, he 
received from them the skins of various kinds of 



262 CAVALIER DE LA SALLE. 

animals.* The nature of his business was such as 
required him to make long excursions upon Lake 
Ontario, and among the Hurons farther north, by 
which means he became acquainted with the fact 
that a chain of lakes, of great size, stretched far 
away in the interior of the country ; and also that 
rivers of great, but indefinite length, flowed towards 
the west. 

The great geographical problem of the age, 
whether it was a possible thing to go to China and 
the other rich countries of the East across the newly- 
discovered continent of America, had long occupied 
the mind of La Salle. He had bestowed upon it 
patient and protracted thought, and, from the best 
information he could obtain, it seemed to him prob- 
able that, by following the lakes with which he was 
already acquainted, to the west, they would either 
lead to other lakes or else to the head waters of dis- 
tant rivers, whose outlet was in the China seas, and 
hence that it was a possible thing to reach China by 
crossing America. He panted for the honor of set- 
tling this question. He also desired to explore the 
southern part of the Mississippi, below Akamsca, 
the most southern point reached by Marquette, and 
establish with certainty the place of its outlet, form 
colonies upon its banks, and open new avenues of 
trade with the distant tribes of the south and west. 

* Life of La Salle, by Jared Sparks. 



LA salle's patents. 263 

After long and patient waiting, and making two 
voyages to France, he succeeded in obtaining letters 
patent from the King which conferred upon him the 
possession of Fort Frontenac, situated on the St. 
Lawrence, at the outlet of Lake Ontario. It had 
been built a short time before by Frontenac, the 
Governor of Canada, and was soon after called by 
his name. He was also authorized to penetrate to 
the west for purposes of discovery as far as he 
chose, and erect as many forts as he pleased, of 
which he was to have the sovereignty and ownership, 
on condition of supporting a garrison in them from 
his own resources, and clearing up a certain quan- 
tity of land around them. He was also favored 
with the exclusive trade in Buffalo skins, an article 
which had but recently been introduced into the 
Canadian markets. 

On his last return from France, La Salle brought 
with him a company of thirty persons, among whom 
were a pilot, sailors, ship carpenters, and other me- 
chanics. As the new world did not furnish materi- 
als for ship building, he also brought with him nails, 
anchors, ropes, and other necessary articles for rig- 
ging vessels. 

After his arrival, his first work was to build a 
ship on a small stream running into the Niagara 
River, about two miles above the falls, with which to 
navigate the lakes and traffic with the Indians. The 



264 THE FIRST VESSEL ON THE LAKES. 

ship was launched amid the firing of guns and the 
shouts of the men, and christened with the name of 
the Griffin. So important was this event that a Te 
Deum was sung. As the current of the river above 
the falls is strong, the vessel, after being completely 
rigged, was carefully towed along the shore to the 
vicinity of Lake Erie. The Indians expressed great 
astonishment at it. Some of them even measured 
its size, that they might inform the Dutch settlers 
of New York. On the 7th of August, 1679, the 
voyage of this new vessel commenced. As the 
breeze filled its sails, it bore its passengers away 
over the deep waters of Lake Erie towards Lake 
St. Clair. Passing through this, they entered, on the 
23d of August, Lake Huron. On the 26th, they 
were overtaken with a violent storm. Father Hen- 
nepin, a Catholic missionary, who was one of the 
company, in his account of the voyage, says, 
* M. La Salle, notwithstanding he was a courageous 
man, began to fear, and told us we were undone ; 
and therefore every body fell upon his knees to say 
his prayers and prepare himself for death, except 
our pilot, whom we could never oblige to pray ; and 
he did nothing all that while but curse and swear 
against M. La Salle, who, as he said, had brought 
him thither to make him perish in a nasty lake, and 
lose the glory he had acquired by his long and happy 
navigations on the ocean." So great were their 




H£^\\ 



Mi 



$ fey 



1 V 






FATE OF THE GRIFFIN. 267 

perils that La Salle, after offering fervent prayers to 
St. Anthony, made a solemn vow, that, if he should 
be safely delivered from his dangers, he would con- 
secrate the first chapel built in the newly-discovered 
countries to that honored saint. The storm abated, 
and a harbor was safely reached in the Island of 
Mackinac. They soon after sailed, and succeeded 
in reaching Green Bay. 

As the adventures, so the troubles of La Salle 
were now fairly begun. Some of the French being 
jealous of the powers and privileges conferred upon 
him by the patents of the King, had circulated 
among the Indians false stories concerning his de- 
signs. The effect of this was to render the natives 
suspicious of all his movements, and thwart, in dif- 
ferent ways, his undertaking. Even some of his 
own adherents were so influenced by these lying ru- 
mors as to desert his service. In addition to these 
trials, the Griffin, freighted with a valuable cargo of 
peltries, on its return voyage to the Niagara River, 
was lost. It was never heard of after it left Green 
Bay. Its crew consisted of six persons, all of whom 
perished. Before the fate of the new vessel was 
known, La Salle commenced his voyage in canoes 
down Lake Michigan. His company was reduced 
to fourteen persons. They embarked in four ca- 
noes. After an unpleasant, stormy passage, during 
which they were exposed to danger both from the 



268 



BEAR IN A TREE. 



elements and the savages, they succeeded in reach- 
ing its southern extremity. They here obtained 
wild game in abundance, for which they had suf- 
fered. Grape vines, too, presented their purple 
clusters for their use. As there were indications 
that Indians had recently visited this place, and 
as La Salle desired to avoid meeting them, he 
ordered his men to guard against making the least 
noise, and to keep a vigilant watch. His orders 
were disobeyed, from which disagreeable conse- 
quences had like to have ensued. One of the party 




mm 

Shooting a Bear after Grapes. 

saw a bear up in a tree, where it had probably 
climbed in order to obtain grapes, of which bears 



MIDNIGHT ROBBERY. '259 

are very fond. The temptation was too strong for 
a hunter to resist. Levelling his musket at Bruin, 
he fired and brought him to the ground. La Salle 
was displeased. He appointed a guard over the 
goods which were sheltered under the inverted 
canoes, and waited to see what would be the result 
of this act of disobedience. During the night, 
several Indians cautiously came into the camp, 
and, by creeping silently upon their bellies, suc- 
ceeded in reaching the upturned canoes without 
detection. They stole a number of articles, among 
which was a coat belonging to La Salle's servant. 
A little noise being made, the camp was alarmed, 
and every man sprang to arms. The intruders 
now professed to be friends. La Salle told them 
that that was a very singular hour for friends to 
make a visit. They replied that, having heard the 
report of a gun, they were fearful that it proceeded 
from a band of the Iroquois who had come out to 
murder them, and they had taken this method to 
satisfy themselves ; but now that they discovered 
they were European Canadians, their fears were 
allayed, and they desired to smoke with them the 
calumet of peace. They proved to be a wandering 
party of Outtagamies, or Fox Indians, from Green 
Bay. As La Salle had reason to believe that their 
minds had been poisoned with the report, which his 
foes had widely circulated, that he was an enemy 
23* 



270 A STATE OP PERPLEXITY. 

to the natives, and was making arrangements to 
drive them from their lands, or subjugate them to 
his own power, he deemed it the wisest policy to 
keep on good terms with them, if possible, and by 
kind treatment to disabuse them of this false and 
injurious impression. He therefore allowed four 
of their number to come into the camp and smoke 
pipes with them. In the morning, after these mes- 
sengers had retired, the robbery was discovered. 
This changed their relations again. La Salle 
knew that, such was the character of the Indians, 
if he allowed this offence to pass unnoticed he 
would lose their respect, and be liable to a repeti- 
tion of the same thing. He determined to put on 
a bold front and demand restitution. Finding two 
of their men in the woods, he seized and made 
them captives. One of these he sent back to his 
chief, with the message that, if the stolen articles 
were not returned, he would put the other one to 
death. The Indians were greatly perplexed. The 
coat and other articles had been cut into fragments, 
the buttons stripped off, and the parts divided 
among different individuals. To return them was 
impossible. Still, as they were unwilling that one 
of their men should be executed, they resolved to 
deliver the prisoner from the hands of the French 
by force. Warlike demonstrations were made on 
both sides. A conflict seemed inevitable, yet both 



LOSS OF THE GRIFFIN. 271 

parties desired to avoid it. Before a drop of 
blood was shed, recourse was had to a parley. 
Two Indian elders, having their safety guarantied 
them, came to the French camp and stated that the 
robbery was condemned, and that they would cheer- 
fully restore the stolen articles if they had not been 
cut to pieces. As it was, they agreed to return 
such things as were uninjured, and pay a fair com- 
pensation for the rest. Their proposition was 
accepted. Hostile demonstrations ceased, and the 
affair, which cauie near resulting in a bloody con- 
flict, was terminated with feasts, dances, and other 
demonstrations of joy. So much for firing con- 
trary to orders. Soon after this, La Salle entered 
the Miami, now called the St. Joseph's River. At 
the junction of this river with Lake Michigan he 
erected a fort, and called it Fort Miami. After 
suffering for want of food, they were greatly 
cheered by the arrival of the Chevalier de Tonty 
with a quantity of fresh venison. The sad intelli- 
gence was here communicated to La Salle of the 
probable loss of the Griffin. He had expected to 
have met her here with supplies from Canada, and 
now for the first time he learnt that she had not 
been heard of since she sailed from Green Bay. 
This was a great loss — the vessel and cargo being 
valued at twelve thousand dollars. La Salle, how- 
ever, was not to be discouraged. Leaving the 



273 LA SALLE GETS LOST. 

Miami River, he pushed on with his party, which 
had been increased to thirty, to the portage. He 
here got separated from his company. When 
night overtook him, he fired his gun as a signal. 
He listened attentively to hear from what direction 
the answer would come, but listened in vain. Pres- 
ently he saw a light. He approached it. It was 
a fire kindled in the woods, with no one near it. 
A bed of leaves was near by, which had evidently 
been just used by some one, perhaps an Indian, 
who had been frightened by the report of the gun. 
La Salle appropriated the fire and bed to his own 
use. It being the month of December, and the 
snow falling, the discovery of these comforts was 
very timely. He slept quietly till morning. He 
succeeded the next day in rejoining his compan- 
ions. During his rambles he saw two opossums 
hanging by their long tails from the branches of 
trees. He attacked, and succeeded in killing them 
with a club ; then fastening them to his belt, car- 
ried them into camp. After hanging up letters in 
conspicuous places upon the branches of trees, 
with instructions for the captain of the Griffin, in 
case he should return, they carried their boats and 
merchandise over the portage, and launched again 
upon the Kankakee, the eastern branch of the Illi- 
nois. It was a cold, wet, disagreeable winter's 
voyage down the river in open canoes. Their 



A WILD BULL KILLED. 



273 



food became exhausted, and game was scarce. 



The 

men were hungry and discouraged. But, says 
Father Hennepin, "God's providence supported us 
all the while ; and when we, through the extremities 







La Salle hunting Opossums. 

we were reduced to, were past all hopes of remedy, 
we found a prodigious big wild bull lying fast in 
the mud of the river. We killed him, and had 
much ado to get him out of the mud. This was 
a great refreshment to our men, and revived their 
courage ; for, being so timely, unexpectedly re- 
lieved, they concluded that God approved our 
design." 

After floating in their exposed, uncomfortable 



274 new year's day. 

manner more than three hundred miles, they arrived 
at a large Indian village on the banks of the Illi- 
nois, near the mouth of the Fox River. Although 
there were between four and five hundred huts, not 
a single native could be found. As this was the 
season of the year for taking those animals whose 
furs were valuable, all the inhabitants were gone to 
their hunting-grounds for that purpose. Upon ex- 
amining the premises, the men found a large quan- 
tity of corn buried in safe places in the ground. 
As they had been living entirely upon flesh, they 
were highly gratified at their discovery. La Salle 
seized about fifty bushels of it, and had it conveyed 
to the canoes, with the intention of paying the own- 
ers for it, if he should ever find them, as " the most 
sensible wrong one can do them, in their opinion, is 
to take some of their corn in their absence." 

The 1st of January, 16S0, opened with the usual 
salutations of the season. Mass was said, after 
which, as there had been much dissatisfaction ex- 
pressed by the men, Father Hennepin says, "I 
thought fit to make a pathetical exhortation to our 
grumblers, to encourage them to go on cheerfully, 
and inspire them with union and confidence. Father 
Gabriel, Zenobe, and I embraced them afterwards, 
and they promised us to continue firm in their 
duty." 

At the close of their religious services they 



MEANING OF PEORIA. 275 

resumed their voyage, and soon entered into an ex- 
pansion of the river, three miles broad, which ex- 
tended twenty miles in length. It was called Pimi- 
teony, but is now marked on the maps as Lake 
Peoria. The Indian name signified, according to 
Hennepin, a place where there is abundance of fat 
beasts. They here had an unexpected interview 
with some natives, the account of which will be 
given in the next chapter. 



276 



CHAPTER XXII. 

A Village. — Bold Approach. — La Salle's Policy. — Three Cal- 
umets. — Friendly Understanding'. — Ceremonious Hospitality. — 
La Salle's Explanation. — Pay for Corn. — Sudden Change. — 
Effect of Slander. — More terrible Stories. — Deserters. — A 
Proposition. — Fort of the Broken Heart. — Ship-building. — 
Bold Resolution. — Troubles accumulate. — A constant Friend. — 
Change of Plan. — Tonty with the Illinois. — Alarming Re- 
port. — Tonty's Danger. — Sudden Retreat. — Father de la Ri- 
bourde walks in the Wood. — Never returns. — His Death. — 
Painful Travelling. — Sieur de Boisrondet lost. — His Adven- 
tures. — Three great Captains. 

As our voyagers left the lower end of the narrow, 
elongated Lake Pimiteony, they suddenly came upon 
an encampment of savages, of the Illinois tribe, 
which occupied both sides of the stream. What 
shall be done 1 If these are Illinois, as is probably 
the case, they are the enemies of the French. This 
La Salle had frequently heard since he left home. 
He feared that they had heard the rumors against 
him which had received their origin in Canada, and 
of course would be ready to repel those whom they 
had been taught to look upon as foes plotting their 
ruin. La Salle, as the emergency required, used 
great caution. He ordered the canoes into a line 
stretching across the river, himself being at the 



THE THREE CALUMETS. 277 

right, and the Chevalier de Tonty with his iron hand 
supplying the place of one he had lost, at the left. 
When the Indians saw the little flotilla coming 
boldly and rapidly down upon them, they were 
thrown into a state of great consternation. Some 
fled for safety, some ran to their arms, and some 
broke forth into hideous bowlings. La Salle was 
the first to leap on shore. He neither pursued the 
Indians nor made any warlike movements. He had 
no desire for conflict. He preferred that all his in- 
tercourse with the natives should be of a peaceful 
character. He halted on the shore, to give them 
time to recover from their surprise, and to exhibit 
by their actions whether they were in a friendly or 
belligerent mood. After a while the Indians paused 
and gazed at their invaders. La Salle might have 
raised his calumet and made a proffer of peace. 
But as this might have been construed into cowardice 
by the savages, he preferred that the first demonstra- 
tion should come from them. After making a dis- 
tant examination of them for a while, the savages 
raised three calumets. These La Salle was pleased 
to see, and, in reply, he presented his. This inter- 
change of peaceful proposals being mutually ac- 
cepted, was followed by loud shouts of joy. The 
two parties were at once upon friendly terms, and 
the remainder of the day was spent in merriment 
and festivity. The hospitality of the Indians was 
24 



278 



INDIAN HOSPITALITY. 



truly refreshing. They not only furnished food to 
the weary voyagers, putting the three first pieces into 
their mouths with great ceremony, but they also 




Raising the three Calumets. 

rubbed their legs with bears' oil and buffalo fat, 
which, after their long, wet, and wearisome journey, 
was an extremely grateful service. 

La Salle took an early opportunity to explain to 
them the objects of his expedition, commencing his 
statement with an acknowledgment of his having 
taken corn from their hiding-places to keep himself 
from starving, and that he would now cheerfully pay 
them for it ; or he would return what was still on 
hand, and pay for the rest, just as they preferred. 



SUDDEN CHANGE OF CONDUCT. 279 

As European implements were to them more diffi- 
cult to be obtained than corn, they preferred to part 
with their grain in barter. Accordingly, La Salle 
paid them in axes and other tools for what he had 
taken, thus making it to them a profitable traffic. 
This matter being adjusted, he informed them that 
he had come to teach them "the knowledge of the 
Captain of heaven and earth, and the use of fire- 
arms, which were unknown to them ; " but he said 
nothing of his intention to explore the Mississippi. 
His principal object was to render permanent the 
friendship between them. During the day every 
thing passed off favorably, and the two parties re- 
tired at night on the best of terms. But the next 
day it was evident that a decided change had taken 
place. The French were treated with great cool- 
ness and suspicion. La Salle was surprised. He 
knew not how to account for it. He was solicitous 
to ascertain the cause, and to guard against any un- 
pleasant results. Upon inquiry, he learnt from one 
of the chiefs, that a chief of the Fox Indians, named 
Monso, had secretly visited them, and had called a 
meeting of the principal men of the village at night. 
He warned them to be on their guard against La 
Salle, as he was in alliance with their powerful ene- 
mies the Iroquois, who were closely following him in 
large numbers, and with whom he intended to make 
an attack upon this Illinois encampment. This 



280 EFFECT OF SLANDER. 

information he said he had received from some of 
La Salle's own nation, who were unwilling that the 
Illinois should be betrayed. 

The coolness and distrust of the Indians were 
now accounted for. La Salle perfectly understood 
the light in which he was viewed by them, and at 
once set himself to work to rebut the slanders of 
Monso. In this attempt he was, to a great degree, 
successful. But when he informed them of his de- 
sign, which hitherto he had concealed from them, of 
going down the Mississippi, they endeavored to ter- 
rify him from it. They represented the river as 
full of whirlpools, dangerous rocks, crocodiles, and 
other huge monsters. Although La Salle treated 
these stories as mere chimeras, yet on his men they 
produced such disheartening results that six of them 
deserted him and commenced their return home- 
wards. This was another painful blow. It affected 
him more deeply than all the opposition he antici- 
pated from the Indians. He promised the others 
that, if they would remain with him till the spring, 
and should then not wish to go down the Mississippi, 
he would furnish them with a canoe with which to 
return home. But to make the attempt now, in the 
depth of winter, when game was scarce and the cold 
severe, would be very hazardous. 

In order to furnish them with employment, and 
thus give a new direction to their thoughts and 



FORT OF THE BROKEN HEART. 281 

feelings, he commenced the erection of a fort a 
short distance below the Indian encampment, and 
near the location of the present town of Peoria. 
After it was finished, he gave it a name expressive 
of the sadness of his feelings under the accumulated 
trials which he had experienced, calling it the Fort 
of Crevecceur, that is, the Fort of the Broken 
Heart. They also commenced to work upon a 
brigantine, with which to navigate the Mississippi. 
They felled trees, burnt charcoal, hewed timber, 
and, in the course of six weeks, constructed the hull 
of a vessel. But they were at a loss for rings, bolts, 
and rigging with which to finish it. These articles 
had been stowed on board the Griffin, and with her 
had perished. Yet they could not do without them. 
What was to be done was a question more easily 
asked than answered. After most anxious thought, 
La Salle came to the bold determination of return- 
ing to Fort Frontenac, a distance of twelve hundred 
miles, and there procuring all necessary articles. 
With five companions, he set out and successfully 
accomplished the long, perilous, and fatiguing jour- 
ney. When he arrived there, he found his affairs in 
a most wretched condition. The loss of twelve 
thousand dollars by the Griffin was confirmed. 
Another vessel, ladened with a valuable cargo for 
him, was lost in the Bay of St. Lawrence ; his ca- 
noes, filled with merchandise, were wrecked among 
24* 



282 LA salle's troubles. 

the rapids of the river ; his agents robbed him of 
the profits of an extensive trade ; some of his goods 
were stolen and carried off; and to cap the climax 
of his troubles, his creditors, having heard the ma- 
licious report of his enemies, that he and his whole 
company were drowned, had seized upon the little 
property which he had left, and sold it greatly under 
its true value. Such a combination of disasters was 
enough to have crushed any but the most resolute 
heart. In the depth of his trials it was fortunate 
for La Salle that he found an unwavering friend in 
the Count de Frontenac, who still extended to him 
his encouragement and influence. 

Though his intention of exploring the Mississippi 
was not abandoned, the plan of its execution was 
now altered. He relinquished the idea of using 
brigantines, or boats rigged with sails, and concluded 
to use canoes. 

To return now to the Fort of the Broken Heart : 
After La Salle left, the Chevalier de Tonty, at the 
orders of La Salle, commenced the erection of a 
fort in another place. Whilst engaged in this, he 
received word that a mutiny had broken out at Fort 
Crevecoeur. He immediately returned, and found 
that half of those whom he left there had deserted. 
Not satisfied with this, they had stolen as much mer- 
chandise as they could carry away. As the provis- 
ions of the company were now greatly reduced, 



STARTLING RUMOR. 283 

Tonty concluded to make it his home in the village 
of the Illinois, just above them, and take the men 
with him. His conduct among these Indians was so 
discreet that he was successful in securing their con- 
fidence. He taught them how to construct a fort, 
and the mode of using fire-arms. The missionaries 
of the party, Fathers Gabriel de la Ribourde and 
Zenobe Membre, employed themselves in their ap- 
propriate work of imparting religious instruction to 
the natives. They met, however, with but little 
success. 

In the month of September, the whole Illinois 
camp was thrown into consternation by the report 
that a large army of the Iroquois and the Miamis 
were coming upon them, and that La Salle was with 
them. Tliis latter rumor of La Salle's confederacy 
with the enemy awakened the suspicion among the 
Illinois that all the French whom they had so hospi- 
tably entertained during the summer were also in 
league with them ; and, therefore, some were in 
favor of their immediate execution. Tonty had to 
exhibit great skill and shrewdness to convince them 
of the contrary. The report of La Salle's presence 
was false. It arose from the fact that one of the 
Iroquois chiefs had arrayed himself in a European 
dress, and at a distance resembled La Salle. The 
enemy made their appearance, but, through the in- 
terposition of the French, a collision was avoided. 



284 SUDDEN RETREAT. 

The Illinois, however, secretly retreated, carrying 
all their movables with them, leaving the French to 
take care of themselves. Tonty now saw that he 
would be wholly in the power of the Iroquois, who 
would be likely to regard him and his companions 
as helpless enemies, whom they would not hesitate 
to plunder, and perhaps murder. Acting, therefore, 
upon the principle that discretion is the better part 
of valor, he and his companions secretly took their 
departure in an old canoe, and paddled up the river 
as rapidly as possible, trusting to a kind Providence 
to provide them with food, of which they were 
entirely destitute. The next day their canoe struck 
a rock, and was injured. They put into the shore 
for repairs. Whilst these were in progress, Father 
Gabriel de la Ribourde was tempted, by the beauty 
of the scenery, to indulge in a ramble along the river- 
side, taking with him his breviary and prayer book. 
He was absent so long that his companions were 
alarmed. When the repairs were completed, they 
all started in search of him. They shouted and 
fired their guns to attract his attention, but to no 
purpose. The darkness of night set in, and he did 
not return. As they had discovered recent foot- 
prints, and fearing they might be those of the Iro- 
quois, they concluded to spend the night on the other 
side of the river. The next day they returned and 
continued their search for their lost religious teacher. 



FATHER RIBOURDE KILLED. 285 

In this manner they spent nearly the whole day, but 
without success. They then slowly prosecuted their 
journey, carefully looking out as they advanced, 
with the hope that he might have gone up the river 
shore, and be waiting for them upon some project- 
ing or shady bank above. In this they were disap- 
pointed. He was never seen again. They pur- 
sued their course with hearts filled with sorrow. It 
was afterwards ascertained that he was murdered 
with clubs by three Kickapoo Indians, belonging to 
a war party who had come from the Wisconsin 
Territory to fight the Iroquois. They scalped him, 
and carried off his breviary and prayer book. These 
afterwards came into the possession of a Jesuit mis- 
sionary. 

The party were soon obliged to abandon their 
canoe and betake themselves to land. After travel- 
ling two hundred miles through forests and marshes, 
crossing a number of rivers, and living the whole 
time upon roots, nuts, or other articles which they 
could obtain, they reached a village of the Potta- 
watimies. Their garments were in rags, their feet 
torn, their strength exhausted, and their appetite 
voracious. Right glad were they to find a place 
where they could rest themselves, find enough to eat, 
and sleep under shelter and in safety. 

One of their number, the Sieur de Boisrondet, at 
one time got lost from them, and was gone ten 



286 ADVENTURES OF BOISRONDET. 

days. He carried a musket, but was destitute of 
balls and flint. But Necessity, that prolific mother 
of ingenious expedients, came to his relief, and 
taught him to melt his pewter dish into balls and to 
fire his gun with a coal. He managed in this man- 
ner to shoot some wild turkeys, which furnished him 
with acceptable food. The Pottawatimies, having 
traded with the Canadians, regarded their French 
visitors as friends, and treated them with great 
kindness. Their head chief was accustomed, with 
some flattery and no little egotism, to say that " he 
knew of but three great captains in the world — 
Frontenac, La Salle, and himself." In the spring 
this party reached Mackinac. Here they waited 
until June, 1681, for La Salle, when they had the 
pleasure of seeing him enter the harbor. He had 
been down the Illinois, visited the Fort of the Broken 
Heart, had found it forsaken, and after examining 
the ruins of the Illinois village, which had been 
burnt by the Iroquois, had returned again to Mack- 
inac. He had also been to the fort which he had 
erected at the mouth of the Miami River, and found 
it plundered and destroyed. This had been the work 
of the deserters. He was now on his way to Can- 
ada to get new recruits with whom to renew his 
exploration of the Mississippi. After spending a 
short time with them, he hastened to Canada and 
completed his arrangements. 



287 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

The Parly. — Women and Children with them. — Employments 
of the Women. — Ice. — A Man lost. — Unnecessary Alarm. — 
Means of Defence. — Friendly Relations. — La Salle takes Pos- 
session. — Indian King. — Native Royalty. — Permanent Dwell- 
ings. — A Canoe chased. — Numerous Natives. — Respect for 
the Calumet. — Natchez. — Escort. — Abandoned Village. — 
Horrid Spectacle. — Three Channels. — A Party explores 
each. — The Gulf of Mexico reached. — La Salle takes Pos- 
session of Louisiana. — Evidence of Possession. — He re- 
turns. — Ascent of the River difficult. 

As we before intimated, La Salle abandoned 
the intention of exploring the Mississippi with boats 
rigged with sails, and concluded to use canoes. 
These were cheaper, more easily managed, and 
were not dependent upon the wind. 

His party this time numbered fifty-four, of whom 
twenty-three were French, eighteen were Indians 
called Abenakies and Loups, ten were women, and 
three were children. It will appear to the reader 
probably as very singular that, in an expedition of 
discovery like this, in open boats, on dangerous 
waters, in the winter season, and through savage 
tribes, women should be found. These were Indian 
women. The practice was universal among the ab- 
origines of the country for the women to perform 



288 ANOTHER EXPEDITION. 

the heaviest share of the labor. They not only did 
the work of the wigwam, but obtained fuel, tilled 
the ground, and on the journeys carried the burdens. 
The warriors regarded it enough for them to do the 
fighting and the hunting. The women did the 
rest. They were the slaves of the men. This will 
account for their presence in this expedition. 
Whether it was a privilege or a right, the Indians 
insisted that the women should accompany them, 
and perform, as far as was necessary, their accus- 
tomed service. The children were probably infants, 
which some of the squaws carried, suspended to 
their backs. The party were all assembled at the 
Chicago River, near the south-western shore of 
Lake Michigan, early in January, 1682. As the 
marshes and small rivers were frozen over, rough 
sleds were made, on which were placed the canoes, 
merchandise, and provisions, which were drawn in 
this manner up the Chicago, across the portage to 
the Illinois, and down the latter river to the lake of 
the same name, called by the Indians Pimiteony. 
As the river here was found to be open, the canoes 
were launched, and the party fairly commenced 
their voyage. Passing by the Illinois village, which 
they found deserted, and Fort Crevecccur, which was 
re-garrisoned, on the 6th of February they came 
out upon the broad bosom of the Mississippi. 
Passing by the mouth of the Missouri on the west, 



UNNECESSARY ALARM. 289 

and of the Ohio on the east, they arrived at the 
Chickasaw Bluffs on the 26th of the same month. 

A company of the hunters landed, and went in 
pursuit of game. When they returned, one of their 
number was missing. His name was Pierre Prud- 
homme. The solicitude of the whole company was 
awakened in his behalf. Every effort was employed 
to discover his fate. As a prudential arrangement, 
La Salle threw up an entrenchment and dignified it 
with the name of Fort Prudhomme, by which it was 
known for a long time. The conviction gradually 
settled in the minds of the company that the lost 
one was either slain or captured by the Indians. 
But after waiting nine days, their sadness gave place 
to joy at beholding the absent one come into camp. 
He had lost his companions, and had spent this 
whole time in wandering among the forests to find 
his way to the canoes. 

The party now resumed their voyage, and, after 
floating about a hundred miles, they were suddenly 
startled by hearing the mingled sounds of drums 
and of human voices on the western side of the 
river. The noise was a call of alarm. To be pre- 
pared for a collision, if one must come, La Salle 
crossed to the eastern side of the river, landed, cut 
down some trees, and constructed a rude place of 
defence. All this proved to be unnecessary. When 
the Indians, who were of the Arkansas tribe, made 
25 



290 LA SALLE TAKES POSSESSION. 

their appearance, the calumet which was presented 
to them was accepted. Friendly relations were at 
once established. They cordially invited the French 
to visit them, who accepted their invitation and went 
over to their village. They there found huts pro- 
vided for their accommodation, fuel for their fires, 
and a plentiful supply of provisions. Several days 
were here spent in feasting and merriment. 

La Salle here took formal possession of the 
country in the name of the Ring of France. With 
as much of external pomp and religious ceremony 
as were at his command, he erected in a conspicuous 
place the symbolic cross, and, adorning it with the 
arms of France, he with religious services, declared 
the country to be one of the possessions of his 
King. The savages were highly pleased at the dis- 
play, and probably regarded it as one of the amuse- 
ments of their pale-faced visitors. There is some- 
thing painfully affecting in beholding these ignorant, 
but free sons of the forest gazing with joy at those 
ceremonies by which their own country is declared 
to belong to another. 

After spending two weeks with these Indians, who 
were found to possess a friendly and cheerful spirit, 
the voyagers bade them adieu, and passed on to the 
south. By the 20th of March they reached another 
tribe, called the Taensas. Their villages were ro- 
mantically situated on the borders of a lake. 



INDIAN ROYALTY. 291 

Father Zenobe and the iron-handed Tonty were ap- 
pointed by La Salle his ambassadors to represent 
him at the court of the King. Taking with them 
presents, they visited his village and sought an intro- 
duction. They found him living in greater dignity 
than chiefs in general aspired to. Like monarchs 
of civilized nations, he was surrounded with cour- 
tiers and servants, who appeared to treat him with 
the greatest reverence. He received the ambassa- 
dors with great courtesy, and, after extending to 
them special civilities, he informed them that he 
should visit their chief. A time was fixed for the 
visit ; but two hours previously a company of In- 
dians came to prepare the way for his majesty, and 
to erect an awning to protect him from the sun. 
Finally the King himself came in great state. He 
was not arrayed in a robe of furs or dried skins, 
which the chiefs usually wore on occasions of cere- 
mony, but in a white garment, made from the bark 
of trees. Before him walked three individuals, two 
of whom bore fans made of long white plumes, and 
the third carried two highly-polished plates of cop- 
per. With this display of barbaric splendor he 
visited the French camp, where he was received in 
a manner befitting his rank. During the interview, 
though his deportment was marked by the usual 
Indian gravity, he gave evidence of confidence and 
of friendship. 



292 



CHASING A CANOE. 



These Indians were more civilized than the more 
northern tribes. Their dwellings were more perma- 
nently and substantially built, and were furnished in 
a more convenient and comfortable manner. Their 
dead were interred in temples, highly embellished. 

After leaving the Taensas, the party proceeded 
some forty miles, when a solitary canoe was discov- 
ered upon the river. The brave De Tonty immedi- 
ately gave chase ; but he did not pursue it far before 
a crowd of savages were seen upon the shore. This 
was sufficient to cause him to desist. La Salle or- 
dered all his men to make for the opposite shore. 
It was uncertain what the result would be. The 
Indians might construe the chasing of the canoe into 
a declaration of war ; and if so, they would proba- 
bly make an attack upon the French. La Salle 
adopted prudential measures. When, however, the 
two parties met, the revered calumet prevented all 
difficulties, and brought them into friendly relations. 
They were fishermen, and belonged to the Natchez 
tribe. By their invitation, some of the French vis- 
ited their encampment, where they received nought 
but hospitality and kindness. Here La Salle and 
his ecclesiastics again went through with the cere- 
mony of taking possession of the country in the 
name of the King of France. 

When they returned to their camp, they were ac- 
companied by a number of distinguished persons, 



THE OUTLET OF THE MISSISSIPPI. 293 

among whom was the chief of Koroa, a town six 
miles below, who invited them to visit his place, 
which they did. 

After floating a hundred miles farther down the 
crooked current of the river, they discovered some 
Indians fishing, who hastily fled upon seeing the 
strangers. Four of La Salle's party were sent out 
as scouts. They were received with a shower of 
arrows and the loud shouts of war. The assailants 
proved to be Quinipisas. Without returning their 
fire, La Salle sailed on, and soon came to a village 
which presented a horrid spectacle. The houses 
were all forsaken ; but when they were entered they 
were found to have been scenes of war and blood. 
Many dead bodies, scattered about in the different 
tenements, showed that a terrific conflict had taken 
place. 

Three days after, being the 6th of April, La Salle 
discovered a pleasing sight — it was the division of 
the river into three branches. He knew from this 
circumstance that he was approaching its mouth, 
that his voyage was nearly at an end, and that he 
was on the verge of one of the greatest discoveries 
of his age. He formed his party into three divis- 
ions, and ordered one to each branch. In this man- 
ner they floated on, until the great question was 
solved by the discovery that the" waters of the Mis- 
sissippi were discharged into the Gulf of Mexico. 
25* 



294 IMPRESSIVE SERVICE. 

The three parties met, and on the next day the im- 
posing ceremony of taking possession was again 
performed. In an elevated place, above the reach 
of tide-water and of the rise of the river, a column 
and a cross were erected, on the former of which 
were suspended the arms of France, with the in- 
scription, "Louis the Great, King of France 
and Navarre, reigns ; the 9th of April, 1682." 
A Tc Deum was solemnly chanted, after which, in 
honor of the important occasion, they fired their 
muskets, and mingled with the reports loud shouts 
of " Long live the King." Upon the erection of the 
column, the commander of the expedition made an 
official address, in which he claimed the whole of 
Louisiana, with all its people, seas, harbors, and all 
the rivers emptying into the Mississippi, (which he 
called the St. Louis,) for the French King. 

To furnish evidence which might be of future ser- 
vice in proof of his having taken actual possession 
in the name of his majesty then on the throne of 
France, La Salle obtained a leaden plate, on which 
he wrote, in Latin, an inscription, stating that the 
first navigators of the Mississippi, from the Illinois 
to the Gulf of Mexico, were La Salle, Tonty, Ze- 
nobia, and twenty Frenchmen. This was buried at 
the foot of a tree. He also had an account drawn 
up in documentary form, properly certified by a 
notary, to which were affixed the names of thirteen 



la salle's death. 295 

of the principal persons who had accompanied 
him. 

The great object of the expedition being now ac- 
complished, through the adventurous, enterprising, 
and courageous spirit of La Salle, he commenced 
his return. This was found far more difficult than 
the descent of the river, in consequence of the 
strong current against which the canoes had to con- 
tend. He was further delayed by sickness. He did 
not reach the Miami River till the end of Sep- 
tember. 

After this the Sieur La Salle adopted measures to 
form a colony on the banks of the Mississippi, in 
Louisiana. But, in attempting to reach the river by 
the Gulf of Mexico, he passed its mouth and lost 
his way. Difficulties sprang up between him and 
Beaujeu, the commander of the squadron, who re- 
fused to return and seek for the river. The conse- 
quence was, La Salle and his company landed on 
the western shore of the gulf. His boats were 
wrecked ; his property was lost ; his plan failed ; 
and he was finally assassinated by some of his own 
men. 



296 



CHAPTER XXIV. 

Father Hennepin. — A Fleet of Canoes. — Hennepin interrupts 
it. — Is captured. — Crying' Indians. — Prisoners doomed to 
die. — Hennepin's Course. — Captivity instead of Death. — 
Strength of the Natives. — Dance of the Reed. — Chief Aqui- 
paguetin. — Makes a Feast. — Singular Conduct. — Indian Cun- 
ning. — Lake of Tears. — Captives in Suspense. — Mode of 
kindling a Fire. — Falls of St. Anthony. — Separation of the 
Captives. — Pace quickened by Fire. — The Chalice a supposed 
Spirit. — A comic Musician. — Hennepin adopted. — His Treat- 
ment. — Ridiculous Scene. — Indian Sweat. — The Compass. — 
The Pot and Lion. — Mode of learning the Language. — Putting 
Black to White. — Infant Baptism. — Infant dies. — Hennepin's 
consoling Reflections. 

Just before La Salle departed from Fort Creve- 
coeur, on his return to Canada to obtain rigging and 
stores for his new brigantine which he was building 
on the Illinois River, he sent Father Hennepin on a 
voyage of discovery to the sources of the Mississippi. 
He was a man of courage, and, in consequence of 
his travels and labors among the aborigines, he had 
much experience of Indian life and customs. Being 
also fond of the excitement of penetrating into new 
countries and among uncivilized tribes, he was a 
suitable person to go upon such an expedition. 

But before proceeding to give an account of 
Father Hennepin, it is proper to say that, in his own 



FATHER HENNEPIN. 297 

narrative of his adventures, he is constantly aiming 
at effect. He abounds with exaggerations, and some 
of his statements are manifestly false. Besides, he 
is extremely egotistical, keeping himself constantly 
and prominently before the reader. His statements, 
therefore, should be received with all due allowance 
for these peculiarities. In drawing up the following 
sketch from his account, much was rejected, because 
it made too great demands upon our credulity. 

Taking with him two Frenchmen, Picard de Gay 
and Michael Ako, Hennepin departed from the Fort 
of the Broken Heart, February 29, 1680. Nothing 
of importance happened till the 12th of April, when, 
as he was repairing his canoe, and his men cooking 
bustards on the bank of the Mississippi, probably in 
the neighborhood of Wisconsin River, they saw a 
fleet of fifty bark canoes, manned with a hundred 
and twenty naked Indians, coming down the river 
with great speed, in order to surprise the Miamis 
and Illinois below. Hennepin upset his dinner pot, 
threw away the broth, and, carrying the half-cooked 
bustard with him, he pushed out into the river, hailed 
the flying fleet, and cried out three times in the Iro- 
quois and Algonquin dialects, "Comrades, we are men 
of wooden canoes," as that is the appellation of those 
who sail in ships. This attempt at a friendly inter- 
view was unsuccessful. Some fired arrows at them, 
others leaped out of their canoes, some on the sand, 



298 FATHER HENNEPIN CAPTURED. 

others in the water, and in a few moments the three 
voyagers were surrounded by the whole band of sav- 
ages, who filled the air with their loud shrieks and 
outcries. Resistance was useless. They showed 
their calumet, and distributed some Martinico tobac- 
co, better than that which the Indians could obtain ; 
but all was unavailing. They were taken prisoners. 
The French informed their captors that the Miamis 
had fled to the Illinois. When they thus saw that 
their plot to surprise their enemies was discovered, 
they laid their hands on the head of Hennepin, and, 
as he says, " they wept bitterly, accompanying their 
tears with such mournful accents as can hardly be 
expressed ; till, with a sorry handkerchief of Ar- 
menian cloth which I had left, I made a shift to 
dry up their tears." The prisoners were now in- 
formed that they were doomed to death. Upon the 
reception of this intelligence, Hennepin went to the 
chiefs, presented them with six hatchets, fifteen 
knives, and some tobacco ; after which he bent down 
his head and pointed to a hatchet, signifying to 
them in that manner that he threw himself upon 
their mercy. This produced the desired effect. 
The Indians, instead of executing the prisoners, 
gave them beaver flesh to eat, and informed them 
that, instead of slaying, they intended to carry them 
into captivity. To this Hennepin had but little ob- 
jection, as he thought it would be favorable to his 



DANCE OF THE REED. 299 

making discoveries among - them. As the canoe of 
Hennepin was more heavily ladened than theirs, it 
was difficult for him and his two men to keep up 
with them. They therefore put four or live of theii 
own Indians in, to assist in rowing it. In this man- 
ner Hennepin kept in their company on the river 
for nineteen days together. Although the Indians 
were very powerful at their oars, and would row 
from morning to night, scarcely allowing themselves 
time to take their meals, yet, when evening came, 
instead of going to sleep, the youngest of the war- 
riors would go to four or five of their chiefs, and 
engage in the dance of the reed till midnight. The 
chief before whom they danced would then send, 
with some ceremony, a warrior of his own family 
to make them smoke by turns in his own reed of 
war, which is distinguished from a calumet by the 
character of its feathers. It is not unlikely that the 
young warriors went through this extra fatigue of 
the dance for the sake of the pleasures of the pipe 
which they knew would be their reward. 

On one of the nineteen days that he was with 
them upon the river they made a halt, at noon, on 
the west side of the Mississippi. A chief named 
Aquipaguetin had killed a large fat bear and invited 
the other chiefs to a feast ; after which the Indians, 
having their faces fancifully marked, the figure of 
some animal painted on their bodies, their heads orna- 



300 INDIAN CRAFTINESS. 

mented with red and white feathers, began a dance. 
They placed their hands upon their hips, stamped 
with great violence upon the ground, and jumped 
awkwardly about in uncouth figures. During the 
dance, a son of one of the masters of ceremonies, 
who appeared to weep profusely, made them all 
smoke the pipe of war. His father, who was 
equally affected, would sometimes address the war- 
riors, and sometimes Hennepin, laying his hands 
upon his head and upon those of his men, and then, 
lifting his eyes towards heaven, would pronounce the 
word Louis, which in their language signified sun, 
appealing to him for justice, and striving to stir up 
his followers to avenge his son's death. All this 
was any thing but agreeable to the captives. They 
afterwards learnt tliat the chief was seeking their 
death, but, being opposed by some of his own peo- 
ple, he abandoned the intention. After this he re- 
sorted to a singular artifice to obtain from the 
captives their merchandise. 

He had with him the bones of one of his friends 
wrapped up carefully in the skin of some animal, 
ornamented with red and black embroidery of por- 
cupine quills. The crafty chief would, from time 
to time, call his followers together to smoke, and on 
these occasions he would send for the French cap- 
tives, one after another, and make them cover the 
bones of the deceased with some of their European 



GREAT WEEPING. 301 

articles, in order to assuage his grief for the slain. 
The captives, as bidden, would throw tobacco, 
hatchets, knives, beads, and bracelets upon the 
bones ; the wily chief giving them, at the same 
time, to understand that it was not for himself, but 
for the dead and for the warriors around him, that 
he demanded these things. As for himself, he pre- 
tended that he would receive nothing from them but 
what they freely presented. Hennepin called this 
place the Lake of Tears, in consequence of the 
tears which the cunning Aquipaguetin wept there 
every night. After he had wearied himself with 
crying, he obliged one of his sons to come and 
supply his place. The object of this, as Hennepin 
thought, was to excite the Indians to murder him, 
and then to pursue their enemies and revenge the 
death of one of his sons whom they had slain. 
Aquipaguetin and his sons were not the only ones 
who manifested such deep feeling. Many nights in 
succession the elders of the Indians came and wept 
over them. They would then rub the arms and 
bodies of their captives, and afterwards lay their 
hands upon their heads, as if praying for them, or 
else bewailing their doom. The French knew not 
how to interpret this conduct. It was to them a 
mystery. Their apprehensions were excited, so 
that they obtained but little rest by day or night. 
One day a chief came to Hennepin and his two 
26 



302 



NOVEL MODE OF KINDLING FIRE. 



men, and, after cutting down some grass, he placed 
it in three piles, and invited them to sit down upon 
them as cushions. He then thrust a stick of hard 
wood into a piece of cedar full of small holes, and, 
by rubbing it rapidly between the palms of his 
hands, soon kindled a fire from the friction. They 



-^fefete 




Indian Mode of kindling a Fire. 

looked on in ignorance of his object, confident, 
however, that in a short time it would develop itself. 
They were not mistaken. Having succeeded in 
producing fire, he took his calumet, or pipe of peace, 
filled it with tobacco, and, after weeping over them 
some time, gave the pipe to Hennepin and made 
him smoke, and then informed him that in sixteen 



PAINFUL TRAVELLING. 303 

days they would be at home. At the end of nine- 
teen days they had arrived within a short distance 
of the Falls on the Mississippi, to which Hennepin 
gave the name of St. Anthony, in honor of the saint 
of that name. They here paused. After some con- 
sultation, the Indians separated the three French- 
men. This was a new trial. Whilst together, they 
enjoyed the privilege of conversation and of mutual 
sympathy and encouragement ; but when separated, 
as they were ignorant of the language of the In- 
dians, they could converse with no one ; they were 
shut up to their own fears, reflections, and designs. 
When separated, they were given to three chiefs, 
who had lost sons in war. Their canoe was de- 
stroyed, so as to prevent their escape ; and those of 
the Indians were concealed. Their goods, also, were 
taken from them. They were now obliged to travel 
on foot. When they came to rivers, they swam 
them. As the weather was cold, and ice was 
formed, they would sometimes be so severely 
wounded by the sharp edges of the ice that, when 
they came out of the water, they would be covered 
with blood. Father Hennepin became so exhausted 
that he sometimes laid down with a determination 
to die, rather than follow the savages any farther. 
But his captors knew how to shake his determina- 
tion. They would set fire to the dry grass over 
which they had travelled, and thus leave him no 



304 



DIVISION OF SPOIL. 



other choice but to march or burn. So near did 
the fire approach him that sometimes his hat fell off 
into it and got singed; but the Indians snatched 
it out again, and, seizing him by the hand, hurried 
him on. 

After travelling on foot about two hundred miles, 
enduring great hardships and many outrages, Hen- 
nepin was glad to find that they were approaching 
their settlements. The whole band now paused. 
As they were composed of different parties, and 
were here to separate, it became necessary to divide 
the spoil belonging to the captives. They were par- 
ticularly delighted with a roll of Martinico tobacco. 
It was so well prepared, and formed into such beau- 
tiful rings, that they were perfectly charmed with it. 
They also appropriated to themselves Hennepin's 
sacerdotal robes and utensils with which he per- 
formed religious service, except the chalice. That 
they did not touch. Being plated with silver, it re- 
flected the light strongly, causing them to close their 
eyes when they looked towards it. They would 
not take that, because, as he afterwards learnt, 
they supposed it was a spirit, and would, in some 
mysterious way, destroy their life. 

As the warriors approached their village, they 
were met by large numbers of women and children, 
who came out to give them a greeting and to learn 
the results of their expedition. 



A FANTASTIC MUSICIAN. 305 

Hennepin observed several huts, near the posts of 
which lay bundles of straw and dried weeds. It 
was the place where these savages were accus- 
tomed to burn their enemies taken in battle. 

Presently Picard du Gay made his appearance, 
decked in fantastic style. His hair and face were 
painted of different colors, and from the top of his 
head rose a tuft of white feathers. The savages 
had learnt that Picard could sing. Perhaps he 
had amused them by displays of his talent when 
rowing on the river. They ordered him to exercise 
it now ; so that he could say, with the exiled Jews, 
" They that carried us away captive required of us a 
song ; and they that wasted us required of us mirth." 
Refusal was out of the question. Whilst singing, as 
he had no violin or other instrument to did him, he 
accompanied his voice with a vegetable rattle, made 
of a hollow gourd, containing small stones. Hen- 
nepin knew not what to expect, whether to be sacri- 
ficed or delivered. Presently great dishes made of 
birch-trees were brought in, filled with wild oats, 
mixed with other grain, of which they were invited 
to eat. It was a friendly service. 

In the distribution of the captives, Father Henne- 
pin fell to Aquipaguetin, who apparently adopted 
him as a son, in the place of the one whom he had 
lost in war. They smoked the calumet together, 
and exchanged other courtesies, by which they sealed 
26* 



306 AN INDIAN ADOPTS HENNEPIN. 

their friendship with each other. When Aquipague- 
tin brought Hennepin to his cabin, he introduced 
him to his five wives as his son, and ordered them to 
treat him as such, and to call him by his appropriate 
title. They then set before him a bark dish, con- 
taining bremes and other fresh-water fish for him to 
eat. In the wigwam was an Indian very old, who 
wept and seemed greatly concerned that the adopted 
son was so exhausted and feeble. t He kindly rubbed 
his arms and head, and offered him a large pipe to 
smoke. A bear's skin was spread upon the floor, on 
which he was made to lie, and then one of the boys 
anointed his thighs, legs, and feet with the grease of 
wildcats, by which his skin was softened, and his 
joints, which were stiff and sore from his fatiguing 
journey, were rendered supple. 

Whilst lying there, a ridiculous scene was pre- 
sented before him. One of the sons of Aquipague- 
tin took the brocard chusable, one of the robes worn 
by Father Hennepin when engaged in his Roman 
Catholic ceremonies at the altar, and, spreading it 
out, he carefully placed upon it the bones of some 
distinguished Indian, whose memory was greatly re- 
vered, and tied them up in it ; then binding it round 
with the priest's girdle, another article of Hennepin's 
ecclesiastical dress, he threw the bundle over his 
naked back and pompously paraded around the wig- 
wam, crying out, " Louis chinnen," that is, " The 



AN INDIAN SWEAT. 



307 



robe of the sun." Hennepin's religious feelings 
must have been sensibly affected by the scene. 

Aquipaguetin clothed his newly-adopted son in 
two robes, one made of the softest part of the skins 
of buffaloes, and the other of castor or beaver skins. 
As Hennepin found it difficult to move about, in con- 
sequence of the hardships he had experienced, his 
kind relatives obliged him to take an Indian sweat. 
A large oven was built, into which he and four oth- 
ers entered entirely naked. In it were then placed 
red hot flints and stones, to heat it. He was told to 
hold his breath as long as possible. As soon as his 
savage companions had let go their breath, which 
was done with much force, Aquipaguetin, in connec- 
tion with a number of others, began a song in a loud 
tone of voice, and at the same time, laying hold of 
Hennepin, they gave him a good rubbing. The 
operation almost caused him to faint. But the rep- 
etition of it thrice a week, in the course of time 
restored him to his usual vigor. 

After his adoption, Hennepin was not treated with 
much affection. Hard work and miserable food 
were assigned him. He was compelled to cultivate 
pulse and tobacco, and live on a small quantity of 
wild rice and the roes of dried fish. The mariner's 
compass which he had with him furnished the In- 
dians no little amusement. His father Aquipague- 
tin would take it, show it to the spectators, and 



308 THE POT WITH THE LION. 

theu, turning the needle round, would let them see 
how mysteriously it would, of its own accord, slowly 
but surely move back again, and stop when it 
pointed due north. Whilst gazing with wonder at 
this strange machine, he told the Indians that it was 
this instrument which enabled white men to travel all 
over the world ; and not only so, but that white men 
were spirits, and possessed power to do many things 
which were beyond the ability of the Indians. 

Another article which seems to have been re- 
garded with more apprehension than the needle, 
especially by the women, was an iron pot which 
Hennepin had carried with him on his journey, and 
in which he was accustomed to cook his food. This 
pot had the figure of a lion upon it. The Indians 
would never touch it without first covering their 
hands with castor skin. So greatly did it terrify the 
women that they would not sleep in, nor even enter, 
a cabin where it was. Tliey had it hung out of 
doors, upon the boughs of a tree. Hennepin would 
have presented it to one of the chiefs ; but none of 
them would accept of it, because they imagined it 
contained a spirit which would destroy them. Such 
is Hennepin's account. It is not impossible that his 
story is overwrought. On some occasion, when the 
pot was heated, some of them might have taken 
hold of it, and got burnt ; and as they could not 
tell, from its appearance at any given time, whether 



PUTTING BLACK TO WHITE. 309 

it was heated or not, they might ever afterwards, as 
a prudential arrangement, have covered their hands 
with skin before they touched it. It is a suspicious 
circumstance that Hennepin should enter into the 
motives of their conduct on various occasions, when 
he candidly admits that he was entirely ignorant of 
their language, and was destitute of an interpreter. 
On this account, his explanations of their conduct, 
and his interpretation of their speeches, must be re- 
ceived with considerable allowance. 

In order to acquire a knowledge of their lan- 
guage, he made himself familiar with the children, 
and picked up words from them. After he had 
learnt how to ask, in their language, " What do 
you call this ?" he made rapid progress in ascertain- 
ing the names of different articles. But when he 
w*anted to get the Indian word for a verb, he was 
obliged to act it, and then ask them what they called 
his conduct. To learn the Indian word run, he 
would run across his cabin, and then ask them what 
he had done ; he would then set the word down. 
When they ascertained his object — that he was 
endeavoring to learn their language — they readily 
assisted him by telling the names of different ob- 
jects. One day they told him the names of all the 
parts of the human body, and were amused to see 
him write them down, or, as they expressed it, " put 
black to white." When they asked him a question, 



310 HENNEPIN AND THE INFANT. 

he would look over his manuscript dictionary to find 
the appropriate words in which to reply. This 
greatly diverted them, and they would say, " When 
we ask Father Louis any thing, (for so they had 
heard his French companions call him,) he does not 
answer us. But when he looks upon the white (they 
have no word for paper) he then talks and makes us 
understand his thoughts. This white thing," they 
would add, " must be a spirit, which teaches him to 
understand all we say." 

As he became sufficiently acquainted with the lan- 
guage to converse, he gave them what religious in- 
struction he could make them understand. 

One day Hennepin found, in one of the cabins, 
an infant dangerously sick. He told his two canoe 
men, Michael Ako and Picard du Gay, that he felt 
obliged in conscience to baptize it, as it was beyond 
recovery, and asked their opinion upon the propriety 
of his performing the ceremony. Michael Ako dis- 
approved it, because he thought it might offend the 
Indians; he would not, therefore, enter the cabin 
and witness the rite. But Hennepin, having great 
confidence in the spiritual efficacy of the service, 
could not conscientiously omit it. In his mind it 
was intimately connected with the salvation of the 
dying child ; he therefore resolved to perform it. 
We will give the account in his own language, 
leaving our readers to draw their own inferences. 



INFANT BAPTISM. 31] 

" Being followed, then, by none but Picard du Gay, 
who assisted as godfather, or, rather, witness of the 
baptism, I christened the child and named it Anto- 
netta, from St. Anthony of Padua ; and the rather, 
because the said Peter du Gay's name was Anthony 
Anguella For want of more proper uten- 
sils, I took a wooden dish, and having put some 
common, ordinary water into it, sprinkled it upon 
the head of the little savage, pronouncing the follow- 
ing words : l Creature of God, I baptize thee in the 
name of the Father, of the Son, and of the Holy 
Ghost.' Then I took half my altar-cloth, which I 
had snatched out of the hands of a savage who had 
stolen it from me, and spread it over the body of the 
infant. 

" The baptism was accompanied with no other cer- 
emony, because I was no longer in a condition to 
say mass, my sacerdotal robes being all taken from 
me. I believed the linen could not serve to a more 
proper end than a winding-sheet to the first infant 
of the country that had the happiness to be bap- 
tized. I know not how far its pains might be as- 
suaged by virtue of the linen, or what alterations it 
might feel. I am sure I saw it laughing the next 
day in its mother's arms, who believed I had cured 
her child. However, it died some time after, which 
affected me more with joy than grief. Had this 
child recovered, 'twas much to be feared 'twould 



312 hennepin's reflections. 

have trod in the steps of its forefathers, and been 
overgrown with their infamous superstitions, for 
want of a preacher to instruct it. For indeed, if 
those of its nation dwelling in darkness and igno- 
rance continue to sin without law, they shall also 
perish without law, as we are told by the apostle. 
Upon these considerations, I was glad it had pleased 
God to take this little Christian out of the world, 
lest it might have fallen into temptations had it re- 
covered, which might have engaged it in error and 
superstition. I have often attributed my preserva- 
tion, amidst the greatest dangers which I have run 
since, to the care I took for its baptism." 



313 



CHAPTER XXV. 

Pierced Pine. — An Offering- and Prayer to the Falls. — The Vow 
fulfilled. — Picard forgets his Powder. — A great Serpent. — 
Disturbance in Camp. — The Law of Hunting. — Hennepin 
goes to the Wisconsin. — His Disappointment. — Is reduced to 
great Straits. — Indian and Thorn. — Effect of Excitement. — 
Great Alarm. — A Drove of Stags. — Fire Spirits. — Sieur 
du Luth. — His Equipage. — Hennepin's pretended Relation- 
ship. — Digs up his Property. — His Discoveries. — The Party 
leave the Indians. — They fire a parting Salute. — Its Effect. — 
They steal a votive Offering. — Arrive at Mackinaw. — Henne- 
pin's Description of Niagara Falls. 

The Indians by whom Hennepin and his com- 
panions had been carried into captivity he calls the 
Issati and Nadouessians, since known as the Sioux. 
He remained among them about three months, and 
then commenced his return down the Mississippi 
under the protection of a chief named Ouasiconde, 
which means the Pierced Pine. He was accom- 
panied by Picard du Gay. His other canoe man, 
Michael Ako, preferred to remain where he was 
than to incur the dangers of the return voyage. 

As they approached the Falls of the Mississippi, 
which Hennepin, their first European discoverer, 
had named the Falls of St. Anthony, after his patron 
saint, they perceived a number of savages, one of 
whom had ascended an oak-tree near the falls, and 
27 



314 AN OFFERING TO THE FALLS. 

had fastened an embroidered robe of castor skin to 
one of the branches, as an offering to the turbulent 
water. In addition to this sacrifice, he addressed 
the falls in the following language : " Thou art a 
spirit ; grant that those of my nation may pass here 
without any disaster, that we may meet with a great 
many wild bulls, and that we may be so happy as to 
vanquish our enemy and take a great many slaves, 
whom, when we have made them suffer accord- 
ing to their merits, we will bring hither and slay in 
thy presence. The Messenacks have slain some of 
our kindred ; grant that we may be able to revenge 
ourselves upon them for that offence." 

The promise or vow which this Indian made, of 
executing the captives which might be taken in war, 
was soon after executed ; for on their return from 
hunting buffaloes they fell in with their enemy, 
killed a number, and took several prisoners. These 
captives tbey took to the falls, and, after torturing 
them in a most barbarous manner, they put them to 
death. 

After our voyagers had descended about three 
miles below the falls, Picard du Gay missed his 
powder horn. After looking for it all round the 
canoe without success, he remembered that he had 
left it at the falls. As this was an important article, 
Picard was obliged to return and get it. When he 
came back, Hennepin showed him a huge serpent, 



A GREAT SERPENT. 315 

as large round as a man's leg, and seven or eight 
feet in length. It was ascending a steep, craggy 
rock to get at the swallows' nests, large numbers of 
which were there. They pelted it with stones until 
it fell into the river. It had a tongue of great 
length, in the form of a lance. Its hiss was star- 
tling, and could be heard a considerable distance. 
This adventure produced such an effect upon our 
travellers that both of thein dreamed of it frequently 
afterwards. 

When Hennepin overtook the Indians who had 
preceded him on the river, he found that they had 
encamped upon an island, and were plentifully pro- 
vided with buffalo meat, some of which they gave 
him and his companion, which was very acceptable. 
But in the course of a few hours, a dozen or more 
Indians came blustering into the encampment, with 
great clubs in their hands, and seemed desirous of 
provoking a quarrel. They overturned the tent of 
those who had extended to the Europeans their hos- 
pitality, carried off all the meat they could find, and 
the bladders of bears' oil they discovered they used 
in anointing themselves from head to foot. The 
Europeans supposed that these marauders were ene- 
mies, and prepared their weapons for an encounter 
with them. Fortunately, however, though there was 
much noise, bluster, and quarrelling, no blood was 
shed. Hennepin soon obtained an explanation of 



316 RULE OF HUNTING. 

the affair. It arose from a violation of Indian law 
or custom in buffalo hunting. The rule is, when 
any particular tribe are going after these animals, 
if a portion of the party arrive on the ground first, 
for them to remain until all the others of the tribe 
come, before the hunting begins, so that all may have 
an equal chance. But if the party who arrive first 
begin the hunt before the others are ready, it is 
lawful to plunder them of all that they take, as they 
drive the buffaloes away, and thus make it difficult, 
if not impossible, for the others to kill any. In the 
present case, the Indians who had extended their 
hospitalities to Hennepin and Du Gay had reached 
the ground first, and, without waiting for the rest of 
their tribe, had commenced the chase. When the 
others arrived, they found the game had been driven 
away; this so enraged them that they made the 
attack which has been described. 

When no impatience is exhibited, when the hunt- 
ers, as they come on the ground, wait until the 
whole band have arrived, they are then successful in 
surrounding large droves of buffaloes and cutting 
them nearly all off. As they are, to a great degree, 
dependent upon the success of the chase for their 
means of support, the observance of the established 
rule is a matter of great public interest. 

Whilst the savages were prosecuting the pleasures 
and profits of the chase, Hennepin, with his canoe 



Hennepin's disappointment. 317 

man, went down to the mouth of the Wisconsin 
River, where La Salle had promised to meet him, 
with men, stores, and merchandise. When he 
reached there, he found no evidence of La Salle's 
visit. He returned sadly disappointed. He was 
reduced to great straits. His powder, consisting of 
only six charges, he divided into twenty smaller 
ones, which he resolved to use in killing turtles and 
pigeons for food. These were soon all gone. He 
then had to betake himself to three fish-hooks, as 
his only means of support. With these he occa- 
sionally caught a good fish. After much fatigue and 
privation, he succeeded in regaining the hunting- 
ground. The Indians had just finished their sports, 
having obtained an abundance of buffalo meat. He 
joined their company. 

. One day an Indian came to him for him to ex- 
tract a thorn which he had unfortunately run deeply 
into his foot. Hennepin laid open the wound, and 
when in the act of putting a plaster upon it, the 
camp was suddenly thrown into great alarm by 
some unusual noise. All were in consternation. 
Two hundred warriors, armed with bows and arrows, 
immediately ran to ascertain the cause. The wound- 
ed Indian, whose foot Hennepin was doctoring, 
darted off, and ran as rapidly as the rest, that he 
might share in the approaching contest. But in- 
stead of an army of braves, all painted and decorated 
27* 



318 ALARM FROM A DROVE OF STAGS. 

for bloody warfare, they met with a drove of about 
a hundred stags, more frightened than themselves, 
which were running at the top of their speed. 
When the excitement was over, the poor thorn- 
pierced Indian found it no easy thing to regain the 
camp. His race had lacerated his wound, and made 
it difficult for him now to walk. 

Some time after this, another alarm occurred. 
Some old Indians, who were stationed on the top 
of the mountains to look out for the approach of 
enemies, sent word to the village that warriors were 
advancing from a distance. The Indians immedi- 
ately sallied out towards them, each eager to be the 
first in action ; but all that they saw were two of 
their own women, who had come to inform them 
that one of the parties who had gone a hunting 
towards the Upper Lake had discovered Fire spirits 
— the name by which they designated Europeans. 
By means of interpreters, these spirits informed the 
Indians who they were, and learnt from them that 
other Europeans were with their people at home. 
This made them anxious to visit the encampment, 
that they might learn whether the Europeans of 
whom they spoke were English, Dutch, Spaniards, 
or Canadians. 

These strangers who were found in the vicinity 
of the Upper Lake proved to be Sieur du Luth and 
five companions, from Canada. Both parties were 



HENNEPIN AND DU LUTH. 319 

overjoyed to see each other. Having been long ab- 
sent from home, roaming about among the wild sav- 
ages, it was a great comfort to meet those with 
whom they could converse in their own language, 
who had experienced similar perils and privations 
with themselves. The equipage of Sieur du Luth 
and his men made them appear " half soldier, half 
merchant." So careless had they been in keeping 
their reckonings that none of them could tell the 
day of the month. Hence they knew not when to 
observe the Sabbath nor their church festivals. 

As Du Luth was regarded with more reverence 
by the savages than Hennepin, he pretended that 
Hennepin was his brother ; this was the means of 
securing to Hennepin better treatment than he had 
previously received. 

On the 14th of August, 1680, the combined par- 
ties arrived at the village of the Issati or Sioux In- 
dians, where Hennepin had buried his chalice, books, 
and papers in the presence of the Indians. He found 
them all safe. None of them had been touched. Their 
preservation he attributes more to the superstition 
than the honesty of the Indians. The garden which 
he had cultivated there was filled with grass and 
weeds, yet his cabbage and purslain had grown finely. 

Hennepin was now anxious to return to Canada. 
He had explored the Mississippi from the mouth of 
the Wisconsin to some distance above the falls. 



320 HENNEPIN RETURNS HOME. 

These falls he discovered and named. The same 
was true of the River St. Francis, which he had 
called after his order. He had enlarged his knowl- 
edge of Indian customs and language. He wanted 
now to return and make known his discoveries and 
adventures. Accordingly, in the latter part of Sep- 
tember he bade the Indians adieu. He, with his 
canoe men and the Sieur du Luth's company, being 
eight in all, entered their canoes. As they left, 
Du Luth's men fired their guns as a farewell volley, 
which greatly terrified the natives who had gathered 
by the shore to see them depart. They descended 
the St. Francis, entered the Mississippi, and when 
they reached the Falls of St. Anthony, they found 
two skin robes which had been hung up as an offer- 
ing to the falls. Two of the men appropriated 
these to their own use. They continued coursing 
down the Mississippi till they reached the Wiscon- 
sin, which they entered, and sailed up as far as the 
portage. Crossing the portage, they launched their 
canoes again upon the waters of the Fox River, 
which conducted them to Green Bay, or Bay of 
Puans. They arrived at Mackinaw early in No- 
vember, eight months from the time that Hennepin 
left Fort Crevecceur. 

On his return to Canada, he paused some time at 
Niagara Falls, of which he wrote a minute, but 
exaggerated description, asserting them to be six 



Hennepin's description of Niagara. 321 

hundred feet high. He also made a drawing of 
them, which is probably the earliest picture of 
them extant. It differs somewhat from the present 
appearance of the falls, especially in having a 
stream or cascade of wafer projected from Table 
Rock, across the face of the main fall. No such 
stream exists now, from which it is inferred that 
since his visit large portions of the rock have fallen, 
and among them that portion over which this cross 
stream fell. 

We have now accomplished our object in giving 
a narrative of the adventures of the first explorers 
of North America. As we study the early history 
of our country, we cannot fail to admire the watch- 
ful care of a kind Providence. We cannot, per- 
haps, more appropriately close this volume than 
with the following interesting facts illustrative of 
this remark : — 

When Columbus was on his first voyage to this 
country, the direction of his vessel, as he neared the 
coast, was changed by a very trivial circumstance ; 
yet this change was followed by consequences of 
great importance. The westward direction which 
he was pursuing would have conducted him into the 
Gulf Stream. As by the power of this current he 
would have been borne northwardly, the first land 
which he would have reached would have been Flor- 



322 CHANGE OF DESTINY. 

ida or North Carolina. In that case, North America 
would have been discovered and possessed by a 
Roman Catholic power, and settled with a Roman 
Catholic, Spanish population. What would have 
been the condition of thts country, at the present 
time, if that had been the case, may be inferred 
from the present state and character of the Roman 
Catholic countries of South America. This result 
was escaped by a circumstance as unimportant as 
that of a flight of birds. After being tossed upon 
the waters of an unexplored ocean many days, with 
a mutinous crew, and incurring additional dangers 
every hour, Columbus was extremely anxious to 
discover land. There had been, for several days, 
indications that land could not be far off, but in 
what precise direction to look for it was unknown ; 
when one evening a flock of birds, said to have been 
parrots, were seen flying towards the south-west, 
as if seeking a place to pass the night. Pinzon, 
one of the officers of Columbus, persuaded the 
admiral to follow the direction of these birds, as 
he believed they were flying towards the nearest 
land. His advice was followed, and the result was, 
they discovered one of the West India islands, 
which was afterwards followed by the discovery of 
South America. If it had not been for this circum- 
stance, Columbus, by keeping on in the direction 
which he was previously pursuing, would have come 



SMALL VESSELS. 323 

upon the coast of North America, and then how 
different would have been the destiny of our coun- 
try ! Humboldt, in his " Cosmos," says, " Never 
had the flight of birds more important conse- 
quences. It may be said to have determined the 
first settlements on the new continent, and its 
distribution between the Latin and Germanic 
races." 

Another circumstance which may well excite 
surprise is, that the early navigators to the new 
world were willing to venture in vessels of such 
small tonnage, and so poorly fitted to endure the 
perils of the ocean. Mr. Bancroft says, " The 
daring and skill of these earliest adventurers upon 
the ocean deserve our highest admiration. The 
difficulties of crossing the Atlantic were new, and 
it required the greater courage to encounter haz- 
ards which ignorance exaggerated. The character 
of the prevalent winds and currents was unknown. 
The possibility of making a direct passage was but 
gradually discovered. The imagined dangers were 
infinite ; the real dangers exceedingly great. The 
ships at first employed for discovery were gen- 
erally of less than one hundred tons burden ; 
Frobisher sailed in a vessel of but twenty-five tons ; 
two of those of Columbus were without a deck ; 
and so perilous were the voyages deemed, that the 
sailors were accustomed, before embarking, to per- 



324 A KIND PROVIDENCE. 

form solemn acts of devotion, as if to prepare for 
eternity." 

As, therefore, notwithstanding their many disad- 
vantages, these early voyagers accomplished so 
much in the way of discovery, their success fur- 
nishes an impressive illustration of the watchful 
care of a kind Providence. 



LRB 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




011696 780 7 % 



